JP7766907B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute display effects using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines mentioned above, there was still room for improvement in terms of technology to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems and aims to increase the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate correspondence with the embodiments described below to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not in any way limit the present invention.

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is a display effect that displays a first image,
the second display effect is a display effect in which an operation means image representing the operation means is superimposed on the first image,
the third display effect is a display effect in which the first image is changed from a first color to a second color by operating the operating means,
the object represented by the first image displayed in the first display performance changes in shape,
The operation means image displayed in the second display performance is displayed in an area different from an area in which a decorative pattern is displayed,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by :

This invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the big prize device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. 10 is a diagram for explaining a special symbol winning determination table, etc. FIG. 10 is a first diagram for explaining a hit type determination table. FIG. 2 is a second diagram for explaining the hit type determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern determination table. A diagram for explaining the normal pattern winning determination table, etc. A diagram for explaining the electric chute opening pattern determination table. A diagram for explaining the large prize opening pattern determination table. 10 is a flowchart of a main control process. 10 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. 10 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 10 is a flowchart of a special action process. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol winning determination process. This is a first flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. 10 is a flowchart of a game status management process 1. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 10 is a flowchart of game status management processing 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a setting table for a time-saving counter. 10 is a flowchart of a game state reset process. This is a flowchart of special electric device processing 1. 10 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. This is a first flowchart of special electric device processing 2. This is a second flowchart of special electric device processing 2. 10 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member control process. 10 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. 10 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 10 is a flowchart of the variable effect start processing. An explanatory diagram illustrating the forward movement of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the illumination panel 18. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the lighting effects of a frame lamp 66. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative member 10. FIG. This is the first explanatory diagram illustrating the forward movement of the third movable part 17. This is a second explanatory diagram illustrating the forward movement of the third movable part 17. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a combination of reels. An explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display content change presentation A when a condition is met. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display content change effect B when a condition is met. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display content change effect C when a condition is met. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating icon display effect A. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an icon display effect B. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an icon display effect C. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning type expectation indication effect A. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the winning type expectation suggestion effect B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a winning type expectation indication effect C. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of icon delay display effect A. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of icon delay display effect B. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of icon delay display effect C. An explanatory diagram illustrating the time-saving number notification display A. An explanatory diagram illustrating the time-saving number notification display B. An explanatory diagram illustrating the time-saving number notification display C. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern irregular start/stop performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern irregular start/stop performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern irregular start/stop performance C. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a scrolling background effect A. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a scrolling background effect B. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a scrolling background effect C. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of image superimposition button effect A. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of image superimposition button effect B. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of image superimposition button effect C. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character selection presentation A. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character selection presentation B. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a character selection presentation C. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect A by the effect device. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect B by the effect device. An explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect C by the effect device.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the Gaming Machine The structure of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1. Figure 2 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the special prize device 36. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen from a player facing the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches gaming balls based on a player's launch operation, and when the gaming balls land on a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the player based on the winning. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, with the gaming board 2 attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit located in front of the outer and inner frames, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 can be seen through the opening.

The handle 60 is located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 and fires game balls with a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is located below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operating unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operating unit shaped like a sword and can be pressed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operating unit located at the upper end of the sword member 64, i.e., the end of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation in which the entire sword member 64 is pushed downward, and a second operation in which the sword button 65 at the tip is pressed. Frame lamps 66 are located around the opening of the front frame 53 and provide light effects during play. Speakers 67 are located at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 and provide sound effects during play.

The game board 2 includes a play area 3, rail members 4, board lamps 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, a fixed winning device (center) 19, a first variable winning device 31, a second variable winning device 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, an electric chute 29, an electric chute winning opening 34, a big winning device (attacker) 36, a general winning opening (normal winning opening) 27, an outlet 16, and indicators 40.

The play area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and has multiple protruding game pegs that guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is located at the left end of the play area 3 and guides game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the play area 3. The board lamp 5 is located on the rear side of the play area 3 and emits light from the rear side of the play area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are also provided on the inside of the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15, and are configured to allow the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15 to emit light in a specific manner.

Image display device 7 is located near the center of play area 3 and is equipped with a display screen 7a. Image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or other image display devices such as an organic EL display device, plasma display, projector, or dot matrix. Display screen 7a of image display device 7 has a performance symbol display area in which performance symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a hold image display area in which hold images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a hold digestion image display area in which hold digestion image 9C is displayed. Hold images 9A and 9B are images that represent a hold and are also called hold icons. Hold digestion image 9C is an image that represents that hold and is also called the hold icon. The hold icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to as simply hold icons or icons.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: left, center, and right. The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of multiple symbols representing numbers, for example, from "1" to "9." The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and second special symbol, described below. By combining the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas, the image display device 7 can clearly display to the player the results of the variable display of the first special symbol and second special symbol, displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and second special symbol display device 41b, described below, (the results of the big win and small win lottery).

For example, if a jackpot is won, a static display of a repeating number such as "777" is displayed. If a loss occurs, a random number such as "637" is displayed. This allows the player to easily grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the results of the jackpot and small jackpot lottery on the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not need to be fixed. The variable display of the variable symbol may be vertically scrolling or in other ways. Furthermore, if a small jackpot is won, a predetermined chance symbol such as "135" may be displayed, or a random number may be displayed. The combination of variable symbols displayed according to the results of each lottery is not limited to the above and can be freely set. Hereinafter, the display of the 8L, 8C, and 8R symbol symbols will be referred to as "variable symbol display," or simply as "variable display" or "variable display." Note that this decorative pattern variation effect counts the effect from the time the special pattern starts to vary until it is fixed and stopped (also called the special pattern variation period) as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the time from the time the special pattern starts to vary until it is fixed and stopped, the effect of that temporary stop is included in the decorative pattern variation effect.

In addition to the effect symbol change effect, the image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect that is performed in parallel with the jackpot game (second special game), demo effects for waiting customers, and the like. In the effect symbol change effect, in addition to the effect symbol, effect images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. In addition to the effect symbol, the image display device 7 may also display on the display screen 7a an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can indicate that a special symbol is changing or the result of a special symbol lottery. The identification display (fourth symbol) may also be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved image 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols (described below), and a second reserved display area that displays reserved image 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols (described below). By displaying reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols (displayed on the first special symbol reserve indicator 43a) and the number of reserved second special symbols (displayed on the second special symbol reserve indicator 43b) can be clearly displayed to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. Reserve consumption image 9C corresponds to the effect symbol (effect symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and by displaying reserved consumption image 9C, it can be clearly displayed to the player that the reserved first or second special symbol is being consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described below).

On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, there are provided first movable board bodies 14 (also referred to as first movable gadgets 14), which are movable gimmicks. The first movable gadgets 14 are configured with two semi-ring-shaped members located on the left and right sides, which can move left and right. The first movable gadgets 14 are normally stationary in retracted positions (Figure 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted positions toward the center of the display screen 7a so that they approach each other, and come to rest in an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. When the left and right members of the first movable gadget 14 combine in the advanced position, a ring-shaped decorative part is formed, which covers part of the image display device 7.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured with a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" that can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position above the image display device 7 (Figure 1), and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest in an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped in the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed below the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape that allows it to guide game balls rolling on the top surface of the stage section 11 to the first starting hole 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow in and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 can be seen through the illumination panel 18. In other words, the illumination panel 18 is positioned in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 can be seen through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating LED light from its edge surface. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display multiple types of images in multiple colors by varying the direction and color of the LED light irradiation.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is located below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3 and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball hole, fixed starting hole) 20. The entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the drawing of a lottery for the first special symbol (a big win or small win lottery). In other words, the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a special symbol winning random number, etc., and the determination of a big win, etc.

The first variable winning device 31 is positioned below the gate 28 in the gaming area 3 and includes a first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first ball opening) 30. The first starting opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first starting opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or prevents the reception of game balls by swinging open and closed. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first non-electric device 33. Game balls can enter the first starting opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. The entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 30 triggers a lottery for a first special symbol (a big win/small win lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 30 triggers the acquisition of a special symbol winning random number, etc., and the determination of a big win, etc.

The second variable winning device 22 is positioned below the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball hole, variable starting hole) 21. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers a lottery for a second special symbol (a lottery for a big win or small win). The second variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 that can move back and forth, and the second starting hole 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by a second non-electric device 24. A game ball can enter the second starting hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state (advancing state). It is sufficient for the second variable winning device 22 to allow a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state (retracted state), and it may be possible for a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed state.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located to the right of the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3 and is configured to allow gaming balls to pass through. The passage of a gaming ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery that determines whether or not to drive the electric chute 29 and open the electric chute winning opening 34. In other words, the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal symbol winning random number and a win determination.

The electric chute 29 is a movable member located below the gate 28 that can move back and forth, and this movement opens and closes the electric chute winning opening 34. When the electric chute 29 is in the open state (advance state), game balls can enter the electric chute winning opening 34, but when the electric chute 29 is in the closed state (retract state), game balls cannot enter the winning opening.

The electric chute winning opening 34 is equipped with a first winning opening 75, a second winning opening 76, and a distribution member 77 on the inside (see Figure 14). A gaming ball that enters the electric chute winning opening 34 is directed by the distribution member 77 to enter either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. When the ball enters the first winning opening 75, the weight of the entering gaming ball drives the first non-electric device 33, which opens the opening/closing member 32. This makes the first starting opening 30 available for ball entry. When a gaming ball enters the first starting opening 30, the weight of the entering gaming ball closes the opening/closing member 32. When the ball enters the second winning opening 76, the weight of the entering gaming ball drives the second non-electric device 24, which opens the movable member 23. This makes the second starting opening 21 available for ball entry. When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21, the weight of the entering gaming ball closes the movable member 23. The first non-electric device 33 and the second non-electric device 24 are so-called non-electric chute devices. The distribution member 77 distributes the gaming ball that enters the electric chute winning hole 34 so that it enters either the first winning hole 75 or the second winning hole 76.

Here, "special symbol lottery" refers to the process of obtaining a random number for determining the special symbol when a gaming ball enters the first starting slot 20, 30 or the second starting slot 21, and comparing this obtained random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" or "small jackpot" to determine whether or not a jackpot or small jackpot has been obtained. The results of the "jackpot" and "small jackpot" lottery are not immediately notified to the player; rather, the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b (described below) displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a static display (confirmed display), thereby notifying the player of the lottery result. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the display of effect symbols changes in synchronization with the display of the variable special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result.

Furthermore, "drawing a normal symbol" refers to the process of obtaining a random number for determining a normal symbol when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, and comparing this obtained random number with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win" to determine whether or not a win has occurred. The result of this normal symbol drawing is not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28; rather, a fluctuating display of the normal symbol is performed on normal symbol display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the drawing result is displayed as a confirmed result (lit or extinguished), and the player is notified of the drawing result.

The large prize device (second attacker, second special variable prize device) 36 is located below the first starting hole 30 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a large prize opening (special prize opening) 35. The large prize opening 35 is equipped with an opening/closing member (special prize opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that blocks or allows the reception of game balls with a shutter-like opening and closing action. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a large prize opening solenoid 38. Game balls can enter the large prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The special prize device 36 is internally provided with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a, a special prize opening sensor 35a, a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas within the special prize device 36 through which a gaming ball that has passed through the special prize opening 35 can pass. The special prize opening sensor 35a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the entry of a gaming ball into the special prize opening 35. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39 and detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of a gaming ball into the non-V area 70. The V-opening/closing member 71 distributes game balls that pass through the large prize opening 35 to either the V-zone 39 or the non-V-zone 70. The V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening/closing member 71. The V-opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise relative to the game board 2). When the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates clockwise from the origin position to distribute game balls to the V-zone 39, entering a first state (rotating state). When the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is positioned at the origin and distributes game balls to the non-V-zone 70, entering a second state (stopped state). Note that the V-opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may be configured to move left and right relative to the game board 2 as long as it has the function of distributing game balls that pass through the first large prize opening 30 to either the V-zone 39 or the non-V-zone 70. In other words, when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retracted state (first state) in which the game balls are distributed to the V region 39, and when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state (second state) in which the game balls are distributed to the non-V region 70.

Figure 2 (A) shows the state when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V-opening/closing member 71 is in a state (first state) that allows game balls to pass through to the V-region 39. When the V-opening/closing member 71 is in the first state, a game ball that enters the special prize opening 35 passes through the special prize opening sensor 35a and then passes through the V-region 39 (route A in Figure 2 (A)). This game ball route is called the "first route." Figure 2 (B) shows the state when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V-opening/closing member 71 is in a state (second state) that prevents game balls from passing through to the V-region 39. When the V-opening/closing member 71 is in the second state, a gaming ball that enters the large prize opening 35 passes through the large prize opening sensor 35a, then rolls on the top surface of the V-opening/closing member 71 and passes through the non-V area 70 (route B in Figure 2 (B)). This route of the gaming ball is called the "second route." In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V area 39 triggers the execution of a jackpot game (second special game) described below. In other words, the lottery to determine whether or not the gaming ball has successfully passed through the V area 39 also determines whether or not a jackpot has been won. A jackpot won by the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern described above is also called a "Type 1 jackpot," and a jackpot won by the passage of the gaming ball into the V area 39 is also called a "Type 2 jackpot."

Returning to Figure 1, two regular winning holes 27 are provided at the bottom of the game area 3. The number of regular winning holes 27 can be set as desired. The outlet 16 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3, and ejects game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes out of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are located at the bottom right of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The gaming area 3 has a left gaming area 3A to the left of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right gaming area 3B to the right. Shooting a gaming ball so that it flows down through the left gaming area 3A is called a "left hit." On the other hand, shooting a gaming ball so that it flows down through the right gaming area 3B is called a "right hit." The gaming machine 1 is configured so that a left hit allows a player to aim for a win at the first starting gate 20. On the other hand, a right hit allows a player to aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the first starting gate 30, the second starting gate 21, and the big winning gate 35.

3 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, a normal symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reserved display device 43a, and
The game includes a second special symbol reserve display 43b and a regular symbol reserve display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The regular symbol display 42 variably displays the regular symbol. The first special symbol reserve display 43a displays the number of activation reserves (first special symbol reserves) stored in the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserve display 43b displays the number of activation reserves (second special symbol reserves) stored in the second special symbol display 41b. The regular symbol reserve display 44 displays the number of activation reserves (regular symbol reserves) stored in the regular symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20, 30. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41." The first special symbol reserve display 43a and the second special symbol reserve display 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve display 43."

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (changes in display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays it in a stopped state to announce the results of the lottery (special symbol winning lottery, jackpot/small jackpot lottery) based on winning at the first starting port 20, 30 or the second starting port 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, a jackpot game (second special game) is played in which the large winning port 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that is won). Furthermore, if the stopped symbol is a special symbol (small win symbol) with a predetermined small win stop pattern, a small win game (first special game) is played in which the large prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of small win symbol that has stopped and been displayed (the type of small win that has been won). The opening patterns of the large prize opening 35 in the first special game or second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged horizontally, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery according to the lighting pattern of the LEDs. For example, in the event of a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), a jackpot symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, such as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: unlit). In the event of a minor jackpot (one of the multiple types of minor jackpots described below), a minor jackpot symbol is displayed with the fifth and sixth LEDs from the left lit, such as "●●●●○○●●." In the event of a loss, a losing symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, such as "●●●●●●●○." A losing symbol may also be displayed in which all LEDs are turned off. Before the special symbol is statically displayed, a variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is displayed for a predetermined period of time. The variable display may be, for example, such that each LED lights up to create a repeated stream of light from left to right. The variable display mode is not limited to the above modes and can be any lighting mode as long as the LEDs are not displayed as stopped (illuminated in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, 30 or the second starting hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers, such as the special symbol winning random number, acquired for that entry are temporarily stored in the special symbol reserve memory area 85 ( FIG. 6 ). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, 30, it is stored as a first special symbol reserve in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a ( FIG. 6 ). If the game ball enters the second starting hole 21, it is stored as a second special symbol reserve in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b ( FIG. 6 ). There is an upper limit to the number of special symbol reserves that can be stored in each special symbol reserve memory area 85; in this embodiment, the upper limit is four for the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a and four for the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. The reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol reserve memory area 85 are consumed when variable display of the special symbol based on that reserved special symbol becomes possible. "Consuming a reserved special symbol" refers to determining the random number of a special symbol corresponding to the reserved special symbol and then displaying the variable special symbol to indicate the result of the determination. Therefore, even if the game machine 1 cannot immediately display the variable special symbol based on the winning ball entering the first starting slot 20, 30, or the second starting slot 21 after the winning ball enters the game, i.e., even if the winning ball enters the game while the variable special symbol display is being executed or during a special game (jackpot game or small jackpot game), the right to enter the lottery for the winning ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on the reserved special symbol display 43. The first reserved special symbol display 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second reserved special symbol display 43b is composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each reserved special symbol display 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting up the LEDs corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of a gaming ball through gate 28. After variably displaying (variably displaying) the normal symbol, normal symbol display device 42 displays it in a static state, thereby announcing the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the gaming ball through gate 28. The statically displayed normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from multiple types of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol with a predetermined stop pattern, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which first start hole 30 and second start hole 21 are opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. The opening patterns of first start hole 30 and second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery by changing the lighting pattern of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, the normal winning symbol is displayed with the first and second LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, the normal losing symbol is displayed with only the middle LED lit, as in "●○●". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off may be used to indicate a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbol is displayed as a static symbol, the normal symbol is displayed as a variable symbol for a predetermined variable time. The variable display pattern may be, for example, such that each LED lights up so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The variable display pattern is not limited to the above pattern and can be any lighting pattern as long as each LED is not displayed as a static symbol (a lit symbol in a specific pattern). For example, the variable display pattern may be such that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, the value of the normal symbol winning random number acquired for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal symbol reserve in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86 (Figure 6). There is a limit to the number of normal symbol reserves that can be stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86, and in this embodiment, the limit is one. The normal symbol reserve stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86 is consumed when variable display of the normal symbol based on that normal symbol reserve becomes possible. Consumption of a normal symbol reserve refers to determining the normal symbol winning random number corresponding to that normal symbol reserve and executing variable display of the normal symbol to indicate the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if variable display of the normal symbol based on the gaming ball's passage through gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, i.e., even if a winning occurs while variable display of the normal symbol is being executed or an auxiliary game is being executed, the right to draw a normal symbol for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of normal symbol reserves is displayed on the normal symbol reserve display 44. The general map reservation indicator 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of general map reservations by lighting up the LEDs corresponding to the number of general map reservations.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 4 and 5. Figure 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine 1. Figure 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (Figure 4), a sub-control board 90 (Figure 5), an image control board 100 (Figure 5), a lamp control board 107 (Figure 5), a sound control board 106 (Figure 5), and a payout control board 110 (Figure 4). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as big win and small win lotteries and game state transitions, and constitutes the main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a presentation control board that controls presentations executed as the game progresses, and constitutes the sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, lamp control board 107, and sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80 and controls the progress of play on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of play, a main RAM 84 used as work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port unit) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first start gate sensor 20a, the second start gate sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first start gate sensor 30a, the large prize gate sensor 35a, the V-area sensor 39a, the non-V-area sensor 70a, and the regular prize gate sensor 27a. They are connected via the relay board 88. The first start gate sensor 20a is located inside the first start gate 20 and detects game balls that enter the first start gate 20. The second start gate sensor 21a is located inside the second start gate 21 and detects game balls that enter the second start gate 21. The gate sensor 28a is located inside the gate 28 and detects game balls that pass through the gate 28. The first start opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first start opening 30 and detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 30. The large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have entered the large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27 and detects game balls that have entered the regular prize opening 27.

Examples of solenoids include the electric chute solenoid 29a, the distribution member solenoid 77a, the special prize opening solenoid 38, and the V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73. The electric chute solenoid 29a drives the electric chute 29. The distribution member solenoid 77a drives the distribution member 77. The special prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the special prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the special prize opening 35.

Displays 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserve display 43a, the second special symbol reserve display 43b, and the normal symbol reserve display 44.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to a prize ball payout device 120, a loan ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135, and is also connected to a launching device 112 via a launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives a prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid-out prize balls are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball dispensing motor 131 of the ball dispensing device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. Dispensed balls are detected by a ball dispensing sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is located adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball dispensing based on information from an inserted prepaid card, etc. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When a player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects contact with the handle 60 using the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 using the launching volume 115. The launching motor 113 is then driven to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launching volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting communication direction.

The sub-control board 90 includes a presentation control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The presentation control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer implemented on the sub-control board 90, and controls the presentation of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The presentation control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling presentations as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The presentation control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the presentation control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer implemented on the image control board 100 and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. The ROM 103 stores not only the program for display control but also still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect designs) and background images. The RAM 104 is used as memory for expanding the image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from ROM 103 based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may also have a CPU implemented, and the CPU may be caused to execute audio control based on commands. The audio control board 106 may also have a ROM implemented, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to execute audio control. The audio data may also be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to and controls the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role element 14, and the second movable role element 15. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 (including the lamps of the first movable role element 14 and the second movable role element 15) via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates lighting pattern data (data determining the on/off status, light color, etc., also known as lamp data) that determines the lighting mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the lighting pattern data. The lighting pattern data is created using data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role element 14 and the second movable role element 15 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operating modes of the first movable role element 14 and the second movable role element 15, and controls the operation of these movable roles according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may also be equipped with a CPU, which may be used to control the lighting of lamps and the operation of movable roles based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may also be equipped with a ROM, which may store data related to lighting patterns and operation patterns.

The relay board 108 is connected to a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, the sub-control board 90 can cause the performance button 63 and the select button 68 to perform light-emitting performances via the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 6 and 7. Figure 6(A) is a diagram illustrating tables stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 6(B) is a diagram illustrating storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 7(A) is a diagram illustrating tables stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 7(B) is a diagram illustrating storage areas provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6A) stores a special symbol winning determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol winning type determination table T3, a special symbol change pattern determination table T4, a normal symbol winning determination table T5, a normal symbol winning type determination table T6, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T7, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T8, and a large prize opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (Figure 6 (B)) is provided with a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special symbol reserve memory area 85, and a normal symbol reserve memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit during the main control main processing (described below) are set, and includes a variation start command, variation stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, advance judgment command, customer waiting standby command, reserved ball count command, normal symbol variation start command, normal symbol variation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal symbol ending command, etc. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main processing (described later), including a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a small jackpot flag, a small jackpot end flag, a V flag, a ceiling flag, a time-saving flag, and a V-opening/closing member operation flag. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a first time-saving counter, a second time-saving counter, and a third time-saving counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area where statuses in the special action processing (FIG. 20) described later are set. The special symbol reserve memory area 85 includes a first special symbol reserve memory area 85a in which a first special symbol reserve is stored, and a second special symbol reserve memory area 85b in which a second special symbol reserve is stored. The first special symbol reserved memory area 85a has first to fourth memory areas for storing random number groups (reserved information), such as random numbers for winning special symbols corresponding to the first to fourth reserved first symbols, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b has first to fourth memory areas for storing random number groups (reserved information), such as random numbers for winning normal symbols corresponding to the first reserved normal symbol. The regular symbol reserved memory area 86 has a first memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information), such as random numbers for winning normal symbols corresponding to the first reserved normal symbol. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also has a win type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and other buffers. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the gaming machine 1 is powered on or off, and remains unchanged. In other words, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and reserved information remain unchanged even when the power is turned on or off, and the information is maintained. Meanwhile, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Also, the ceiling counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 500) and the other counters are set to "0" as the initial state of the counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (Figure 7(A)) stores a variable effect pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a time-saving effect scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T55. These determination tables are referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main processing (described below) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, a performance command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side in the sub-control main processing (described later) are stored, and stores a variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a pre-determination command, a customer waiting standby command, a reserved ball number command, a normal symbol variation start command, a normal symbol variation stop command, a normal symbol opening command, a normal symbol ending command, and the like. The effect command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, lamp control board 107, and audio control board 106 during the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and commands such as a variable effect start command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, a normal symbol variable effect start command, a normal symbol variable effect end command, a normal symbol opening effect start command, and a normal symbol ending effect start command are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information during the sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special symbol hold effect counter, a second special symbol hold effect counter, a normal symbol hold effect counter, a first time-saving effect counter, a second time-saving effect counter, a third time-saving effect counter, a ceiling effect counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, all but the overnight effect counter (not shown) are not cleared and are maintained as they are when the gaming machine 1 is powered off or on. In other words, the above commands, counters other than the overnight effect counter, and advance judgment information do not change state when the gaming machine 1 is powered off or on, and the information is maintained. The overnight effect counter is reset when the gaming machine 1 is powered off or on, and is set to 0 as its initial state. The information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 500) as its initial state, and the other counters are set to 0.

FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 8(A) shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 8(B) shows random numbers acquired by the presentation control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The game control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "special symbol win random number," a "special symbol win type random number," a "reach random number," a "variable pattern random number," a "normal symbol win random number," and a "normal symbol win type random number" at timings described below. The "special symbol win random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether a player has won a jackpot, a small win, a miss (sudden time reduction), or a miss (jackpot/small win lottery) and takes a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The "special symbol win type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether a player has won a jackpot or a small win (win type determination) and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether a reach occurs in the effect pattern variation effect that indicates a result of a miss when the jackpot/minor win determination is made, and it ranges from 0 to 127. A reach refers to a state in which only one of the multiple effect patterns (decorative patterns) remains, and depending on which of the effect patterns displayed as a stop symbol appears, a combination of effect patterns indicating a jackpot or a minor win (e.g., a "7↓7" state) may result. Note that the effect symbols displayed as a stop symbol in the reach state may appear to be oscillating within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine the variation pattern, including the variation time, and ranges from 0 to 127. The "normal symbol win random number" is a random number used in the winning lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play the auxiliary game that opens the first variable winning device 31 and the second variable winning device 22, and ranges from 0 to 255. The "normal symbol winning type random number" is a random number used to determine the type of winning (winning type determination) in the normal symbol lottery, and takes on a value ranging from 0 to 65535. The "special symbol winning random number,""special symbol winning type random number,""reach random number," and "variable pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting gate (first starting gate 20 or second starting gate 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting gate 20 is stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting gate 21 is stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. The "normal symbol winning random number" and "normal symbol winning type random number" are obtained based on the passage through gate 28. The obtained normal symbol winning random number value and normal symbol winning type random number value are stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "variable effect pattern random number," a "time-saving effect scenario random number," and a "pre-reading effect random number" at the timing described below. The "variable effect pattern random number" is a random number used to determine the variable effect pattern and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect during a variable effect and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-reading effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-reading effect during a variable effect and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "variable effect pattern random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number value is stored in sub-RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number value is stored in sub-RAM 94. The "pre-reading effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in sub-RAM 94.

Figure 9 is a diagram illustrating the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. Figure 9(A) shows a diagram illustrating the special symbol hit determination table T1, and Figure 9(B) shows a diagram illustrating the reach determination table T2.

The special symbol hit determination table T1 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control process (described below) to determine whether the acquired special symbol hit random number value (any value between 0 and 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot," "small hit," "miss (sudden time reduction)," or "miss." Figure 9 (A) shows that in the lottery for the first special symbol (Special Symbol 1), if the special symbol hit random number value is between 0 and 210, it is determined to be a "jackpot," if the special symbol hit random number value is between 10,000 and 10,500, it is determined to be a "small hit," if the special symbol hit random number value is between 20,000 and 22,100, it is determined to be a "miss (sudden time reduction)," and if the special symbol hit random number value is any value between 0 and 65,535 other than those listed above, it is determined to be a "miss." Additionally, in the lottery for the second special symbol (Special Symbol 2), if the random number value for the special symbol is between 0 and 210, it is determined to be a "big win," and if the random number value for the special symbol is any number between 0 and 65535 other than those listed above, it is determined to be a "small win."

The reach determination table T2 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired reach random number value (any value between 0 and 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach." Figure 9 (B) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the reach random number value is between 0 and 13, it is determined to be "reach," and if the reach random number value is a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined to be "no reach." Also, in the "time-saving state," if the reach random number value is between 0 and 5, it is determined to be "reach," and if the reach random number value is a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127), it is determined to be "no reach." The details of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" are described below. In the reach determination table T2, reach is less likely to occur when a miss occurs in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because when in time-saving mode, more no-reach misses with short fluctuation times are selected, speeding up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The special symbol win type determination table T3 will be described with reference to Figures 10 and 11. Figure 10 is a diagram illustrating the special symbol win type determination table T3 in the lottery for special symbol 1. Figure 11 is a diagram illustrating the special symbol win type determination table T3 in the lottery for special symbol 2. The special symbol win type determination table T3 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described below) to determine the "jackpot type" or "small jackpot type" and the "type of special symbol" according to the special symbol win type random number value (any value between 0 and 127) acquired. In Figure 10, when a "jackpot" is won in the lottery for special symbol 1 in the "non-time-saving mode," if the special symbol win type random number value is "0 to 15," the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R time-saving 150-cycle jackpot," and the stopped symbol of special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 stopped symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is determined to be "time-saving symbol 1." If the special symbol winning type random number value is "16 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R time-saving 100 times jackpot", and the special symbol 1 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving symbol 2". On the other hand, if a "small jackpot" is won in the lottery for special symbol 1 during "non-time-saving mode", regardless of the special symbol winning type random number value (whether it is 0 to 127), the small jackpot type is determined to be a "3R normal small jackpot (V passage is virtually impossible)", and the special symbol 1 stopping pattern is determined to be "non-time-saving small jackpot symbol 1".

When a "jackpot" is won in the drawing for Special Chart 1 during "time-saving mode," the jackpot type is determined to be a "3R time-saving 100 times jackpot" and the stopped symbol on Special Chart 1 is determined to be "time-saving symbol 3," regardless of the random number value for the special symbol type (whether it is 0-127). On the other hand, when a "small jackpot" is won in the drawing for Special Chart 1 during "time-saving mode," the small jackpot type is determined to be a "3R normal small jackpot (effectively unable to pass through V)," regardless of the random number value for the special symbol type (whether it is 0-127), and the stopped symbol on Special Chart 1 is determined to be "non-time-saving small jackpot symbol 2."

In Figure 11, when a "jackpot" is won in the lottery for special symbol 2 in the "non-time-saving state," the jackpot type is determined to be a "3R time-saving single jackpot" regardless of the special symbol win type random number value (regardless of whether it is 0 to 127), and the stopped symbol of special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 stopped symbol) displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined to be "time-saving symbol 1." On the other hand, when a "small jackpot" is won in the lottery for special symbol 2 in the "non-time-saving state," if the special symbol win type random number value is "0 to 63," the small jackpot type is determined to be a "3R time-saving single small jackpot (V passage possible)," and the stopped symbol of special symbol 2 of special symbol 2 displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined to be "time-saving small jackpot symbol 1." If the special symbol win type random number value is "64-127", the small win type is determined to be "3R normal small win (V passing possible)" and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "non-time-saving small win symbol 1".

When a "jackpot" is won in the lottery for Special Chart 2 during "time-saving mode," if the random number value for the special pattern win type is "0-79," the jackpot type is determined to be a "5R time-saving single jackpot," and the special chart 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving single jackpot." If the random number value for the special pattern win type is "80-127," the jackpot type is determined to be a "3R time-saving single jackpot," and the special chart 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving single jackpot." On the other hand, when a "small jackpot" is won in the lottery for Special Chart 2 during "time-saving mode," if the random number value for the special pattern win type is "0-63," the small jackpot type is determined to be a "3R time-saving single small jackpot (V passing possible)," and the special chart 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving single small jackpot pattern 2." If the special symbol win type random number value is "64-127", the small win type is determined to be a "3R normal small win (V passing possible)", and the special symbol 2 stopping pattern is determined to be a "small win symbol 2 without time reduction". By referencing the special symbol win type determination table T3, it is possible to identify the "special symbol stopping pattern data" corresponding to the special symbol stopping patterns (special symbol 1 stopping patterns and special symbol 2 stopping patterns), as well as the special game's "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command". The specific contents of each big win and small win will be described later.

FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine a fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127). For example, FIG. 12 shows that when a ball enters the first starting slot 20 or 30 in a non-time-saving mode, the special symbol hit determination table T1 determines a "jackpot," and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "111 to 127," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P2." Also, for example, when a ball enters the first starting slot 20 or 30 in a non-time-saving mode, the special symbol hit determination table T1 determines a "miss," the reach determination table T2 determines a "no reach," and the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P6," regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number value (whether it is 0 to 127). Also, for example, if a prize is won in the second starting slot 21 in the time-saving state and the special symbol hit determination table T1 determines a "small hit," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P14" regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number value (any value between 0 and 127). As shown in FIG. 12, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, if a reach occurs, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). In addition, if a super reach occurs, it is also determined whether there will be a pseudo-consecutive win.

Figure 13(A) shows a diagram illustrating the normal symbol win determination table T5, Figure 13(B) shows a diagram illustrating the normal symbol win type determination table T6, and Figure 13(C) shows a diagram illustrating the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. The normal symbol win determination table T5 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol win random number value (any value between 0 and 255) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss." Figure 13(A) shows that in the lottery for a normal symbol (normal symbol) in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol win random number value is "0 to 2," it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol win random number value is "any value between 0 and 254 other than the above," it is determined to be a "loss." In the "time-saving mode" normal symbol (regular symbol) lottery, if the random number value for the normal symbol is "0-254," it is determined to be a "win," and if the random number value for the normal symbol is "any number between 0-254 other than the above," it is determined to be a "lose."

The normal symbol winning type determination table T6 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine the "winning type" and "normal symbol type" according to the acquired normal symbol winning type random number value (any value between 0 and 65535). Figure 13 (B) shows that when a normal symbol is drawn in a "non-time-saving mode," the winning type is determined to be "short release" and the normal symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 1" regardless of the normal symbol winning type random number value (any value between 0 and 65535). On the other hand, when a normal symbol is drawn in a "time-saving mode," the portion of the determination table T6 that is referenced differs depending on when the game mode entered the time-saving mode. Specifically, during the time-saving state executed after winning the special drawing 1 during the a time-saving state (time-saving state after a jackpot), and during the b time-saving state (play time) and the c time-saving state (sudden time-saving state), when a win is made in the normal drawing, as shown in the "Special Drawing 1 Time-saving State" in Figure 13 (B), if the normal pattern winning type random number value is "0 to 65300", the winning type is determined to be "long opening 1", and the normal pattern stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display 42 (normal pattern stopping pattern) is determined to be "winning pattern 2". If the normal pattern winning type random number value is "65301 to 65535", the winning type is determined to be "long opening 2", and the normal pattern stopping pattern is determined to be "winning pattern 3". During the time reduction (time reduction after a jackpot), when a regular symbol is selected during the time reduction state executed after winning the special symbol 2 lottery, as shown in "Special symbol 2 time reduction state" in Figure 13 (B), regardless of the regular symbol winning type random number value (any value between 0 and 65535), the winning type is determined to be "Long Open 2", and the regular symbol stopping pattern (regular symbol stopping pattern) displayed on the regular symbol display 42 is determined to be "Winning pattern 3".

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 references during the main control processing (described below) to determine the normal symbol fluctuation time depending on the normal symbol lottery result and the type of win. Figure 13 (C) shows, for example, that when the normal symbol lottery result in the non-time-saving state is a "win" and the win type is a "short release," the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "1 second." It also shows, for example, that when the normal symbol lottery result in the time-saving state is a "lose," the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "1 second."

Figure 14 is a diagram illustrating the electric chute opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 references during the main control processing (described below) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 according to the normal stopping symbol (normal stopping symbol data). Figure 14 (A) shows that, for example, when the normal stopping symbol is "winning symbol 1," the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 is determined to be "opening pattern 11," and, for example, when the normal stopping symbol is "winning symbol 3," the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 13."

When the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 is "Opening Pattern 11," it is difficult for a game ball to win either the first variable winning device 31 or the second variable winning device 22. When it is "Opening Pattern 12," it is easy for a game ball to win the first variable winning device 31, but it is difficult for a game ball to win the second variable winning device 22. When it is "Opening Pattern 13," it is difficult for a game ball to win the first variable winning device 31, but it is easy for a game ball to win the second variable winning device 22. The mechanism behind this is explained below.

Figure 14 (B) shows the contents of each opening pattern 11 to 13. In opening pattern 11, after winning the regular lottery, the electric chute 29 opens once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 29 opens once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. In opening pattern 13, the electric chute 29 opens once with an opening (OP) time of 5 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls win, the electric chute 29 will close even if there is remaining opening time.

FIG. 14C shows each opening pattern 11-13 and the direction of movement of the gaming ball. The electric chute winning opening 34 is equipped with a first winning opening 75, a second winning opening 76, and a distribution member 77 on the inside. A gaming ball that enters the electric chute winning opening 34 is directed by the distribution member 77 to enter either the first winning opening 75 or the second winning opening 76. After a winning lottery is won, the distribution member 77 maintains a state (first state) in which the gaming ball enters the first winning opening 75 but does not enter the second winning opening 76 for four seconds from the opening (OP) time. The distribution member 77 then switches its direction and maintains a state (second state) in which the gaming ball does not enter the first winning opening 75 but enters the second winning opening 76 for five seconds. The distribution member 77 then switches its direction again, returning to the first state. In release pattern 11, the electric chute 29 has an open time (advance position time) of 0.02 seconds, so a gaming ball flowing down the right gaming area 3B cannot be drawn into the electric chute winning opening 34. Therefore, even if the electric chute 29 executes release pattern 11, the gaming ball will not enter the electric chute winning opening 34. In release pattern 12, the electric chute 29 opens (moves to the advance position) for 3 seconds after an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds. The distribution member 77 is in a first state in which the gaming ball enters the first winning opening 75 but not the second winning opening 76 for 4 seconds after the opening (OP) time. Therefore, a gaming ball that enters the electric chute winning opening 34 while the electric chute 29 is open always enters the first winning opening 75. When the gaming ball enters the first winning opening 75, the weight of the entering gaming ball drives the first non-electric device 33, opening the opening/closing member 32. This places the first starting hole 30 in a ball-entry state. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 30, the weight of the entering game ball closes the opening/closing member 32. In opening pattern 13, the electric chute 29 opens (moves to the advance position) for three seconds after the opening (OP) time of five seconds. The distribution member 77 maintains the first state for four seconds from the opening (OP) time, and then switches to a second state in which the game ball is prevented from entering the first winning hole 75 and enters the second winning hole 76. Therefore, a game ball that enters the electric chute winning hole 34 while the electric chute 29 is open always enters the second winning hole 76. When the game ball enters the second winning hole 76, the weight of the entering game ball drives the second non-electric device 24, opening the movable member 23. This places the second starting hole 21 in a ball-entry state. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the weight of the game ball closes the movable member 23.

Figure 15 is a diagram illustrating the large prize opening pattern determination table T9. The large prize opening pattern determination table T9 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described below) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stopping pattern (special symbol stopping pattern data). In Figure 15 (A), when the special symbol stopping pattern data is "11H", "12H", or "25H", the opening pattern of first large prize opening 30 and large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special symbol stopping pattern data is "15H", "21H", or "26H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 22", when the special symbol stopping pattern data is "13H" or "16H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 23", and when the special symbol stopping pattern data is "22H", "13H", "27H", or "28H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 24".

Figure 15 (B) shows the contents of each opening pattern 21 to 24. In opening pattern 21, after a 6-second opening (OP), the large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds in rounds 1 to 5. The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 remains closed. In opening pattern 22, after a 6-second opening (OP), the large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds in rounds 1 to 3. The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 remains closed. In opening pattern 23, after a 4-second opening (OP), the large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds in rounds 1 to 3. After the opening (OP), the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 opens and closes at a predetermined timing. In opening pattern 24, after an opening (OP) of 0.01 seconds, the special prize opening 35 is opened once in rounds 1 to 3 for an opening time of 29.5 seconds. After the opening (OP), the V-shaped opening member 71 is opened and closed at a predetermined timing. Note that if a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special prize opening 35 (the specified number of winning balls, up to 9), the special prize opening 35 will be closed even if there is remaining opening time.

4. Explanation of Jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, the results of the special symbol lottery (jackpot/small jackpot lottery) are a "jackpot," a "small jackpot," and a "miss." In the case of a "jackpot," a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "small jackpot," a "small jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "miss," a "miss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game (second special game)" is executed in which the large prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. When a small jackpot is won, a "small jackpot game (first special game)" is executed in which the large prize opening 35 is opened once (in the first round) in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of small jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Then, when a gaming ball enters the V region 39 inside the large prize opening 35 during the execution of the small prize game, a "large prize game (second special game)" is executed in which the large prize opening 35 (in the second and third rounds) is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of small prize that has been won. A large prize game that is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a large prize winning is also called a "type 1 large prize game." A large prize game that is executed based on the passage of a gaming ball into the V region 39 is also called a "type 2 large prize game." The large prize game and the small prize game are also called "special games." This special game may include rounds in which the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round.

A jackpot game includes multiple rounds of play (unit opening games) that open the large prize opening 35, an opening (OP) before the first round of play begins, and an ending (ED) after the final round of play ends. Each round of play begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round of play, and ends with the start of the next round of play. The time (interval time) during which the large prize opening 35 is closed between rounds of play is included in the open round play before that closure. A small prize game includes a small prize opening game that opens the large prize opening 35 for the first time (first round), an opening (pre-opening interval) before the small prize opening game begins, and an ending (post-closing interval) after the small prize opening game ends.

There are multiple types of jackpots. Here, the jackpot types are "5R Time-Shortened 150-Time Jackpot," "5R Time-Shortened 100-Time Jackpot," "5R Time-Shortened 1-Time Jackpot," and "3R Time-Shortened 1-Time Jackpot." These jackpots are jackpots that control the game state to the "time-shortened state and high base state" described below after a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game) that opens the jackpot slot 35 over 5R or 3R is executed. Meanwhile, these jackpots each have a different number of time-shortened periods at which the "time-shortened state and high base state" after the jackpot game ends. Here, the "number of time-shortened periods" refers to the number of variable display (variable display) of special symbols that can be executed in the "time-shortened state and high base state" after the jackpot game, and is preset for each jackpot type. For example, in a "5R Time-Shortened 150-Time Jackpot," the number of time-shortened periods is 150, and in a "5R Time-Shortened 100-Time Jackpot," the number of time-shortened periods is 100. The "time-saving state and high base state" will end if a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed, even if the time-saving count has not yet been reached.

There are multiple types of small wins. Here, the types of small wins are "3R normal small win (V passing practically impossible)," "3R normal small win (V passing possible)," and "3R time-saving single small win (V passing possible)." In a small win, a small win game is first executed, and if the game ball passes through the V area 39 (V passing), a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed. Therefore, in a small win, the opening of the large prize opening 35 as a small win game corresponds to the first round, and if a V pass is made, the jackpot game that opens the large prize opening 35 over two rounds, which is executed afterwards, corresponds to the second round and the third round. If there is no V pass during the small win game, a jackpot game is not executed. Here, a "3R normal small win (V passing practically impossible)" is a small win in which V passing is practically impossible. On the other hand, a "3R normal small win (V passing possible)" and a "3R time-saving single small win (V passing possible)" are small wins in which V passing is possible. Whether or not V passage is possible during a small win game can be set by the operation pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 37 of the big win device 36. Specifically, this is as follows:

For each of the above small wins, the large prize opening 35 is opened once for 29.5 seconds during the small win game after winning (Figure 15). Meanwhile, the opening time during the small win game differs depending on the type of small win. Specifically, the "3R normal small win (V passage virtually impossible)" (opening pattern 23) has an opening time of 4 seconds, while the "5R time-reduced single small win," "3R time-reduced single small win," and "3R normal small win" (opening pattern 23) have an opening time of 0.01 seconds. The reason the opening time for the small win game differs depending on the type of small win is to change the timing of the opening of the large prize opening 35 relative to the V-opening member 71, which moves in a constant manner from the start of this opening. Here, the V-opening member 71 opens for 0.01 seconds when the small win game starts, and then opens for 3 seconds. In opening pattern 23, the large prize opening 35 opens four seconds after the start of a small prize game, so the V-opening/closing member 71 closes approximately one second before the large prize opening 35 opens. Therefore, in the "3R normal small prize (V passage virtually impossible)," V passage during a small prize game is virtually impossible. On the other hand, in opening pattern 23, the large prize opening 35 and V-opening/closing member 71 open simultaneously 0.01 seconds after the start of a small prize game, both remain open for three seconds, and the large prize opening 35 closes after the V-opening/closing member 71 closes. Therefore, in the "5R time-reduced single small prize," "3R time-reduced single small prize," and "3R normal small prize," V passage during a small prize game is possible.

In the gaming machine 1, the results of the normal symbol lottery (winning lottery) can be either a "win" or a "lose." In the case of a "win," a "winning symbol" is displayed frozen on the normal symbol display 42. In the case of a "lose," a "losing symbol" is displayed frozen on the normal symbol display 42. When a winning symbol is selected, a "win game (normal game)" is executed as a supplementary game in which the electric chute 29 opens in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of normal symbol (winning type) that has been frozen. In this win game (normal game), the electric chute may open multiple times during one round. The win game (normal game) includes one round game (unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the round game begins, and an ending (ED) after the round game ends. There are multiple types of wins. Here, the win types are "long opening 1," "long opening 2," and "short opening." These wins have different variable times, opening times, opening times, and ending times.

5. Description of Game State The game control microcomputer 81 of the gaming machine 1 can execute "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "time reduction state," and the state in which the time reduction control is not performed is simply referred to as the "non-time reduction state." In the time reduction state, the special symbol variation time (the time from the start of the variation display to the derived display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the variation pattern using a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 ( FIG. 12 ), which is determined so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variable time reduction control for the special symbol on the special symbol display 41, a shorter variable time is more likely to be selected as the variable time for the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the variable time reduction control is not being executed. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of consumption of the reserved special symbol increases, making it easier to get a valid win in the starting slot (a win that can be stored as a reserved special symbol). Therefore, you can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the time-shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the time-shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the time-shortening control for the normal symbols when in the time-shortening state, but does not execute it when in the non-time-shortening state.

When a player wins the regular lottery during the time-saving state executed after winning the special lottery 1 during the a time-saving state (time-saving state after a jackpot), or during the b time-saving state (play time) or the c time-saving state (sudden time-saving state), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the winning type as "Long Opening 1" in most cases and "Long Opening 2" in rare cases, as shown in "Special Lottery 1 Time-saving State" in Figure 13 (B). In the case of "Long Opening 1," it makes it easier to win at the first starting hole 30 and more difficult to win at the second starting hole 21. In the case of "Long Opening 2," it makes it more difficult to win at the first starting hole 30 and more difficult to win at the second starting hole 21. During the time reduction (time reduction after a jackpot), when a player wins the regular lottery during the time reduction state that is executed after winning the special lottery 2, the winning type is always determined to be "Long Open 2," making it difficult to win at the first starting hole 30 and easier to win at the second starting hole 21, as shown in "Special lottery 2 time reduction state" in Figure 13 (B).

As described above, gaming machine 1 implements time reduction a (time reduction after jackpot), time reduction b (play time), and time reduction c (sudden time reduction). In time reduction a (time reduction after jackpot), the game state switches to time reduction after a jackpot game. In time reduction b (play time), the game state switches to time-shortened mode when the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number (e.g., 500 times) in normal mode. In time reduction c (sudden time reduction), the game state switches to time-shortened mode when a specific losing symbol is confirmed and stopped in normal mode. Specifically, in time reduction c (sudden time reduction), the game state switches to time-shortened mode after a specific losing symbol is confirmed and stopped in normal mode when a special symbol hit random number value determines a "miss (sudden time reduction)."

In gaming machine 1, the gaming state after a jackpot game is executed by winning an "〇R time-saving 〇 times jackpot" or an "〇R time-saving 〇 times small jackpot" is "time-saving state and high base state." The "time-saving state and high base state" ends when the variable display (variable display) of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. The gaming state after a jackpot game is executed by winning an "〇R normal small jackpot" is "non-time-saving state and low base state." This gaming state is also referred to as the "normal gaming state." Note that when playing gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after powering on is this normal gaming state. Here, "time-saving state and high base state" is also referred to simply as the "time-saving state," and "non-time-saving state and low base state" is also referred to simply as the "non-time-saving state."

In the high base state (time-saving state), it is more advantageous to hit the ball from the right to enter the right play area 3B (Figure 1). This is because the electric chute 29 is more likely to open than in the low base state (non-time-saving state), making it easier to win in the first start hole 30 or the second start hole 21 than in the first start hole 20. For this reason, in the high base state, a right hit is made to have the ball enter the first start hole 30 or the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery. This allows for more start wins (wins in the start holes) than a left hit. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to hit the ball from the left to enter the left play area 3A (Figure 1). This is because the electric chute 29 is less likely to open than in the high base state, making it easier to win in the first start hole 20 than in the first start hole 30 or the second start hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, players hit the ball left to try to get the ball to win in the first start hole 20. This allows for more start wins than hitting the ball right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be explained with reference to Figures 16 to 36. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. As will be explained below, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a win/loss determination means, a pattern control means, a winning game execution means, a game status control means, and a winning type selection means by reading out programs stored in the main ROM 83.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). The initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, and counters. The initial value of a flag is "1" (i.e., "ON") for the ceiling flag, and "0" (i.e., "OFF") for the other flags. The initial value of a status is "1." The initial value of a counter is a predetermined value (e.g., 500) for the ceiling counter, and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial settings are performed only once after the power is turned on and are not performed thereafter.

After the initial settings, the game control microcomputer 81 disables interrupt processing (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (special symbol random number value, special symbol type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, normal symbol random number value, normal symbol type random number value) shown in FIG. 8(A) by incrementing them by 1. When each random number counter value reaches its set upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 4 msec). In other words, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (e.g., every 4 msec). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is disabled, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal and special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. In other words, the update process of the various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning slot in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting slot sensor 20a, the second starting slot sensor 21a, the first large winning slot sensor 30a, the large winning slot sensor 35a, and the regular winning slot sensor 27a (Figure 4).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 sequentially executes the start-hole sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V-opening/closing member control process (step S106), and the V-area sensor detection process (step S107). Details of these processes will be described later. After the V-area sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the reserved ball count process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball count command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The reserved ball count command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball count and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols. After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this processing.

After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S109). In output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above-mentioned processes to the sub-control board 90. After output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S110). In other processing, for example, based on the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 described below, the second special chart reserved indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode that shows that number, and based on the number of reserved balls for special chart 1, the first special chart reserved indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode that shows that number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If a game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "1 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved normal symbols. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "0" (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for normal symbols (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol hit random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-H) and the value of the normal symbol hit type counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-HS), and stores the acquired random number groups in the first memory area of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), processing skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "1 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is the number of reserved second symbol symbols, and more specifically, is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved second symbol symbols. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "1" (step S206: YES), processing skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "0" (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 (step S207), and then a special symbol 2-related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the special symbol hit random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the special symbol hit type random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variable pattern random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b. For the special symbol 2 pre-determination process described below, the game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) separate from the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b. After the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol 2 pre-determination process (step S209). In the special symbol 2 pre-determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the jackpot determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred using the referenced jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value. If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is a "jackpot," the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type. In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as determination values temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes the jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type preliminary determination result) and the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created preliminary determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this process.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 20. This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. If a game ball has entered the first start hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "4 (upper limit)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process ends. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (step S212), and then a special symbol 1-related random number acquisition process is performed (step S213). Here, similar to the special symbol 2-related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above, the values of the special symbol hit random number counter, the special symbol hit type random number counter, the reach random number counter, and the variable pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 among the first to fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a. For the special symbol 1 pre-determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) separate from the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The special chart 1 pre-determination process is the same as the special chart 2 pre-determination process described above.

[Normal operation processing]
19 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the electric chute 29 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 29 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. If the electric chute 29 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a normal symbol is being displayed as a stopped symbol (whether the variable stop time has elapsed) (step S502). If a normal symbol is being displayed as a stopped symbol (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. If a normal symbol is not being displayed as a stopped symbol (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a normal symbol is being displayed as a stopped symbol (step S503). If the normal symbol is changing (step S503: YES), processing proceeds to step S521. If the normal symbol is not changing (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol is "0" (step S504). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S504: YES), processing ends. If the number of reserved balls is not "0" (step S504: NO), the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol is decremented by one (step S505). Therefore, if a game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol being "0," the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol is temporarily set to "1" in step S203 of the start gate sensor detection processing (FIG. 18). Then, the reserved balls are consumed in step S505, and the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol is immediately set to "0." This also applies to the number of reserved balls for the special symbol. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the reserved number of special symbols becomes "1", and then in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) described later, the reserved number becomes "0". Note that the decrement of the reserved number of normal symbols (reservation of normal symbols) is performed together with a clearing process that clears the reserved information (various random number values) stored in the first memory area of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a win has occurred by referring to the normal symbol win determination table T5 (Figure 13 (A)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol win random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserve) of the normal symbol reserve memory area 86 as a determination value. Then, it determines whether or not a win has occurred using the normal symbol win random number value, the game state (whether or not the game is in the time-saving state), and the normal symbol win determination table T5. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol win random number value is between "0" and "2," it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol win random number value is anything other than that, it is determined to be a "lose" (Figure 13 (A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of normal symbol (normal symbol stopping symbol) by referring to the normal symbol winning type determination table T6 (Figure 13 (B)) (step S507). Specifically, if the winning determination in the above (step S506) is a win, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the normal symbol winning type random number value stored in the first memory area of the normal symbol reserve memory area 86. Then, the winning type and the normal symbol (normal symbol stopping symbol) are determined using the normal symbol winning type random number value, the game state (whether the game is in a time-saving state or not, and what triggered the time-saving state), and the normal symbol winning type determination table T6. For example, in the non-time-saving state, regardless of the normal symbol winning type random number value (whether it is 0 to 65535), the winning type is determined to be "short release" and the normal symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 1." During the time-saving state executed after winning the special drawing 1 lottery during the a time-saving state (time-saving after the jackpot), and during the b time-saving state (play time) and the c time-saving state (sudden time-saving state), when a regular drawing lottery is won, as shown in the "Special Drawing 1 Time-saving State" in Figure 13 (B), if the normal pattern winning type random number value is "0 to 65300", the winning type is determined to be "long opening 1" and the normal pattern stopping pattern is determined to be "winning pattern 2". If the normal pattern winning type random number value is "65301 to 65535", the winning type is determined to be "long opening 2" and the normal pattern stopping pattern is determined to be "winning pattern 3". During the time-saving mode (time-saving mode after a jackpot), when a player wins the regular symbol lottery during the time-saving mode executed after winning the special symbol 2 lottery, as shown in "Special Symbol 2 Time-Saving Mode" in Figure 13 (B), regardless of the regular symbol winning type random number value (any value between 0 and 65535), the winning type is determined to be "Long Open 2" and the regular symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "Winning Symbol 3." On the other hand, if the above winning determination results in a "miss," the "missing symbol" is set as the regular symbol.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13(C)) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern using the game state (whether or not the game is in the time-saving mode), the win determination result, the win type, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. For example, if the win type is "short release" in the non-time-saving mode, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "1 second." Also, for example, if the win determination is "miss" in the time-saving mode, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "1 second" (FIG. 13(C)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol variation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start and duration of the normal symbol variation (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information about normal stop symbol data and information about normal symbol variation patterns. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the normal symbol variation display and ends this process (step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S508 (Figure 13 (C)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the normal symbol fluctuation display at the normal symbol (winning normal symbol stop symbol or losing normal symbol stop symbol) identified in step S507 (step S522). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol fluctuation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to notify the sub-control board 90 that the normal symbol fluctuation has stopped (step S523). The game control microcomputer 81 then sets the stop time for the normal symbols and ends this process (step S524). In this case, the stop time for the normal symbols is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol variation stop time has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process. That is, the normal symbol remains stationary. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process if the hit determination in the above step S506 results in a "miss" (step S532: NO). On the other hand, if the hit determination results in a "win" (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol opening command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the opening of the winning game (normal game) (step S533). The game control microcomputer 81 also sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chute 29 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T8 (Figure 14 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 using the type of normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) determined above (step S507) and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T8. Here, for example, when the normal symbol is "winning symbol 1," "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal symbol is "winning symbol 3," "opening pattern 13" is selected (see Figure 14). After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts operating the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S535) and ends this processing.

In the above-mentioned step S501, if the electric chute 29 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chute 29 is met (step S540). The closing condition here is met when either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 29 reaches a specified maximum number of winning balls (e.g., two balls), or the opening time for the electric chute 29 has elapsed and the time for closing the electric chute 29 has arrived. The opening time for the electric chute 29 is the opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the closing condition for the electric chute 29 is not met (step S540: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the electric chute 29 is met (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol ending command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the ending of the winning game (normal game) (step S541). The game control microcomputer 81 also closes (blocks) the electric chute 29 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this process.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the process for the special symbol display 41 and the special prize device (first special prize device 31 and special prize device 36) is divided into five stages, each of which is referred to as a "special operation status" of "1,""2,""3,""4," and "5." When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a special symbol winning determination and special symbol variation pattern selection are performed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol variation process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol variation process, a variation stop command is output after the variation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination processing, an opening command is output, etc., when a big win or small win occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), special electric device processing 1 (big win game) is performed (step S1308). In special electric device processing 1, a big win game (second type special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), special electric device processing 2 (small win game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric device process 2, a small win game (a first type special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of reserved balls in the first starting holes 20 and 30 (special symbol 1 reserved) is "0" (step S1401). If the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, if the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group acquired as a result of winning in the first starting holes 20 and 30, the process proceeds to step S1411. If the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a special symbol winning determination process (step S1402) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the reserved information (various random number values) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a by one position from its current position toward the read side (step S1405). As a result of this step, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the memory area of the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a is shifted toward the reserved consumption image display area, and the oldest reserved image 9A is displayed as the reserved consumption image 9C. This allows the player to recognize that one reserved first special symbol has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game status management process 1 (step S1406). In the game status management process 1, when the time-saving flag is ON, it is determined that the special symbol hit is a "miss (sudden time-saving)" based on the random number value, and when the third time-saving counter becomes 0, the time-saving flag is switched to OFF at the start of the c time-saving symbol fluctuation. Details will be described later. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (step S1407). In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is input to the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84.
The special operation status is set to "2" to start the variable display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2". The variable start command (special symbol 1 variable start command) set in the special symbol 1 variable start process includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (step S1402), information on the variable pattern set in the special symbol variable pattern selection process (step S1403), and information set in the game status management process 1.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 21 (special symbol 2 reserved) is "0" (step S1411). If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1411: YES), that is, if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group obtained as a result of winning in the second starting hole 21, processing proceeds to step S1421. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "1" or greater (step S1411: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a special symbol hit determination process (step S1412) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1413). Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1414). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the reserved information (various random number values) stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b by one position from its current location toward the readout side (step S1415). As a result of this step, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b shifts toward the reserved image display area on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the oldest reserved image 9B is displayed as the reserved image 9C. This allows the player to recognize that one reserved second special symbol has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs game status management process 1 (step S1416). In game status management process 1, when the time-saving flag is ON, a "miss (sudden time-saving)" is determined based on the special symbol winning random number value. When the third time-saving counter reaches 0, the time-saving flag is switched OFF at the start of the c time-saving symbol variation. Details will be described later. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 2 variation start processing (step S1417). In the special symbol 2 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variable display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2" (step S1417). Note that the variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 2 variation start processing includes information related to the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination processing (step S1412), information related to the variation pattern set in the special symbol variation pattern selection processing (step S1413), and information set in the game status management processing 1.

In step S1411, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1411: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1421). A standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may make this determination, for example, by checking the ON/OFF status of a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1421: YES), this processing ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1421: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting standby command to display the standby screen in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1422), and then ends this processing. As described above, according to the special symbol standby processing of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved second special symbol is executed only when the reserved first special symbol is "0." In other words, the consumption of the first reserved special design will be executed before the consumption of the second reserved special design.

[Special symbol winning determination process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol winning determination process (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1412). The special symbol winning determination process (step S1402) and the special symbol winning determination process (step S1412) have similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the special symbol winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a winning determination by referring to the special symbol winning determination table T1 (FIG. 9A) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a special symbol winning random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special symbol winning determination process for special symbol 2, the special symbol winning random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is read out. In the process of determining whether or not a special symbol 1 has been won, the special symbol winning random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first reserved special symbol) of the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a big win and a small win are occurring using the special symbol winning determination table T1 that it refers to and the read special symbol winning random number value. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win/loss determination means."

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is a "jackpot" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1505) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the special symbol hit type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process for special symbol 2, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b is read. In the hit determination process for special symbol 1, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of jackpot based on the read special symbol hit type random number value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (Figures 10 and 11). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win type selection means." After determining the type of jackpot, the special stop symbol data (jackpot symbol) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol win determination is not a "big win" (step S1503: NO) but a "small win" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small win flag (step S1512) and determines the type of small win (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a special symbol win type random number value as a determination value, similar to when determining the type of big win. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of small win based on the read special symbol win type random number value and the special symbol win type determination table T3 (Figures 10 and 11). After determining the type of small win, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special symbol stop pattern data (small win pattern) corresponding to the identified small win type in the win type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and ends this process.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is not a "big hit" or "small hit" but a "miss (sudden time reduction)" (steps S1503, S1510: NO, S1520: YES), special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the c time reduction symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in main RAM 84 (step S1522), and this process ends. If the result of the special symbol hit determination is not a "big hit", "small hit", or "miss (sudden time reduction)" but a "miss" (steps S1503, S1510, S1520: NO), special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the miss symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in main RAM 84 (step S1524), and this process ends.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 are flowcharts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403 and S1409).
The process flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) for the special chart 1 and the special chart 403 is similar, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the game state is in a time-shortened state (step S1600). The determination of whether the game state is in a time-shortened state is made by whether the time-shortened flag is ON or not. If the game state is in a time-shortened state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-shortened state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referencing the table for a non-time-saving jackpot in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (Figure 12) (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a variation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special symbol 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b (corresponding to the first reserved second symbol) is read. In the variation pattern selection process for special symbol 1, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a (corresponding to the first reserved first symbol) is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, the table for non-time-saving state jackpots is referenced (address is set) from the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in Figure 12, and the portion corresponding to non-time-saving state jackpots (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P1" and "P2" for special symbol 1, and the portion with fluctuation pattern "P14" for special symbol 2). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the fluctuation pattern for special symbol 1, and "P14" is selected for special symbol 2 regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1604). If the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for small jackpots in the non-time-saving state in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (Figure 12) (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value, as in step S1603 above. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the portion of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to a small jackpot in the non-time-saving state and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, the part that corresponds to a small win in the non-time-saving state is the part with fluctuation pattern "P3" in special symbol 1, and the part with fluctuation pattern "P15" in special symbol 2, so these are selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number value.

In step S1604, if the small win flag is OFF (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number value is a reach-established random number value (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process for special symbol 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process for special symbol 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a reach has occurred using the reach determination table T2 (Figure 9 (B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number value is a reach-established random number value (step S1606: YES), i.e., if there is a reach and a miss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the table for reach and a miss in the non-time-saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (step S1607). Here, as the table for reach and a miss in the non-time-saving state, the section of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 corresponding to reach and a miss in the non-time-saving state (the section with variation patterns "P4" and "P5" in special symbol 1, and the section with variation pattern "P14" in special symbol 2) is referenced. In special symbol 1, either "P4" or "P5" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value. In special symbol 2, "P14" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random number value.

If the reach random number value is not a reach-established random number value (step S1606: NO), i.e., if the game is a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referencing the table for a miss without a reach in a non-time-saving state in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (step S1608). Here, the table for a miss without a reach in a non-time-saving state is referenced from the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12, which corresponds to a miss without a reach in a non-time-saving state (the portion with variation patterns "P6" and "P7" for special symbol 1, and the portion with variation pattern "P15" for special symbol 2). For special symbol 1, either "P6" or "P7" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of balls reserved for special symbol 1 (1-4). For special symbol 2, "P15" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random number value. In Special Chart 1, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so a shortened variation function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, in Special Chart 1, when the number of reserved balls is between "3" and "4", variation patterns with shorter variation times are selected more frequently than when the number of reserved balls is between "1" and "2". This allows the speed at which reserved special charts are consumed to be increased when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-shortened state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (Figure 24: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 described above, except for the following points, and therefore explanations will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 is that the part of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referenced in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618 is different from that of the already-described steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the table for the non-time-saving state in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is referenced, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, the table for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in step S1615, the portion of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to a small win in the time-saving state (the portion with the fluctuation pattern "P9" in special symbol 1, and the portion with the fluctuation pattern "P17" in special symbol 2) is referenced. Also, for example, in step S1617, the portion of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to a reach-with-miss in the time-saving state (the portion with the fluctuation pattern "P10" in special symbol 1, and the portion with the fluctuation pattern "P18" in special symbol 2) is referenced.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information about the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 17: step S109). This starts the variable display of the special symbol.

[Game Status Management Process 1]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of game status management process 1 (FIG. 21: steps S1406, S1416). Game status management process 1 for special chart 2 (step S1406) and game status management process 1 for special chart 1 (step S1416) have similar processing flows, so they will be described together. Game status management process 1 switches the game status to the normal state when "miss (sudden time reduction)" is selected a specified number of times (e.g., 1) during the time-saving state, and the c time-saving fluctuation begins when the specified number of times begins. As a result, when "miss (sudden time reduction)" is selected a specified number of times during the a time-saving state, the a time-saving state ends when the c time-saving pattern fluctuation begins, and the c time-saving state begins when the c time-saving fluctuation ends. In game status management process 1, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the time-saving flag is ON (step S1905). If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S1905: NO), processing skips to step S1940. On the other hand, if the time-saving flag is ON (step S1905: YES), the third time-saving counter C3 is decremented by 1 (step S1915). The "third time-saving counter C3" counts the number of time-saving symbol variations executed during the time-saving state. The initial value set in the third time-saving counter C3 is determined based on the setting table of FIG. 29. Then, it is determined whether the third time-saving counter C3 has reached 0 (step S1930). If the third time-saving counter C3 has reached 0 (step S1930: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S1935). This switches the game state from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. That is, when the number of time-saving symbol variations executed during the time-saving state reaches the number shown in FIG. 29, the game state is switched to the non-time-saving state. Thereafter, a game state designation command that reflects the above processing is set (step S1940).

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 20: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is determined according to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the variation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the special symbol variation display started in step S1407 or S1417 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) continues. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). The game control microcomputer 81 also performs other processing associated with the stopping of the variation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs processing such as stopping the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (stop display of the special symbol). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "symbol control means." The stop display time of the special symbol can be set arbitrarily depending on the lottery result for special symbol 1 or the lottery result for special symbol 2, etc. The game control microcomputer 81 then terminates this processing.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the stop time for the special symbol has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs game status management process 2 (step S1801). Game status management process 2 is a process for switching the game status between time reduction a, time reduction b, and time reduction c, and its contents will be described later. After game status management process 2, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 8
1 sets the opening pattern of the jackpot opening slot corresponding to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 references the jackpot opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15) to determine the opening pattern of the jackpot opening slot based on the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. Here, "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the jackpot opening slot regardless of the type of jackpot won (whether the special symbol stop pattern data is 11H-13H, 15H, 16H, 21H-23H, or 31H-33H). In addition to setting the opening pattern of the jackpot opening slot, the value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, regardless of the type of jackpot won, the round counter is set to "15" (FIG. 15(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The details of the game state reset process will be described later. Then, to start a type 1 jackpot game, an opening command for type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game begins (step S1807). Then, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1808), and this process ends. By setting the special operation status to "4", the process transitions to special electric device process 1 (jackpot game).

If the big win flag is OFF in step S1802 (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small win flag is ON (step S1810). If the small win flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big win opening according to the type of small win that has been won (step S1811). Specifically, as in step S1803 above, the game control microcomputer 81 references the big win opening pattern determination table T9, determines the opening pattern of the big win opening from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. In addition to setting the opening pattern of the big win opening, the value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of small win that has been won. (Figure 15 (B))

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V-shaped opening/closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V-shaped opening/closing member operation flag indicates the period during which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is to be operated. In the V-shaped opening/closing member control process (Figure 35), when the V-shaped opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is operated according to a predetermined operation pattern. Here, in any small win game, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 operates by closing as an opening for 0.01 seconds after the small win game, then opening for 4 seconds, and then closing again. Note that when the small win flag is ON, unlike when the big win flag is ON, the time-saving flag is not switched OFF even if it is ON. Then, to start the small win game, a small win opening command is set (step S1813), and the opening for the small win game is initiated (step S1814). Then, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and this process ends. When the special operation status is set to "5", processing transitions to special electric device processing 2 (small win game).

If the small win flag is OFF in step S1810 (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1820) and ends this processing. As a result, neither the big win game nor the small win game will start, and the processing returns to the special symbol waiting processing (Figure 20: step S1302), where a special symbol win determination for the next reserved symbol is performed.

[Game Status Management Process 2]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game status management process 2 (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2015. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2010). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2015: NO), i.e., in the non-time-saving state, the process skips to step S2060. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2015: YES), i.e., in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the change is a change of the second special symbol (step S2020). If the change is a change of the second special symbol (step S2020: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2030). The "first time-saving counter C1" counts the number of times the second special symbol has changed during the time-saving state. The "second time-saving counter C2" counts the number of times the special symbol has changed during the time-saving state (the total number of times the first special symbol has changed and the number of times the second special symbol has changed). The initial values set in the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 are determined based on the setting table shown in FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the setting tables for the first time-saving counter C1, the second time-saving counter C2, and the third time-saving counter C3. The setting table is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 when time-saving periods a, b, and c begin. In Figure 29, when the time-saving mode starts, the values set in the time-saving counters C1, C2, and C3 differ depending on the type of jackpot. When the time-saving mode starts, the time-saving counters C1, C2, and C3 are set to "150,""200," and "10." When the time-saving mode starts, the time-saving counters C1, C2, and C3 are set to "999,""999," and "100."

Returning to Figure 28, if the change is a change of the first special pattern (step S2020: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time-saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2025).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether at least one of the values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 has become "0" as a result of step S2025 or step S2030 (step S2035). If neither the first time-saving counter C1 nor the second time-saving counter C2 has become "0" (step S2035: NO), processing skips to step S2045. If at least one of the values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2035: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2040). This switches the game state from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In other words, when the number of times the special symbol has changed in the time-saving state reaches the number shown in FIG. 29, the game state is switched to the non-time-saving state.

In step S2045, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the value of the ceiling counter is "0". If the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2045: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2055). As a result, if the ceiling counter becomes "0" during a fluctuation that begins in the time-saving state, time-saving b will not start.

In step S2050, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the current game state that has just been set (whether the game is in the time-saving state, the respective values of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter, etc.).

In step S2015, if the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2015: NO), a determination is made as to whether the change is a c-time-saving pattern change (step S2060). If it is a c-time-saving pattern change (step S2060: YES), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2065), and the first time-saving counter C1, the second time-saving counter C2, and the third time-saving counter C3 are set to the setting values shown in the setting table in FIG. 29 (step S2070). This sets the c-time saving (sudden time saving). Then, processing proceeds to step S2045. If the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2045: YES), the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2055). As a result, if the ceiling counter becomes "0" when the c-time saving is started, the b-time saving will not start.

In step S2060, if the c time-saving symbol change is not detected (step S2060: NO), a determination is made as to whether the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2075). If the value of the ceiling flag is not "0" (step S2075: NO), processing skips to step S2050. If the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2075: YES), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2080), and the first time-saving counter C1, second time-saving counter C2, and third time-saving counter C3 are set to the setting values shown in the setting table in Figure 29 (step S2085). This sets the b time-saving (Yu-time). The ceiling flag is then switched OFF (step S2055).

[Game status reset process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the time-shortening flag is ON. If the time-shortening flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to step S2105. If the time-shortening flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-shortening flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), the process ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2106). In other words, during the execution of a jackpot game, the ceiling flag is OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-shortening state. In the gaming machine 1, the low base state is always maintained when the time-shortening state is not in effect, and the low base state is maintained during execution of a jackpot game.

[Special Electric Device Processing 1 (Jackpot Game)]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the special electric device process 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the first special prize winning device 31 based on the opening pattern have been completed in the currently running jackpot game. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), processing proceeds to step S2230. If the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first special prize winning port 30 is currently open (step S2202). If it is currently open (step S2202: YES), processing proceeds to step S2210.

If the first major prize opening 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the first major prize opening 30 (step S2203). The time (timing) to open the first major prize opening 30 includes, for example, when the opening time of the big win game has passed and it is time to start opening for the first round of games, or when the interval time (closing time) until the first major prize opening 30, which was temporarily closed after opening, has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time (timing) to open the first major prize opening 30 (step S220
3: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the first large prize opening 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large prize opening process (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first large prize opening 30 according to the opening pattern (Figure 15 (B)) corresponding to the type of win (large prize type or small prize type). When a type 1 jackpot game is being played, the first large prize opening 30 is opened according to opening pattern 21 regardless of the type of jackpot. When a type 2 jackpot game is being played, the first large prize opening 30 is opened according to opening pattern 22 or opening pattern 23 depending on the type of small prize. After the large prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the currently running special game (small win game and big win game), and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. This allows the sub-control board 90 to be notified of the number of rounds of the special game. In this embodiment, the first large prize opening 30 is not opened multiple times during a single round of game. However, in another embodiment, if the first large prize opening 30 is opened multiple times during a single round of game, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the opening of the first large prize opening 30 is the first opening in a single round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

If the first major prize opening 30 is open in step S2202 (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the first major prize opening 30 is met (step S2210). The closing condition here is met when either the number of prizes won by the first major prize opening 30 in that round of play reaches a specified maximum number of prizes (e.g., nine prizes per round), or the time for closing the first major prize opening 30 has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (e.g., 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the first major prize opening 30 was opened). If the closing condition for the first major prize opening 30 is not met (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the first special prize opening 30 is met (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the first special prize opening 30 (step S2211) and then ends this processing.

If it is not the time (timing) to open the first large prize opening 30 in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends a predetermined time (e.g., two seconds) after the first large prize opening 30 closes. As described above, this is because the time (interval time) for the first large prize opening 30 to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended based on whether the predetermined interval time has passed since the first large prize opening 30 was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this processing.

If the round of play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter has reached "0" (step S2226). If the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), i.e., if the required number of rounds has not yet been played, the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process to allow the next round of play to begin. On the other hand, if the round counter is "0" (step S2226: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a jackpot game ending command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2227) and starts the jackpot ending (step S2228). The ending command includes information regarding the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21). After the jackpot ending has started, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, and the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this processing. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the jackpot end flag OFF (step S2231), turns the jackpot flag OFF (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby processing (Figure 20: step S1302) is executed again during the next special operation processing. The game control microcomputer 81 then executes the game status setting process (step S2234) described below and ends this process. The game status setting process (FIG. 32) sets the game status after a jackpot (time-saving mode or non-time-saving mode), and if the time-saving mode is selected, sets the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 to their initial values (number of time-saving modes) depending on the type of win.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game status setting process (FIG. 31: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current jackpot game was triggered by a time-saving win (step S2301). If the time-saving win was not the trigger (step S2301: NO), i.e., if the current jackpot game was triggered by a normal win, the process skips to step S2310. On the other hand, if the current jackpot game was triggered by a time-saving win (step S2301: YES), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the first time-saving counter C1, the second time-saving counter C2, and the third time-saving counter C3 are set to the setting values shown in the setting table of FIG. 29 (step S2303). This sets a time-saving period (post-jackpot time-saving period). In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag and sets the ceiling counter to the specified number of spins (e.g., 500) required to reach time-saving mode b (Yu-time) (step S2311). As a result, after a jackpot game, once the set number of spins (e.g., 500) is reached, time-saving mode b (Yu-time) will begin. In step S2312, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and then ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information regarding the set game state (whether the game is in time-saving mode or not, the values of the time-saving counters C1, C2, and C3, etc.).

[Special Electric Device Processing 2 (Small Win Game)]
33 and 34 are flowcharts of the special electric device processing 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the small win end flag is ON (step S2400). The "small win end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the large prize device 36 based on the opening pattern has ended in the ongoing small win game. If the small win end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), processing proceeds to step S2420. If the small win end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large prize opening 35 is open (step S2402). If it is open (step S2402: YES), processing proceeds to step S2410.

If the large prize opening 35 is not currently open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the large prize opening 35 (step S2404). The time (timing) to open the large prize opening 35 is when the opening time for the small prize has elapsed and it is time to start opening. The opening time for the small prize is 4 seconds for opening pattern 22 and 0.01 seconds for opening pattern 23. If it is not time (timing) to open the large prize opening 35 (step S2404: NO), this process ends. If it is time (timing) to open the large prize opening 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs large prize opening processing (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large prize opening 35 according to the opening pattern (Figure 15 (B)) corresponding to the type of small prize. After the special prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command contains information regarding the number of rounds of the special game currently being played, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. This allows the sub-control board 90 to be notified of the number of rounds of the special game. After the round designation command has been set, this process ends.

If the special prize opening 35 is open in step S2402 (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the special prize opening 35 is met (step S2410). The closing condition here is that either the number of prizes won through the special prize opening 35 has reached a specified maximum number of prizes (e.g., 10), or the time for closing the special prize opening 35 has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the special prize opening 35 was opened). If the closing condition for the special prize opening 35 is not met (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the large prize opening 35 is met (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a large prize opening closing process to close (block) the large prize opening 35 (step S2412). Here, a small prize ending command for the small prize game is also set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as a small prize ending process to end the small prize game. After the large prize opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small prize game corresponds to the first round. The game control microcomputer 81 then sets the small prize ending flag to ON (step S2416) and ends this process.

If the small win end flag is ON in step S2400 (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the interval time (ending time) after closure has elapsed (step S2420). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small win end flag to OFF (step S2422) and switches the small win flag to OFF (step S2424). The game control microcomputer 81 then determines whether the V flag is ON (step S2430). The "V flag" indicates that a game ball has passed through the V area 39 during the execution of a small win game, and is a flag that is turned ON in the V area sensor detection process (Figure 36) described below. If the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 will not execute a type 2 jackpot game, so it sets the round counter to "0" (step S3432), sets the special action status to "1" (step S2434), and ends this process. As a result, the special symbol standby process (Figure 20: step S1302) will be executed again during the next special action process.

If the V flag is ON in step S2430 described above (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag OFF (step S2436), switches the jackpot flag ON to execute a type 2 jackpot game (step S2437), and sets the special operation status to "4" (step S2438). By setting the special operation status to "4," the next special operation process (FIG. 20) transitions to special electric device process 1 (jackpot game). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), switches it OFF (step S2442). This results in a non-time-saving state during execution of a type 2 jackpot game. Thereafter, to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening command for the type 2 jackpot game (step S2444) and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). This transitions from the small jackpot game, in which the large prize opening 35 is opened for a short period of time, to the type 2 jackpot game.

[V opening/closing member control process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the V-opening/closing member control process (FIG. 17: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V-opening/closing member activation flag is ON (step S2500). If the V-opening/closing member activation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this process ends. If the V-opening/closing member activation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), a "V-opening/closing member operation process" is performed to operate the V-opening/closing member 71 in a predetermined activation pattern (step S2502), and a "V valid period setting process" is performed to consider the passage of the game ball through the V during a predetermined period (timing) as valid (step S2504). If the V-opening/closing member activation flag is ON, the opening of the small win game begins (FIG. 27: steps S1812 and S1814), and the V-opening/closing member operation process and the V valid period setting process are performed in accordance with this small win game.

In the V-opening/closing member operation process, a timer is set to measure the operation time of the V-opening/closing member 71. Based on this timer, the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned ON when the V-opening/closing member 71 is due to open, and the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned OFF when the V-opening/closing member 71 is due to close. This causes the V-opening/closing member 71 to operate in a consistent manner from the start of the opening of the small win game. Specifically, the V-opening/closing member 71 is first controlled to a pass-blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small win game, then controlled to a pass-permitting state (open state) for 4 seconds, and then controlled to a pass-blocking state (closed state) for 6 seconds.

The V valid period setting process sets a V valid period for certain operations of the V opening/closing member 71 as described above. The "V valid period" refers to the period during which, when a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a, the detection is considered valid and the V flag is turned ON. The V valid period lasts from the start of the V area 39 opening (the point at which the V opening/closing member 71 begins to be controlled to the pass-permitting state) until a predetermined time has elapsed. The predetermined time is set to a time (here, the V area 39 opening time + 1 second) longer than the V area 39 opening time (the time during which the V opening/closing member 71 is controlled to the pass-permitting state). This is because it takes into account the time lag between a game ball passing through the V opening/closing member 71's position and reaching the V area 39. The V valid period setting process sets a timer to measure the V valid period. Based on the timer, the V valid flag is turned ON when the time to activate the V area 39 is reached, and the V valid flag is turned OFF when the time to disable the V area 39 is reached. In the V-area sensor detection process (Figure 36) described below, whether or not the V valid period is in progress is determined by whether or not this V valid flag is ON.

After the V-opening/closing member operation process and the V-validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the operation of the V-opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506). Specifically, based on the timer set in the V-opening/closing member operation process (step S2502), it determines whether the total operating time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from the start to the end of the V-opening/closing member 71's fixed operation has elapsed. If the operation of the V-opening/closing member 71 has not ended (step S2506: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the operation of the V-opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V-opening/closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508) and ends this process.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the operation pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 during small win games and the opening pattern of the large prize opening 35 (opening/closing member 32). As described above, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small win game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In the "3R normal small win (V passage virtually impossible)" (opening pattern 23), the large prize opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the opening of the small win game, then closed for 29.5 seconds. Therefore, in opening pattern 23, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the large prize opening 35 opens, making it virtually impossible for the game ball to pass through the V during small win games. On the other hand, in the "3R time-reduced single small win" and "3R normal small win" (opening pattern 24), the large prize opening 35 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small win game, then opened for 29.5 seconds. Therefore, in opening pattern 24, the large prize opening 35 and the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 are simultaneously opened 0.01 seconds after the start of the small prize game, and both remain open for approximately four seconds. Therefore, regardless of the timing of the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 35, the game ball can pass through the V-zone 39. Note that here, the large prize opening device 36 and other devices are arranged so that, as long as game balls are continuously shot from the right, the game ball will always enter the large prize opening 35 while it is open. Furthermore, the time required for a game ball that has passed through the large prize opening 35 to reach the position of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is configured to be less than two seconds. For this reason, in the "3R time-reduced single small prize" and "3R normal small prize," as long as game balls are continuously shot from the right during the small prize game, the game ball will always pass through the V-zone.

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If a game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if a game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is the period set by the V-effective period setting process (step S2504) of the V-opening/closing member control process (FIG. 35). The V-effective period is set to a few seconds (ball sweep period) when the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed. Here, the ball sweep period is set to 1 second. If the V-effective period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2604), and ends this process. The "V pass command" is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of V pass.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (Fig. 5) will be explained with reference to Figs. 37 to 40. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94. As will be explained below, the performance control microcomputer 91 functions as a performance execution means by reading out programs stored in the sub-ROM 93.

[Sub-control main processing]
37 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main processing from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" (i.e., "OFF"), the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization processing is executed only once after the power is turned on and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 disables interrupt processing (step S4015) and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the various random number counter values shown in Figure 8 (B) by incrementing them by 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 37: step S4035). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). The received command analysis process (FIG. 39) will be described in detail later. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 during the received command analysis process (FIG. 39) to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100, which has received the various commands, uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects in accordance with the received commands. The audio control board 106, which has received the various commands, executes audio effects by outputting audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107, which has received the various commands, executes lamp effects by controlling the illumination of the panel lamp 5 and frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and terminates this process. The other processes include, for example, random number update processing.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 38: step 4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If a pre-determination command has been received (step S4415: YES), the microcomputer 91 performs a pre-reading performance determination process (step S4420). The pre-reading performance determination process determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance and, if so, the pre-reading performance pattern. The pre-reading performance determination process performs a pre-reading performance execution determination to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance and selects a pre-reading performance pattern. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the pre-reading performance random number counter and, by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-reading performance pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub-ROM 93, determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance and, if so, the pre-reading performance pattern. When it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed, the selected pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, if a pre-determination command has not been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading effect determination process is skipped. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests that the newly stored reserved information in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is likely to contain a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a reserved ball count command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If so (step S4445: YES), it performs reserved ball display processing (step S4450). In the reserved ball display processing, the values of the first special symbol reserved effect counter, second special symbol reserved effect counter, and regular symbol reserved effect counter, which are provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94, are updated based on the information contained in the reserved ball count command regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbol. This allows information on the number of reserved balls to be retained not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special symbol reserved effect counter, second special symbol reserved effect counter, and regular symbol reserved effect counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), the fluctuation effect start process (Figure 40) is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation effect start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. Details of the fluctuation effect start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect start process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a fluctuation stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a fluctuation performance end process is performed (step S4470). The "fluctuation performance end process" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance. On the other hand, if a fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation performance end process is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If so (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed when a special game (a big win game or a small win game) starts. In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information contained in the opening command regarding the special symbol stop pattern data set when a big win or small win is determined in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a preset opening effect pattern corresponding to the type of win indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets an opening effect start command to start the selected opening effect in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in effect command set area 94b is sent to image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 38: step 4315), CPU 102 of image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image from ROM 103 and displays it on display screen 7a of image display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the large prize opening or during the interval between openings during a special game (jackpot game or small prize game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data and the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. The presentation control microcomputer 91 then selects a pre-defined round designation pattern corresponding to the type of win and the number of rounds indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets a round designation start command to start the selected round designation in the designation command setting area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a specified round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command for the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If so (step S4495: YES), an ending presentation pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending presentation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting the ending presentation pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. If the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives an ending command for the small jackpot game from the main control board 80, it performs a process different from the above-mentioned ending presentation pattern determination process. Note that if an ending command for the jackpot game has not been received in step S4495 (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending presentation pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a normal symbol variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If a normal symbol variation start command has been received (step S4505: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs normal symbol variation effect start processing (step S4510). The "normal symbol variation effect start processing" is a process for selecting a normal symbol variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during normal symbol variation. In the normal symbol variation effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first sets information regarding the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol variation start command and information regarding the normal symbol variation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status and symbol information indicating the symbol as the result of the normal symbol hit determination processing. The game status information and symbol information acquired here can be referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate. The performance control microcomputer 91 selects a normal symbol variation performance pattern that is preset in accordance with the normal symbol variation pattern, and sets a normal symbol variation performance start command for starting the selected normal symbol variation performance in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the normal symbol variation performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined normal symbol variation performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if the normal symbol variation start command has not been received in step S4505 (step S4505: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation performance start processing is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If so (step S4515: YES), normal symbol variation effect termination processing is performed (step S4520). The "normal symbol variation effect termination processing" is processing for stopping the normal symbol variation effect. In the normal symbol variation effect termination processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal symbol variation stop command and sets a normal symbol variation effect termination command to terminate the normal symbol variation effect in the effect command set area 94b. Note that if the normal symbol variation stop command has not been received in step S4515 (step S4515: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation effect termination processing is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a normal symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). If so (step S4525: YES), a normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4530). The "normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process" is a process for selecting the normal game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during a winning game (normal game) following a normal symbol win. The normal game effects selected here include opening effects executed during the opening and open game effects executed while the electric chute 29 is open. In the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command and sets information contained in the normal symbol opening command regarding the normal symbol stop symbol data set when a normal symbol win was determined in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a preset opening effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and a normal symbol opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the normal symbol opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 38: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if the normal symbol opening command has not been received in step S4525 (step S4525: NO), the normal symbol opening effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a normal symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). If a normal symbol ending command has been received (step S4535: YES), a normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4540). The "normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a winning game (normal game) resulting from a normal symbol winning. In the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command and sets information regarding the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a preset ending effect pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data, and sets a normal symbol ending effect start command to the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected ending effect. When the normal symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 38: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that in step S4535, if the normal symbol ending command has not been received (step S4535: NO), the normal symbol ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (such as whether the game is in a time-saving state, and the values of the time-saving counters C1, C2, and C3) in the sub-RAM 94. Furthermore, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores information indicating that V has been passed in the RAM 94. Furthermore, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (such as a customer waiting command, a pre-determination command, or a RAM clear notification command), and then ends this processing.

[Variable performance start processing]
40 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 39: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable effect start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information about the special symbol stop symbol data included in the variable effect start command and information about the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status and symbol information indicating the symbol as the result of the hit determination process for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. The game status information and symbol information acquired here can be referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variable effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first obtains a variable effect pattern random number value for determining the effect. Then, it sets a variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable effect indicated by the variable effect start command from the variable effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93. The effect control microcomputer 91 further determines the content of the preview effect, such as a so-called step-up preview effect or a chance-up preview effect, based on the variable effect pattern random number value. It also references the stop pattern pattern determination table T52 to determine the combination of the 8L, 8C, and 8R effect symbols to be displayed as stopped symbols. Based on these, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the type of variable effect to be performed. Furthermore, when executing a c-time-saving symbol change based on information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data included in the change start command, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a stop symbol corresponding to the c-time-saving symbol change. Here, it is assumed that when c-time-saving is selected, the decorative symbol may stop and be displayed as "595."

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in step S5015 above is realized (step S5020), and then ends this processing. When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (Figure 38: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a specified variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

8. Operation of the Movable Board Body The operation of the movable board body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15, etc.) will be described using Figures 41 to 49. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate movable roles such as the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 during game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs display/light emission control to display a specific image on the image display device 7 and to cause the first movable role 14, second movable role 15, etc. to emit light in a specific manner during game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

The operation of the first movable part 14 will be explained using Figures 41 and 42. Figure 41 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable part 14 in the forward direction (advance direction movement). Figure 42 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14.

As shown in Figure 41, the first movable part 14 includes a left-side movable part 14L and a right-side movable part 14R. The left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are each configured to be movable left and right, and half of a ring-shaped decorative part (the left decorative part and the right decorative part) is attached to the tip. In other words, the left decorative part and the right decorative part each have an arc-shaped half of a ring. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable part 14 can be stationary in a retracted position (home position) where the left-side movable part 14L is stored to the left of the display screen 7a and the right-side movable part 14R is stored to the right of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a portion of each of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R is visible. The first movable part 14 advances from the state shown in FIG. 1 to the retracted position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 42, where the left and right decorative parts 14L and 14R each advance toward the center of the display screen 7a (approaching each other) as shown in FIG. 41. The left and right decorative parts combine to form a single decorative element (combined part) (second mode). Here, the combined part forms the outline of a face. In this second mode, the combined part, formed by combining the left and right decorative parts, rests on the front of the image display device 7, covering a portion of the display screen 7a near the center and allowing the display screen 7a to be viewed through the opening in the center. In other words, the combined part forms only the outline of a face, with no central portion of the face, allowing the display screen 7a to be viewed instead. The first movable part 14 can move (retract) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 42 through the state shown in FIG. 41 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can remain stationary.

The operation of the second movable part 15 will be explained using Figure 43. Figure 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the second movable part 15. The second movable part 15 has a rectangular decorative part marked "OARO" and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable part 15 can be stopped in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a portion of the second movable part 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable part 15 can move downward from the state shown in Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stopped in the extended position (deployed position) shown in Figure 43 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops on the front of the image display device 7, covering a portion slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. By moving upward (retracting) from the extended position shown in Figure 43, the second movable part 15 can move to the retracted position shown in Figure 1 and stop there.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the play area 3 of the game board 2 is visible through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is disposed in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating LED light from its end face. Here, an image of a smiling face is displayed as an example. The illumination panel 18 is configured to display several types of images in multiple colors by varying the direction and color of the LED light irradiation. Note that the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 may be positioned on the front side of the image display device 7, and does not necessarily have to be positioned on the front side of the first movable role element 14 or the second movable role element 15. In other words, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 may be arranged behind (on the back side of) the decorative member 10 and the third movable element 17, as well as the first movable element 14 and the second movable element 15, which will be described later.

Figure 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the light-emitting effects of the frame lamp 66. Multiple LERs are arranged in a row on the surface of the frame lamp 66, and each is configured to be able to be switched on and off. This allows the frame lamp 66 to emit light in any color at any position. The frame lamp 66 may also be configured as a liquid crystal panel.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative member 10. The gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than that described above. For example, the gaming machine may have a decorative member 10. Here, the decorative member 10 is fixed to the lower right of the display screen 7a, and has a sub-liquid crystal device 13 in the center. The decorative member 10 has a circular shape, and the sub-liquid crystal device 13 also has a circular shape. Any image can be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal device 13.

The operation of the third movable gadget 17 will be explained using Figures 47 and 48. Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the third movable gadget 17. Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode and display mode of the third movable gadget 17. The gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than that described above. For example, the gaming machine may be equipped with a third movable gadget 17. The third movable gadget 17 is configured to be movable left and right in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to move (advance) from a retracted position toward the right edge of the display screen 7a and move left and right in front of the display screen 7a. It can also stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the third movable gadget 17 can be set as desired. As shown in Figure 48, the third movable gadget 17 has a liquid crystal panel on its surface, allowing any image to be displayed. The third movable gadget 17 may have a decorative portion formed on at least a portion thereof, or may be transparent.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, the third movable part 17, and the decorative member 10. As shown in Figure 49, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, the third movable part 17, and the decorative member 10 can be in a state where they partially overlap each other. In addition, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and the third movable part 17 may be made of a liquid crystal panel and configured to be able to display any image, or at least a portion of them may be transparent so that the image displayed on the display screen 7a can be seen through the movable parts 14, 15, and 17.

9. Other Presentation Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Below, each presentation example (display presentation example, role-moving presentation example) of the present embodiment will be described. Also, effect examples, modifications, and mode examples for the presentation examples will be described. As described above, the presentations described below are presentations realized by the presentation control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (win determination information, win type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. The following display presentation examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display presentation examples, it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

Below, we will explain the display content change effects A to C when a condition is met using Figures 50 to 52. This display content change effect when a condition is met can be executed during the decorative pattern change effect, for example. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command contains an instruction to execute the display content change effect when a condition is met, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command contains an instruction to execute the display content change effect when a condition is met, it drives movable parts such as the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15.

[Display Content Change Presentation A when Condition is Established]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the display content change effect A when a condition is met. The display content change effect when a condition is met is an effect in which the effect content changes when a certain special pattern changes during a specific period depending on whether or not a preset condition is met during the specific period in which the special pattern change is executed. Here, the "period during the time-saving state" is set as the "fixed period." Also, "execution of special pattern 2 change" is set as the "preset condition.""When a certain special pattern changes during a specific period" is set as "when the special pattern changes when the remaining number of time-saving times is 10" and "when the last special pattern changes during the time-saving state."

In the display content change effect A when a condition is met, we will assume that a special chart change (special chart 1 change or special chart 2 change) is being executed in the time-saving state after a jackpot game of the special chart 1 jackpot type "5R 100-time time-saving jackpot" (Figure 10). The player hits the right side, and by passing through gate 28, electric chute 29 opens, and the game ball that entered electric chute winning slot 34 enters either first winning slot 75 or second winning slot 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special Chart 1 Time-Saving State"). The game ball entering first winning slot 75 or second winning slot 76 opens either first starting slot 30 or second starting slot 21, and the game ball entering the opened starting slot 30 or 21 results in a first special chart hold (special chart 1 hold) or second special chart hold (special chart 2 hold). Depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through the gate 28, the probability of the first start gate 30 opening is approximately 277/278, and the probability of the second start gate 21 opening is approximately 1/279 (Figures 13(B) and 14). In the gaming machine 1, the consumption of the reserved first special symbol takes priority over the consumption of the reserved second special symbol (Figure 21).

As shown in Figure 50 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner on the display screen 7a while special symbol 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also those that are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The changing display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (here, special symbol 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol drawing (here, special symbol 1 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays a hold icon 9A representing a special chart 1 hold, a hold icon 9B representing a special chart 2 hold, and a variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a remaining time reduction display, which shows the remaining number of time reductions, displayed as "21 time reductions remaining," and a variable special chart display, which shows the type of special chart currently being changed, displayed as "Special chart 1 change."

Figure 50 (B) shows the state when the next Special Chart 1 variation after the Special Chart 1 variation shown in Figure 50 (A) has ended. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed frozen. Since no Special Chart 1 reserve was acquired during the period shown in Figures 50 (A) and (B), and Special Chart 1 reserve has reached 0, Special Chart 2 reserve is consumed. On display screen 7a, reserve icon 9A disappears, and reserve icon 9B shifts and becomes the variation icon (relevant reserve icon) 9C. After that, Special Chart 2 variation is executed.

When the special symbol 2 change is executed, as shown in Figure 50 (C), the display screen 7a displays the changing display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 change). The display screen 7a also displays "19 time reductions remaining" as the remaining number of time reductions, and "Special symbol 2 change" as the special symbol display during the change. In other words, the special symbol 1 reserve, which is consumed preferentially, has reached 0, and the existence of the special symbol 2 reserve means that the condition for the special symbol 2 reserve to be consumed during the time reduction state is met.

In this state, the first starting hole 30 is opened by the ball entering the first winning hole 75, and the ball entering the first starting hole 30 causes a new hold icon 9A to be displayed, as shown in Figure 50 (D). Then, in Figure 50 (E), the special chart 2 change ends and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed frozen. Since there is one special chart 1 hold, the special chart 1 hold is consumed. On the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A shifts and becomes the change icon (the hold icon in question) 9C. Then, the special chart 1 change is executed.

When the special symbol 1 variation is executed, as shown in Figure 50 (F), the display screen 7a displays the varying decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 variation). The display screen 7a also displays "18 time reductions remaining" as the remaining number of time reductions, and "Special symbol 1 variation" as the special symbol display during the variation.

After that, when the special chart variation (special chart 1 variation or special chart 2 variation) is repeated, "10 time reductions remaining" is displayed as the remaining number of time reductions, as shown in Figure 50 (G). In other words, the number of time reductions remaining becomes "10." At this time, a character image CG appears, as shown in Figure 50 (H). This character image CG is displayed "at the time of the special chart variation when the number of time reductions remaining is 10" when the condition "special chart 2 variation is executed during time reduction" is met. In this case, the condition is met because the special chart 2 variation is executed when 20 time reductions remain, as shown in Figure 50 (B). If the condition is not met when the 10th time reduction remains, the character image CG will not be displayed "at the time of the 10th time reduction variation remaining." In other words, depending on whether or not the special chart 2 variation is executed during the time reduction period, the character image CG may or may not appear, and the presentation content will change. Here, the character image CG is a smiling face image, and is displayed superimposed on the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 variable). Then, as shown in Figure 50(I), the character image CG disappears and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed statically.

If the special chart variation (special chart 1 variation or special chart 2 variation) is then repeated, the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is activated will display "0 times remaining," as shown in Figure 50 (J). In other words, this is the "last special chart variation during the time-saving feature." At this time, as shown in Figure 50 (K), a result image appears, indicating the number of special chart 2 variations performed during the time-saving feature, indicated as "1 special chart 2 variation." This result image is displayed "at the last special chart variation during the time-saving feature" when the condition "special chart 2 variation is performed during the time-saving feature" is met. In this case, as shown in Figure 50 (B), the condition is met because one special chart 2 variation has been performed when 20 times the time-saving feature is remaining. If the condition is not met when 0 times the time-saving feature is remaining, the result image will not be displayed "at the last special chart variation during the time-saving feature." In other words, depending on whether or not a special chart 2 variation was performed during the time-saving feature, the result image may or may not appear, resulting in different effects. Here, the result image consists of a rectangular frame image and a text image drawn inside the frame image, and is displayed superimposed on the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 variation). After that, as shown in Figure 50 (L), the display of the result image remains even after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a static state.

[Display Content Change Presentation B when Condition is Established]
FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating the display content change effect B when a condition is met. The display content change effect when a condition is met is an effect in which the effect content changes when a certain special symbol changes during a specific period depending on whether or not a preset condition is met during the specific period in which the special symbol changes. Here, the "period during the time-saving state" is set as the "fixed period." Also, "occurrence of special symbol 2 on hold" is set as the "preset condition." The "time of a certain special symbol change during a specific period" is set as "when the special symbol changes when the remaining number of time-saving times is 10" and "when the last special symbol changes during the time-saving state." FIGS. 51(A) to 51(F) show the flow of the effect when the condition is met, and FIGS. 51(G) to 51(L) show the flow of the effect when the condition is not met.

In the display content change effect B when a condition is met, we will assume that a special chart change (special chart 1 change or special chart 2 change) is being executed in the time-saving state after a jackpot game of the special chart 1 jackpot type "5R 100-time time-saving jackpot" (Figure 10). The player hits the right side, and by passing through gate 28, electric chute 29 opens, and the game ball that entered electric chute winning slot 34 enters either first winning slot 75 or second winning slot 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special chart 1 time-saving state"). The game ball entering first winning slot 75 or second winning slot 76 opens either first starting slot 30 or second starting slot 21, and the game ball entering the opened starting slot 30 or 21 results in a first special chart hold (special chart 1 hold) or second special chart hold (special chart 2 hold). Depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through the gate 28, the probability of the first start gate 30 opening is approximately 277/278, and the probability of the second start gate 21 opening is approximately 1/279 (Figures 13(B) and 14). In the gaming machine 1, the consumption of the reserved first special symbol takes priority over the consumption of the reserved second special symbol (Figure 21).

Figures 51 (A) to (F) show the flow of effects when the conditions are met. As shown in Figure 51 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner on the display screen 7a while special symbol 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only displays in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be seen moving at high speed, but also displays in which they are not visible due to their high speed movement. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The changing display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (here, special symbol 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol drawing (here, special symbol 1 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays a hold icon 9A representing the hold on special chart 1, and a variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C. The hold icon 9B representing the hold on special chart 2 is not displayed. Here, the variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a remaining time reduction display, which shows the remaining number of time reductions, displayed as "21 time reductions remaining," and a variable special chart display, which shows the type of special chart currently being varied, displayed as "Special chart 1 variation."

Figure 51 (B) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display reads "18 time-saving counts remaining." The display shows the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 variable). At this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the ball enters second winning hole 76, opening second starting hole 21. Entry of the ball into second starting hole 21 causes a new hold icon 9B to be displayed.

Then, the special symbol changes (special symbol 1 change or special symbol 2 change) repeatedly, and Figure 51 (C) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "15 time-saving counts remaining." The display shows the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 change). At this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the ball enters second winning hole 76, opening second starting hole 21. The ball entering second starting hole 21 causes the second hold icon 9B to be displayed.

Then, the special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation or special symbol 2 variation) is repeated, and Figure 51 (D) shows the state when the remaining time-saving cycle count display shows "10 cycles remaining." In other words, the state is "when the special symbol variation occurs when there are 10 remaining cycles." The variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, representing the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 variation), is displayed. At this time, a character image CG appears. This character image CG is displayed "when the special symbol variation occurs when there are 10 remaining cycles of time-saving cycle" when the condition "special symbol 2 reservation occurs during time-saving cycle" is met. Here, as shown in Figures 51 (B) and (C), the condition is met because the special symbol 2 reservation occurs at 18 and 15 cycles remaining. In gaming machine 1, the probability of the second start gate 21 opening is approximately 1/279 depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through gate 28, making it difficult for the special symbol 2 reservation to occur. Therefore, the appearance of this character image CG can give the player a sense of accomplishment. If the conditions are not met when there are 10 times left in the time-saving mode, the character image CG will not be displayed when the "10th time-saving mode change occurs." In other words, depending on whether or not a special symbol 2 is reserved during the time-saving mode, the character image CG may or may not appear, and the presentation will change. In this case, the character image CG is a smiling face image, and the same number of character images CG as the number of special symbol 2 reservations that have occurred will appear. After that, the character image CG disappears, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a static state.

If the special pattern variation (special pattern 1 variation or special pattern 2 variation) is then repeated, the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is enabled will display "0 times remaining," as shown in Figure 51(E). In other words, this is the "last special pattern variation during the time-saving feature." At this time, as shown in Figure 51(F), a result image appears, indicating the number of special pattern 2 reservations that occurred during the time-saving feature, labeled "Number of special pattern 2 reservations acquired: 2." This result image is displayed at the "last special pattern variation during the time-saving feature" when the condition "special pattern 2 reservations occur during the time-saving feature" is met. In this case, as shown in Figures 51(B) and (C), the condition is met because special pattern 2 reservations occur at 18 and 15 times remaining in the time-saving feature. If the condition is not met when there are 0 times remaining in the time-saving feature, the result image will not be displayed at the "last special pattern variation during the time-saving feature." In other words, depending on whether or not a special pattern 2 reservation occurred during the time-saving feature, the result image may or may not appear, resulting in different effects. Here, the result image consists of a rectangular frame image and a text image drawn inside the frame image, and is displayed superimposed on the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 variation). After that, the display of the result image remains even after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed.

Figures 51 (G) to (L) show the flow of effects when the conditions are not met. Figure 51 (G) is the same as Figure 51 (A). Figure 51 (H) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "18 times remaining." The variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 variable), is displayed. Unlike Figure 51 (B), no ball enters the second starting hole 21, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed.

Then, the special pattern changes (special pattern 1 change or special pattern 2 change) repeatedly, and Figure 51 (I) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "15 time-saving counts remaining." The display shows the changing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 change). Unlike Figure 51 (C), no balls enter the second starting hole 21, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed.

After that, the special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation or special symbol 2 variation) is repeated. Figure 51(J) shows the state when the remaining number of time-saving cycles is displayed as "10 remaining time-saving cycles." That is, the state is "when the special symbol variation occurs when there are 10 remaining time-saving cycles." The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, representing the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 variation), are displayed. Unlike Figure 51(D), the character image CG does not appear. The character image CG is displayed when the condition "special symbol 2 reservation occurs during time-saving mode" is met, "when the special symbol variation occurs when there are 10 remaining time-saving cycles." Figures 51(G)-(L) show that the special symbol 2 reservation never occurs after the time-saving mode is activated. In gaming machine 1, the probability of the second start gate 21 opening is approximately 1/279 depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through gate 28, making it difficult for the special symbol 2 reservation to occur. Therefore, there are cases where the character image CG does not appear. In this way, depending on whether or not a special image 2 reservation occurs during the short time period, the character image CG may or may not appear, and the content of the presentation will change.

If the special chart variation (special chart 1 variation or special chart 2 variation) is then repeated, as shown in Figure 51 (K), the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is activated will display "0 times remaining." In other words, this is the "last special chart variation during the time-saving feature." Unlike Figure 51 (F), the result image indicating the number of special chart 2 reserves that occurred during the time-saving feature, represented as "Number of special chart 2 reserves obtained: XX," does not appear. This result image is displayed at the "last special chart variation during the time-saving feature" when the condition "special chart 2 reserve occurs during the time-saving feature" is met. In Figures 51 (G) to (L), no special chart 2 reserve has occurred since the time-saving feature was activated, and the conditions for displaying the result image are not met. In this way, the result image may or may not appear depending on whether or not a special chart 2 reserve occurred during the time-saving feature, and the presentation content changes.

[Display Content Change Presentation C when Condition is Established]
FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating a display content change effect C when a condition is met. The display content change effect C when a condition is met is an effect in which the effect content changes when a certain special symbol changes during a specific period depending on whether or not a preset condition is met during the specific period in which the special symbol changes. Here, the "period during the time-saving state" is set as the "fixed period." Furthermore, "occurrence of special symbol 2 on hold" is set as the "preset condition." The "time of a certain special symbol change during a specific period" is set as "when the special symbol changes when the remaining number of time-saving attempts is 10" and "when the last special symbol changes during the time-saving state." FIGS. 52(A) to (F) show the flow of the effect when the condition is met, and FIGS. 52(G) to (L) show the flow of the effect when the condition is not met.

In the display content change effect C when a condition is met, we will assume that a special chart change (special chart 1 change or special chart 2 change) is being executed in the time-saving state after a jackpot game of the special chart 1 jackpot type "5R time-saving 100-time jackpot" (Figure 10). The player hits the right side, and by passing through gate 28, electric chute 29 opens, and the game ball that entered electric chute winning slot 34 enters either first winning slot 75 or second winning slot 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special chart 1 time-saving state"). The game ball entering first winning slot 75 or second winning slot 76 opens either first starting slot 30 or second starting slot 21, and the game ball entering the opened starting slot 30 or 21 results in a first special chart hold (special chart 1 hold) or second special chart hold (special chart 2 hold). Depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through the gate 28, the probability of the first start gate 30 opening is approximately 277/278, and the probability of the second start gate 21 opening is approximately 1/279 (Figures 13(B) and 14). In the gaming machine 1, the consumption of the reserved first special symbol takes priority over the consumption of the reserved second special symbol (Figure 21).

Figures 52(A) to 52(F) show the flow of the presentation when the conditions are met. As shown in Figure 52(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a while the special symbol 1 is changing. The "changing display" here refers to a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, as well as those that are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (here, the special symbol 1 change), and the static display of the set of symbols indicates the result of the special symbol lottery (here, the special symbol 1 lottery result).

Display screen 7a displays a hold icon 9A representing a special chart 1 hold, a hold icon 9B representing a special chart 2 hold, and a variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a remaining time reduction display, which shows the remaining number of time reductions, displayed as "21 time reductions remaining," and a variable special chart display, which shows the type of special chart currently being changed, displayed as "Special chart 1 change."

The special symbol variation (special symbol 1 variation or special symbol 2 variation) is repeated, and Figure 52 (B) shows the state when the remaining time-saving cycle count display shows "10 remaining time-saving cycles." In other words, it is "when the special symbol variation occurs when there are 10 remaining time-saving cycles." The variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 variation), is displayed. At this time, a result image appears, displaying the number of special symbol 2 reserves that occurred during the time-saving cycle, displayed as "Number of special symbol 2 reserves acquired: 1." Specifically, a result image appears, displaying the number of special symbol 2 reserves that occurred from the start of the time-saving cycle to the current time during the time-saving cycle. This result image is always displayed when the special symbol variation occurs when there are 10 remaining time-saving cycles. When the condition "Special symbol 2 reserve occurs during the time-saving cycle" is met, the "〇" portion of "Number of special symbol 2 reserves acquired: 〇" changes. In this case, since one special symbol 2 reserve has occurred, the "〇" portion is displayed as "1." Here, even if the Special 2 Reserve is generated and consumed, and the Special 2 Reserve is 0 when the "Special 2 Reserve Changes When the Time-Reduction Remaining Cycle is 10," the "Number of Special 2 Reserves Acquired" will be "1." On the other hand, if the Special 2 Reserve is generated and consumed, and the Special 2 Reserve is 0 when the "Special 2 Reserve Changes When the Time-Reduction Remaining Cycle is 10," the "Number of Special 2 Reserves Acquired" may be displayed as "0." In gaming machine 1, the probability of the second start opening 21 opening is approximately 1/279 depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through gate 28, making the Special 2 Reserve unlikely to occur. Therefore, displaying the number of Special 2 Reserves acquired in this result image can give the player a sense of accomplishment. If the conditions are not met with 10 remaining time-reduction cycles, a different result image is displayed, as shown in Figure 52 (H). In other words, the content of the result image changes depending on whether the Special 2 Reserve occurred during the time-reduction cycle. Here, the result image consists of a rectangular frame image and a text image drawn inside the frame image, and is displayed superimposed on the variable display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 variation). After the result image is displayed, it disappears after a predetermined time has passed, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary.

Then, the special symbol changes (special symbol 1 change or special symbol 2 change) repeatedly, and Figure 52 (C) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "5 times remaining." The display shows the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 change). At this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the ball enters second winning hole 76, opening second starting hole 21, and the ball entering second starting hole 21 causes the second hold icon 9B to be displayed.

If the special pattern variation (special pattern 1 variation or special pattern 2 variation) is repeated, the remaining number of time-saving cycles will display "0 remaining time-saving cycles," as shown in Figure 52 (D). This means that the "last special pattern variation during the time-saving state" has occurred. At this time, the second result image during the time-saving state appears, displaying "Number of special pattern 2 reserved: 2." Specifically, a second result image appears, indicating the number of special pattern 2 reserved cycles that have occurred since the start of the time-saving state to the current time during the time-saving state. This second result image is always displayed during the "last special pattern variation during the time-saving state." When the condition "special pattern 2 reserved cycles during the time-saving state" is met, the "0" portion of "Number of special pattern 2 reserved cycles obtained: 0" changes. In this case, since two special pattern 2 reserved cycles have occurred, the "0" portion is displayed as "2." In this case, even if the special pattern 2 reserved cycles are consumed after generation and there are no special pattern 2 reserved cycles at the "last special pattern variation during the time-saving state," the "Number of special pattern 2 reserved cycles obtained" will be "2." On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed after it occurs and the special symbol 2 reservation is 0 at the "last special symbol change during the time-saving state," the "number of special symbol 2 reservations acquired" may be displayed as "0." If the conditions are not met at the last special symbol change during the time-saving state, a result image with different content will be displayed, as shown in Figure 52 (J). In other words, the display content of the result image changes depending on whether or not the special symbol 2 reservation occurred during the time-saving state. When the special symbol 1 change in Figure 52 (D) stops, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state.

After that, as shown in Figure 52 (E), the display of the result image remains the same, and Special Chart 1 variation is repeatedly executed until there are no more Special Chart 1 reserved. In this case, there are three Special Chart 1 reserved as of Figure 52 (D), so the Special Chart 1 lottery is executed three times. At this time, the remaining number of time-saving cycles display remains as "0 time-saving cycles remaining," and the special chart display during variation is displayed as "Special Chart 1 variation."

When all Special Chart 1 reserves are used up, the Special Chart 2 reserves will be consumed and the Special Chart 2 change will be executed, as shown in Figure 52 (F). At this time, a text image of "Special Chart 2 Change Starts!!" will be displayed. During the change, the Special Chart display will read "Special Chart 2 Change."

Figures 52 (G) to (L) show the flow of presentation when the conditions are not met. In Figure 52 (G), similar to Figure 52 (A), a count display showing "21 times remaining in time-saving mode" is displayed, a special pattern display showing "Special pattern 1 change" during change is displayed, and a change display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special pattern 1 change is displayed. However, unlike Figure 52 (A), the hold icon 9B indicating the special pattern 2 hold is not displayed. In other words, the special pattern 2 hold has not yet been acquired in the time-saving mode.

Figure 52 (H) shows the state when the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is displayed as "10 times remaining." The display shows the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 variation). Unlike Figure 51 (B), no ball has entered the second starting hole 21, and the reserve icon 9B is not displayed. At this time, a result image appears, indicating that no special symbol 2 reserve has occurred during the time-saving feature, displayed as "special symbol 2 reserve not yet obtained." Specifically, a result image appears, indicating the number of special symbol 2 reserves that have occurred since the start of the time-saving feature up to the current time during the time-saving feature. This image shows that the number of special symbol 2 reserves that have occurred up to the current time during the time-saving feature is 0. This result image is always displayed "when the special symbol changes when the number of times remaining in the time-saving feature is 10," and when the condition "special symbol 2 reserve occurs during the time-saving feature" is not met, the result image displays "special symbol 2 reserve not yet obtained," which is different from the content displayed when the condition is met.

Then, the special pattern changes (special pattern 1 change or special pattern 2 change) repeatedly, and Figure 52 (I) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "5 times remaining in time-saving." The display shows the changing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which represent the variable display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 change). Unlike Figure 52 (C), no ball enters the second starting hole 21, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed.

After that, the special pattern variation (either special pattern 1 variation or special pattern 2 variation) is repeated, and Figure 52 (J) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display indicates "0 time-saving cycles remaining." In other words, this is the "last special pattern variation during the time-saving state." At this time, a result image appears, indicating that no special pattern 2 reservation occurred during the time-saving state, labeled "Special pattern 2 reservation not obtained." Specifically, a second result image appears, indicating the number of special pattern 2 reservations that occurred between the start of the time-saving state and the current time during the time-saving state. This indicates that the number of special pattern 2 reservations that occurred during the time-saving state up to the current time was zero. This second result image is always displayed at the "last special pattern variation during the time-saving state." If the condition "a special pattern 2 reservation occurs during the time-saving state" is not met, the message "Special pattern 2 reservation not obtained" is displayed, which is different from the content displayed when the condition is met. Here, the special chart 2 reserve is consumed after it occurs, and if the special chart 2 reserve is 0 at the "last special chart change during the time-saving state," the "number of special chart 2 reserves acquired is 0." When the special chart 1 change in Figure 52 (J) stops, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state.

After that, as shown in Figure 52 (K), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols, and when the variable icon (the relevant reserved icon) 9C is consumed, the reserved icon 9A shifts to start the next special symbol 1 variable. At this time, as shown in Figure 52 (L), a text image of "Normal state starts!!" is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the display content changing when the conditions are met.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 50, during the time-saving mode in which the special symbol change is executed, the content of the effects displayed on the display screen 7a changes "when the special symbol change occurs when the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode is 10" and "when the last special symbol change occurs during the time-saving mode" depending on whether or not the condition "special symbol 2 change is executed" is met. Also, as shown in Figures 51 and 52, during the time-saving mode in which the special symbol change is executed, the content of the effects displayed on the display screen 7a changes "when the special symbol change occurs when the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode is 10" and "when the last special symbol change occurs during the time-saving mode" depending on whether or not the condition "special symbol 2 reservation occurs" is met. With this configuration, unprecedented and innovative effects can visually entertain players and increase their interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, special symbol changes are executed multiple times during a specific period (a short time period), and a certain special symbol change is the last special symbol change during the specific period (a short time period). This configuration allows players to be visually entertained by unprecedented and innovative presentations, thereby increasing their interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific period is the period during the time-saving state. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the preset condition is the occurrence of a special symbol 2 reservation due to a winning combination. This configuration allows players to be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has not been seen before, thereby increasing their interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special symbol 2 reserve is the special symbol reserve that is not consumed preferentially between the special symbol 1 reserve and the special symbol 2 reserve. According to this configuration, a novel and unprecedented presentation can be provided to the player visually, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if a preset condition is met, a first effect is executed in which, for example, a character image CG or a result image is displayed, and if the preset condition is not met, a second effect is executed in which neither a character image CG nor a result image is displayed. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the display content change effect when a condition is met is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the display content change effects A to C when the conditions are met, the effect content is changed twice when the conditions are met: "when the special chart changes when the number of times the time-saving feature is 10" and "when the last special chart changes during the time-saving feature." However, the effect content may change only when either "when the special chart changes when the number of times the time-saving feature is 10" or "when the last special chart changes during the time-saving feature."

[Modification 2]
In the display content change effects A to C when a condition is met, a character image CG is displayed "when the special chart changes when the remaining number of times for time-saving is 10" when the condition is met, and no character image CG is displayed when the condition is not met. However, the manner in which the effect content changes depending on whether or not the condition is met is not limited to this. For example, depending on whether or not the condition is met, a different character image, a different background image, a different story image, etc. may be displayed, different music may be played, or a different role action may be executed. Furthermore, the above effect may be executed "when the last special chart changes during the time-saving state" when the condition is met.

[Modification 3]
In the display content change effects A to C when a condition is met, a character image CG is displayed when the "special pattern changes when the remaining number of times for time reduction is 10" when the condition is met. However, when the condition is met, a character image CG may be displayed when the "final special pattern changes during the time reduction state." Also, the character image CG and the result image may be displayed together.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A performance display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of performances;
A gaming machine equipped with a special chart display means capable of displaying special chart variations,
Depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is met during a specific period in which the special chart change is executed, the content of the effect displayed on the effect display means when a certain special chart change occurs during the specific period changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
During the specific period, the special chart change is executed multiple times,
The certain special chart change time is the last special chart change time during the specific period,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1 or A1-2,
The specific period is a period during a time-saving state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
The preset condition is the occurrence of a special drawing reservation due to winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-4,
The special drawing reservation is the special drawing reservation that is not given priority among the special drawing 1 reservation and the special drawing 2 reservation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
When the preset condition is satisfied, a first effect is executed,
If the preset condition is not satisfied, a second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Icon display effects A to C will be explained below using Figures 53 to 55. These icon display effects can be executed during the decorative symbol variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the reserved ball count command, game state designation command, variation effect start command, etc. received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute an icon display effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Icon display effect A]
53 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect A. The icon display effect is an effect in which an icon is displayed when the ball enters the starting hole during a first period, and an icon is not displayed during a subsequent second period even if the ball enters the starting hole. Here, the "icon" is set as "reserved icon 9B," the "first period" is set as "the period from the start of the time-saving function until the reserved special chart 1 is consumed and disappears" shown in FIGS. 53(A) to (G), and the "second period" is set as "the period from the start of the reserved special chart 2 consumption until the reserved special chart 2 is consumed and disappears" shown in FIGS. 53(H) to (L).

In icon display performance A, we will explain that a special chart change (special chart 1 change or special chart 2 change) is being executed in the time-saving state after a jackpot game of the special chart 1 jackpot type "5R time-saving 100-time jackpot" (Figure 10). The player hits the right side, and by passing through gate 28, electric chute 29 opens, and the game ball that entered electric chute winning slot 34 enters either first winning slot 75 or second winning slot 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special chart 1 time-saving state"). The game ball entering first winning slot 75 or second winning slot 76 opens either first starting slot 30 or second starting slot 21, and the game ball entering the opened starting slot 30, 21 results in a first special chart hold (special chart 1 hold) or second special chart hold (special chart 2 hold). Depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through the gate 28, the probability of the first start gate 30 opening is approximately 277/278, and the probability of the second start gate 21 opening is approximately 1/279 (Figures 13(B) and 14). In the gaming machine 1, the consumption of the reserved first special symbol takes priority over the consumption of the reserved second special symbol (Figure 21).

As shown in Figure 53 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing state on the display screen 7a while special symbol 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also those that are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The changing display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (here, special symbol 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol drawing (here, special symbol 1 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays three hold icons 9A representing special chart 1 holds, and a variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a remaining time reduction display, which shows the remaining number of time reductions, displayed as "50 time reductions remaining," and a variable special chart display, which shows the type of special chart currently being varied, displayed as "Special chart 1 variation."

In Figure 53 (A), at this time, the gaming ball passes through the gate 28, and depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29, the gaming ball enters the second winning opening 76, and then enters the opened second starting opening 21, causing the number of memories for the second special symbol reserve (number of special symbol 2 reserves) to become "1." In other words, a special symbol 2 reserve has been created. With the creation of a special symbol 2 reserve, a new reserve icon 9B is displayed on the display screen 7a.

53(B) shows the state where the next special symbol 1 variation after the special symbol 1 variation shown in FIG. 53(A) has ended. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols. At this time, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 causes the game ball to enter the second winning slot 7.
6, and the game ball enters the opened second starting hole 21, causing the number of stored second special symbol reserves (number of special symbol 2 reserves) to become "2." In other words, a new special symbol 2 reserve has been created. With the creation of the special symbol 2 reserve, one reserve icon 9B is added to the display screen 7a, and two reserve icons 9B are displayed.

Then, the special chart 1 variation is repeated, and Figure 53 (C) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "20 time-saving counts remaining." The variation display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special chart 1 variation is displayed. At this time, a specific count notification image of "20 time-saving counts remaining!" appears. After the remaining 20 time-saving counts variation ends, during subsequent time-saving fluctuations, even if a special chart 2 reservation occurs, the reservation icon 9B is not displayed immediately, but is displayed at a delayed time. Two reservation icons 9B corresponding to the special chart 2 reservation acquired in Figures 53 (A) and (B) continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Then, the special symbol 1 changes repeatedly, and Figure 53 (D) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "10 time-saving counts remaining." The display shows the changes in decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special symbol 1 change. At this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the game ball enters second winning slot 76, and then enters the opened second starting slot 21, causing the number of second special symbol reserves (special symbol 2 reserve number) to become "3." However, despite the occurrence of a new special symbol 2 reserve, no reserve icon 9B is added to display screen 7a, and the two reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed.

Then, the special symbol 1 variation is repeated, and Figure 53 (E) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "0 time-saving counts remaining." The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special symbol 1 variation are displayed frozen. At this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the game ball enters second winning slot 76. The game ball then enters the opened second starting slot 21, causing the number of second special symbol reserves (special symbol 2 reserve number) to become "4." However, despite the occurrence of a new special symbol 2 reserve, no reserve icon 9B is added to display screen 7a, and the two reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed. With the end of the final time-saving variation, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state.

Then, the special chart 1 variation is repeated, and Figure 53 (F) shows the state in which the first variation (special chart 1 variation) is being executed after the time-saving feature has ended. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a varying manner. At a predetermined timing during this variation, two additional reserve icons 9B are displayed, and an effect in which four reserve icons 9B are displayed is executed. In other words, the two reserve icons 9B corresponding to the special chart 2 reserve acquired in Figures 53 (D) and (E) are displayed with a delay. In this way, during the "period from the start of the time-saving feature until the special chart 1 reserve is consumed and gone" in Figures 53 (A) to (G), if a ball lands in the second starting hole 21 during this period, the special chart 2 reserve will be displayed within the same period, even if the timing of the display is delayed.

Figure 53 (G) shows the state after the special symbol 1 variation shown in Figure 53 (F) has ended. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols. At this time, the variation icon (the relevant reserved icon) 9C is consumed. Because this is a normal state, even if the player performs a right hit and passes through gate 28, the electric chute 29 will almost never open (Figure 13 (A)). Therefore, there will be almost no additional special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 reserves, and there will be no special symbol 1 reserves to be consumed with priority.

Since there is no reserve icon 9A corresponding to the special chart 1 reserve, as shown in FIG. 53 (H), the special chart 2 change begins due to the consumption of the special chart 2 reserve. At this time, the four reserve icons 9B do not shift and remain displayed in their current positions. The variable icon (relevant reserve icon) 9C is not displayed in the position where it is displayed (variable icon display position). In this state, the special chart 2 change begins, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to display the change. With the start of the special chart 2 change, the number of memories for the second special chart reserve (special chart 2 reserve number) decreases by one to "3," while the display of the reserve icon 9B does not decrease, and the four reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed.

Figure 53 (I) shows a state in which a small jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, each with a smiling character image, are displayed in a stopped state. With gaming machine 1, the Special Chart 2 lottery is never a miss and always results in a win (either a big jackpot or a small jackpot) ( Figure 9 (A) ). With gaming machine 1, the chance of a big jackpot is approximately 1 in 312, and the chance of a small jackpot is approximately 311 in 312. When a small jackpot is won in Special Chart 2, whether in the time-saving mode or not (non-time-saving mode in this case), either a "3R time-saving single small jackpot" or a "3R normal small jackpot" is selected. There is approximately a 1/2 chance of a "3R time-saving single small jackpot" and an approximately 1/2 chance of a "3R normal small jackpot." Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, each with a smiling character image, indicate a small jackpot win for the "3R time-saving single small jackpot." The number of reserved icons 9B displayed does not decrease, and four reserved icons 9B continue to be displayed. The four reserved icons 9B continue to be displayed even during a jackpot game.

Figure 53 (J) shows the time-saving feature during one cycle after a jackpot game associated with a "3R time-saving, one-time small win." The special symbol 2 cycle begins, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change. With the start of the special symbol 2 cycle, the number of second special symbol reserves (special symbol 2 reserve number) decreases by one to "2," while the number of reserve icons 9B displayed does not decrease, and four reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed. During the time-saving feature during one cycle after a jackpot game associated with a "3R time-saving, one-time small win," when the electric chute 29 opens as the player passes through gate 28 with a right hit, any game ball that enters electric chute winning slot 34 will always enter second winning slot 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special symbol 2 time-saving state"). When a gaming ball enters the second winning opening 76, the second starting opening 21 is opened, and when a gaming ball enters the second starting opening 21, a second special symbol reservation (special symbol 2 reservation) is created. As a result, the number of second special symbol reservations (special symbol 2 reservation number) increases by one to "3." The number of reservation icons 9B does not increase or decrease, and four reservation icons 9B are continuously displayed. In this way, during the "period from when the special symbol 2 reservation consumption begins to when the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed and disappears" in Figures 53 (H) to (L), no additional reservation icons 9B are displayed even if a ball enters the second starting opening 21 during that period.

Figure 53 (K) shows a state in which a small jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and three decorative circular symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state. As described above, gaming machine 1 never loses in the Special Chart 2 lottery and always wins (either a big jackpot or a small jackpot) (Figure 9 (A)). Gaming machine 1 has an approximately 1/312 chance of winning a big jackpot and an approximately 311/312 chance of winning a small jackpot. When a small jackpot is won in Special Chart 2, either a "3R time-saving single small jackpot" or a "3R normal small jackpot" is selected, regardless of whether the game is in the time-saving or non-time-saving mode (time-saving mode in this case). There is an approximately 1/2 chance of a "3R time-saving single small jackpot" and an approximately 1/2 chance of a "3R normal small jackpot." Here, the decorative circular symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate a small jackpot win for the "3R normal small jackpot." At this time, of the four reserve icons 9B that were displayed, the oldest one on the left disappears, and the remaining three reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed. The three reserve icons 9B that continue to be displayed shift one position to the left. In other words, here, the reserve icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the result of the corresponding lottery. Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a "3R time-saving single small win," it will not disappear, and if the result is a "3R normal small win," it will disappear. The three reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed even during a jackpot game.

Figure 53 (L) shows the normal state after a jackpot game involving a "3R normal small win." The Special 2 change begins, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change. The start of the Special 2 change reduces the number of reserved second special symbols (Special 2 reserved number) by one to "2," while the display of reserved icons 9B remains unchanged, with three reserved icons 9B continuing to be displayed. As mentioned above, the gaming machine 1 never loses the Special 2 lottery and always results in a win (jackpot or small win) (Figure 9 (A)). When a small win occurs on the Special 2, whether the game is in the time-saving mode or not (non-time-saving mode in this case), either a "3R time-saving single small win" or a "3R normal small win" is selected. This continues until the Special 2 reserved symbols are depleted. In this way, in the "period from when the consumption of the special chart 2 reservation begins until the special chart 2 reservation is consumed and disappears" in Figures 53 (H) to (L), even if a ball enters the second starting hole 21 during the period, as in Figure 53 (J), the special chart 2 reservation (reservation icon 9B) will not be additionally displayed during the period.

[Icon display effect B]
54 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect B. The icon display effect is an effect in which an icon is displayed when the ball enters the starting hole during the first period, and in the subsequent second period, no icon is displayed even if the ball enters the starting hole. Here, the "icon" is set as "reserved icon 9B," the "first period" is set as "the period from the start of the time-saving function until the reserved special chart 1 is consumed and disappears" shown in FIGS. 54(A) to (D), and the "second period" is set as "the period from the start of the reserved special chart 2 consumption until the reserved special chart 2 is consumed and disappears" shown in FIGS. 54(E) to (J).

In icon display effect B, we will explain that a special chart change (special chart 1 change or special chart 2 change) is being executed in the time-saving state after a jackpot game of the special chart 1 jackpot type "5R time-saving 100-time jackpot" (Figure 10). The player hits the right side, and by passing through gate 28, electric chute 29 opens, and the game ball that entered electric chute winning hole 34 enters either first winning hole 75 or second winning hole 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special chart 1 time-saving state"). The game ball entering first winning hole 75 or second winning hole 76 opens either first starting hole 30 or second starting hole 21, and the game ball entering the opened starting hole 30, 21 results in a first special chart hold (special chart 1 hold) or second special chart hold (special chart 2 hold). Depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through the gate 28, the probability of the first start gate 30 opening is approximately 277/278, and the probability of the second start gate 21 opening is approximately 1/279 (Figures 13(B) and 14). In the gaming machine 1, the consumption of the reserved first special symbol takes priority over the consumption of the reserved second special symbol (Figure 21).

As shown in Figure 54 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing state on the display screen 7a while special symbol 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also those that are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The changing display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (here, special symbol 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol drawing (here, special symbol 1 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays three hold icons 9A representing special chart 1 holds, and a variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a remaining time reduction display, which indicates the number of remaining time reductions, displayed as "50 time reductions remaining," and a variable special chart display, which indicates the type of special chart currently being varied, displayed as "Special chart 1 variation."

In Figure 54 (A), at this time, the gaming ball passes through the gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of the electric chute 29, the gaming ball enters the second winning opening 76, and then enters the opened second starting opening 21, causing the number of memories for the second special symbol hold (number of special symbol 2 holds) to become "1." In other words, a special symbol 2 hold has occurred. However, even though a special symbol 2 hold has occurred, the hold icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Figure 54 (B) shows the state when the next Special Chart 1 variation after the Special Chart 1 variation shown in Figure 54 (A) has ended. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed frozen. At this time, the gaming ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the gaming ball enters second winning slot 76, and then enters the opened second starting slot 21, causing the number of second special chart reserves (number of special chart 2 reserves) to become "2." In other words, a new Special Chart 2 reserve has been created. However, even though two Special Chart 2 reserves have been created, reserve icon 9B is not displayed on display screen 7a.

Then, the Special Chart 1 variation is repeated, and Figure 54 (C) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "20 time-saving counts remaining." The variation display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the Special Chart 1 variation is displayed. At this time, a specific number notification image appears saying "20 time-saving counts remaining!" At the end of the variation of the remaining 20 time-saving counts, two additional reserve icons 9B corresponding to the Special Chart 2 reserves acquired in Figures 54 (A) and (B) are displayed.

Then, the special symbol 1 changes repeatedly, and Figure 54 (D) shows the state when the remaining time-saving count display shows "10 time-saving counts remaining." The display shows the changes in decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special symbol 1 change. At this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the game ball enters second winning slot 76, and then enters the opened second starting slot 21, causing the number of second special symbol reserves (special symbol 2 reserve number) to become "3." However, despite the occurrence of a new special symbol 2 reserve, no reserve icon 9B is added to display screen 7a, and the two reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed.

After that, the special chart 1 fluctuations are repeated, and when the final fluctuation during the time-saving period ends, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state, the special chart 1 reserve disappears, and a fluctuation corresponding to the special chart 2 reserve begins. In the normal state, even if the player hits the right and passes through the gate 28, the electric chute 29 almost never opens (Figure 13 (A)). Therefore, there are almost no additional special chart 1 reserves or special chart 2 reserves, and there are no special chart 1 reserves to be consumed with priority.

When the Special Chart 1 reserve is used up, one additional reserve icon 9B is displayed, making three reserve icons 9B visible, as shown in Figure 54 (E). In other words, one reserve icon 9B corresponding to the Special Chart 2 reserve acquired in Figure 54 (D) is displayed with a delay. In this way, during the "period from the start of the time-saving feature until the Special Chart 1 reserve is consumed and used up" in Figures 54 (A) to (E), if a ball lands in the second starting hole 21 during this period, the Special Chart 2 reserve will be displayed within the same period, even if the timing of the display is delayed. After that, the Special Chart 2 change will begin as the Special Chart 2 reserve is consumed.

The presentation of "the period from when the Special 2 Reserve begins to be consumed until the Special 2 Reserve is consumed and gone" in Figures 54(E)-(J) is the same as that of Figures 53(H)-(L) for Icon Display Presentation A. Unlike Figures 53(H)-(L), Figures 54(E)-(J) show a state in which "3R Normal Small Win" happens to be selected for all small wins when a small win is won. In Figures 54(E)-(J), just like Figure 53(J), even if a game ball enters the second start hole 21, creating a second special reserve (Special 2 Reserve) and increasing the number of second special reserves (Special 2 Reserve Count) by one, the number of reserve icons 9B does not increase or decrease. In other words, in the "period from when the Special 2 Reserve begins to be consumed until the Special 2 Reserve is consumed and gone" in Figures 54(E)-(J), even if a ball enters the second start hole 21 during the period, no additional reserve icons 9B are displayed.

As shown in Figure 54 (E), when the special chart 2 change begins due to the consumption of the special chart 2 reservation, the three reservation icons 9B do not shift and remain displayed in their current positions. The change icon (relevant reservation icon) 9C is not displayed in the position where it is displayed (the change icon display position). In this state, the special chart 2 change begins, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to display the change. With the start of the special chart 2 change, the number of memories for the second special chart reservation (special chart 2 reservation number) decreases by one to "2," while the display of the reservation icon 9B does not decrease, and the three reservation icons 9B continue to be displayed.

Figure 54 (F) shows a state in which a small jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and three decorative circular symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state. With gaming machine 1, the Special Chart 2 lottery is never a miss and always results in a win (either a big jackpot or a small jackpot) (Figure 9 (A)). With gaming machine 1, the chance of a big jackpot is approximately 1/312, and the chance of a small jackpot is approximately 311/312. When a small jackpot is won in Special Chart 2, whether in the time-saving or non-time-saving mode (non-time-saving mode in this case), either a "3R time-saving single small jackpot" or a "3R normal small jackpot" is selected. There is approximately a 1/2 chance of a "3R time-saving single small jackpot" and an approximately 1/2 chance of a "3R normal small jackpot." Here, the decorative circular symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate a small jackpot win for the "3R normal small jackpot." At this time, of the three reserve icons 9B that were displayed, the oldest one on the left disappears, and the remaining two reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed. The two reserve icons 9B that continue to be displayed shift one position to the left. As with Figures 53 (H) to (L) of icon display performance A, the reserve icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the result of the corresponding lottery. Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a "3R time-saving single small win," it will not disappear, and if it is a "3R normal small win," it will disappear. The two reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed even during jackpot play.

Figure 54 (G) shows the normal state changing after a jackpot game associated with a "3R normal small win." This is the same state as Figure 53 (L) of icon display effect A. The special symbol 2 change begins, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change display. With the start of the special symbol 2 change, the number of memories for the second special symbol reserve (special symbol 2 reserve number) decreases by one to "1," while the display of reserve icon 9B does not decrease, and two reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed. As described above, with gaming machine 1, the special symbol 2 lottery never results in a miss and always results in a win (jackpot or small win) (Figure 9 (A)). When a small win occurs with special symbol 2, either a "3R time-saving single small win" or a "3R normal small win" is selected, regardless of whether the time-saving mode is on or off (non-time-saving mode in this case). This continues until the special symbol 2 reserve is gone.

Figure 54 (H) shows a state in which a small jackpot has been won again in the Special Chart 2 lottery, with three circular decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a static state. Here, the circular decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R again indicate a "3R normal small jackpot" small jackpot win. At this time, of the two displayed reserve icons 9B, the oldest one (the leftmost one) disappears, and the remaining one continues to be displayed. The one reserve icon 9B that continues to be displayed shifts one position to the left. As mentioned above, the reserve icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the result of the corresponding lottery, similar to Figures 53 (H) to (L) of Icon Display Performance A. Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a "3R time-saving single small jackpot," it will not disappear, and if the result is a "3R normal small jackpot," it will disappear. One reserve icon 9B continues to be displayed even during a jackpot game.

Figure 54 (I) shows the normal state after a jackpot game involving a "3R normal small win." This is the same state as Figure 54 (G). The Special 2 change begins, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change. With the start of the Special 2 change, the number of reserved second special symbols (Special 2 reserved number) decreases by one to "0," while the reserved icon 9B remains displayed, with one reserved icon 9B remaining. As described above, the gaming machine 1 never loses the Special 2 lottery and always results in a win (jackpot or small win) (Figure 9 (A)). When a small win occurs on the Special 2 symbol, whether in the time-saving mode or not (in this case, the time-saving mode), either a "3R time-saving single small win" or a "3R normal small win" is selected. This continues until the Special 2 symbol is depleted.

Figure 54 (J) shows a state in which a small jackpot has been won again in the special chart 2 lottery, and three decorative circular symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state. Here, the decorative circular symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R again indicate a small jackpot win for the "3R normal small jackpot." At this time, one of the reserved icons 9B that was displayed disappears, and the reserved icon 9B is no longer displayed. As a result, the number of reserved second special symbols (reserved number for special chart 2), "0," matches the number of reserved icons 9B. As mentioned above, the reserved icon 9B does not disappear if the result of the lottery is a "3R time-reduced single small jackpot," but disappears if the result is a "3R normal small jackpot." After that, the jackpot game associated with the "3R normal small jackpot" is played, and the game returns to normal mode. In the "period from when the Special Chart 2 Reserve consumption begins until the Special Chart 2 Reserve is consumed and disappears" in Figures 54 (E) to (J), just like in Figures 53 (H) to (K) for icon display performance A, even if a ball enters the second starting hole 21 during the period, the Special Chart 2 Reserve (reserve icon 9B) will not be additionally displayed during the period.

In Figure 54 (K), in the normal state after a jackpot game associated with a "3R normal small jackpot," the text image "End, please return to left-handed play" is displayed. At this time, there are no special 1 or 2 reserved balls, so neither reserved icon 9A nor reserved icon 9B is displayed, and no variation has begun. In this state, the player plays left-handed, and when the ball lands in the first starting hole 20, reserved icon 9A is displayed, and the ball shifts and the variable icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C is displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 54 (L), the special symbol 1 begins to change, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change. If a ball lands in the first starting hole 20, the hold icon 9A will be displayed.

[Icon display effect C]
Figure 55 is a diagram for explaining icon display effect C. Figures 55 (A) to (L) are the same effects as the "period from the start of the special chart 2 reserved consumption until the special chart 2 reserved is consumed and disappears" in Figures 53 (H) to (L) of icon display effect A and Figures 54 (E) to (J) of icon display effect B. In Figures 55 (A) to (L), the order of the selected small prize winning types when a small prize is won is different from Figures 53 (H) to (L) and Figures 54 (E) to (J).

Figure 55 (A) corresponds to Figure 54 (E). That is, the "period from the start of time-saving until the Special Chart 1 reserve is consumed and gone" in Figures 53 (A) to (G) of Icon Display Performance A and Figure 54 (A) to (D) of Icon Display Performance B has passed, and in normal mode, Special Chart 2 variation has begun due to the consumption of Special Chart 2 reserve. At this time, the three reserve icons 9B do not shift and remain displayed in their current positions. The variable icon (relevant reserve icon) 9C is not displayed in the position where it should be displayed (variable icon display position). In this state, Special Chart 2 variation begins, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to display variations. With the start of Special Chart 2 variation, the number of memories for the second special chart reserve (Special Chart 2 reserve number) decreases by one to "2," while the display of the reserve icon 9B does not decrease, and the three reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed.

Figure 55 (B) shows a state in which a small jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, each featuring a smiling character image, are displayed in a stopped state. In the gaming machine 1, the Special Chart 2 lottery is always a win (either a big jackpot or a small jackpot) (Figure 9 (A)). In the gaming machine 1, the chance of a big jackpot is approximately 1/312, and the chance of a small jackpot is approximately 311/312. When a small jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, whether in the time-saving mode or not (non-time-saving mode in this case), either a "3R time-saving single small jackpot" or a "3R normal small jackpot" is selected. There is an approximately 1/2 probability of a "3R time-saving single small jackpot" and an approximately 1/2 probability of a "3R normal small jackpot." Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, each featuring a smiling character image, indicate a small jackpot win in the "3R time-saving single small jackpot." The number of reserved icons 9B displayed does not decrease, and three reserved icons 9B are continuously displayed. The three reserved icons 9B are continuously displayed even during a jackpot game.

Figure 55 (C) shows the time-saving period changing once after a jackpot game associated with a "3R time-saving 1-time small win." The special symbol 2 change begins, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change. With the start of the special symbol 2 change, the number of second special symbol reserves (special symbol 2 reserve number) decreases by one to "1," while the number of reserve icons 9B displayed does not decrease, and three reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed. During the time-saving period after a jackpot game associated with a "3R time-saving 1-time small win," when the player hits the right side and passes through gate 28, opening electric chute 29, any game ball that enters electric chute winning slot 34 will always enter second winning slot 76, as shown in Figure 55 (D) (see "Special symbol 2 time-saving state" in Figure 13 (B)). When a gaming ball enters the second winning opening 76, the second starting opening 21 is opened, and when a gaming ball enters the second starting opening 21, a second special symbol reservation (special symbol 2 reservation) is created. As a result, the number of second special symbol reservations (special symbol 2 reservation number) increases by one to "2." The number of reservation icons 9B does not increase or decrease, and three reservation icons 9B are continuously displayed. In this way, during the "period from when the special symbol 2 reservation consumption begins to when the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed and disappears" in Figures 55 (A) to (L), no additional reservation icons 9B are displayed even if a ball enters the second starting opening 21 during that period.

Figure 55 (E) shows a state in which a small jackpot has been won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and once again, the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the smiling character image are displayed frozen together. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the smiling character image again indicate that a small jackpot has been won in the "3R Time-Shortened 1-Time Small Win" mode. The number of reserved icons 9B displayed does not decrease, and the three reserved icons 9B continue to be displayed. The three reserved icons 9B continue to be displayed even during a jackpot game.

Figure 55 (F) shows the time-saving period changing once after a jackpot game associated with a "3R time-saving 1-time small win." As in Figure 55 (C), the special symbol 2 change begins, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change. With the start of the special symbol 2 change, the number of second special symbol reserves (special symbol 2 reserve number) decreases by one to "1," while the number of reserve icons 9B displayed does not decrease, and three reserve icons 9B continue to be displayed. During the time-saving period after a jackpot game associated with a "3R time-saving 1-time small win," when the player hits the right side and passes through gate 28, electric chute 29 opens, and as shown in Figure 55 (G), a game ball that enters electric chute winning slot 34 always enters second winning slot 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special symbol 2 time-saving state"). When a gaming ball enters the second winning opening 76, the second starting opening 21 is opened, and when a gaming ball enters the second starting opening 21, a second special symbol reservation (special symbol 2 reservation) is created. As a result, the number of second special symbol reservations (special symbol 2 reservation number) increases by one to "2." The number of reservation icons 9B does not increase or decrease, and three reservation icons 9B are continuously displayed. In this way, during the "period from when the special symbol 2 reservation consumption begins to when the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed and disappears" in Figures 55 (A) to (L), no additional reservation icons 9B are displayed even if a ball enters the second starting opening 21 during that period.

Figure 55 (H) shows a state in which a small prize has been won in the special drawing 2, and three decorative circular image patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state. Here, the decorative circular image patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that a small prize has been won in the "3R normal small prize". At this time, of the three reserved icons 9B that were displayed, the oldest one on the left disappears, and the remaining two reserved icons 9B continue to be displayed. The two reserved icons 9B that continue to be displayed shift and move one place to the left. That is, here,
The reserved icon 9B may or may not disappear depending on the result of the corresponding lottery. Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a "3R time-saving single small win," it will not disappear, and if the result is a "3R normal small win," it will disappear. The two reserved icons 9B continue to be displayed even during a jackpot game.

Figure 55 (I) shows the normal state changing after a jackpot game resulting from a "3R normal small jackpot." The special symbol 2 change begins, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change. With the start of the special symbol 2 change, the number of memories for the second special symbol hold (special symbol 2 hold number) decreases by one to "1," but the display of the hold icon 9B does not decrease, and two hold icons 9B continue to be displayed.

Figure 55 (J) shows a state in which a small jackpot has been won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and once again, the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the smiling character image are displayed frozen together. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the smiling character image again indicate that a small jackpot has been won in the "3R Time-Shortened 1-Time Small Win" mode. The number of reserved icons 9B displayed does not decrease, and two reserved icons 9B continue to be displayed. The two reserved icons 9B continue to be displayed even during a jackpot game.

Figure 55 (K) shows the time-saving period changing once after a jackpot game associated with a "3R time-saving 1-time small win." Special symbol 2 change begins, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to change. With the start of Special symbol 2 change, the number of second special symbol reservations (Special symbol 2 reservation number) decreases by one to "0," while the display of reservation icon 9B does not decrease, and two reservation icons 9B continue to be displayed. During the time-saving period after a jackpot game associated with a "3R time-saving 1-time small win," when the player hits the right side and passes through gate 28, electric chute 29 opens, and as shown in Figure 55 (L), the game ball that enters electric chute winning slot 34 always enters second winning slot 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special symbol 2 time-saving state"). When a game ball enters the second winning opening 76, the second starting opening 21 is opened, and when a game ball enters the second starting opening 21, a second special symbol reservation (special symbol 2 reservation) is created. As a result, the number of second special symbol reservations (special symbol 2 reservation number) increases by one to "1." The number of reservation icons 9B does not increase or decrease, and two reservation icons 9B are continuously displayed. In this way, during the "period from when the special symbol 2 reservation consumption begins to when the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed and disappears" in Figures 55 (A) to (L), no additional reservation icons 9B are displayed even if a ball enters the second starting opening 21 during that period.

As mentioned above, on the gaming machine 1, the Special Chart 2 lottery never results in a miss and always results in a win (big win or small win) (Figure 9 (A)). When a small win occurs on the Special Chart 2, either a "3R time-saving single small win" or a "3R normal small win" is selected, regardless of whether the time-saving mode is on or off (non-time-saving mode in this case). This continues until the Special Chart 2 reserve is depleted. Thus, during the "period from when the Special Chart 2 reserve consumption begins to when the Special Chart 2 reserve is consumed and depleted" in Figures 55 (A) to (L), even if a ball lands in the second starting hole 21 during the period, as in Figures 55 (D), (G), and (L), no additional Special Chart 2 reserve (reserve icon 9B) is displayed during the period.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the icon display effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 21 during the "first period from the start of the time-saving mode until the special symbol 1 reserve is consumed and disappears" shown in Figures 53(A) to (G), the reserved icon 9B is displayed. However, during the "second period from the start of the special symbol 2 reserve consumption until the special symbol 2 reserve is consumed and disappears" shown in Figures 53(H) to (L), an effect can be executed in which the reserved icon 9B is not displayed even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 21. This configuration allows for a novel effect that has never been seen before, providing visual enjoyment to the player and increasing interest. The same applies to Figures 54 and 55.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the "second period from when the special symbol 2 reservation starts to be consumed until the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed and disappears" shown in Figures 53(H)-(L), the display of the reservation icon 9B displayed during the "first period from when the time-saving feature starts to when the special symbol 1 reservation is consumed and disappears" shown in Figures 53(A)-(G) is maintained, and even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the reservation icon 9B is not additionally displayed. This configuration allows for a visually entertaining and exciting experience for players through a novel presentation not previously available. The same applies to Figures 54 and 55.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the "second period from when the special symbol 2 reservation consumption starts until the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed and disappears" in Figures 53 (H) to (L), the reserved icon 9B disappears after the corresponding winning/losing lottery is executed (Figure 53 (K)). With this configuration, a novel and unprecedented presentation can visually entertain the player and increase their interest. The same applies to Figures 54 and 55.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the "second period from when the special symbol 2 reservation starts to be consumed until the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed and disappears" shown in Figures 53(H) to 53(L), if the corresponding lottery is won, the reserved icon 9B may continue to be displayed even during the winning game. This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative presentation that visually entertains the player and increases their interest. The same applies to Figures 54 and 55.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the "second period from when the Special Chart 2 reserve consumption begins until the Special Chart 2 reserve is consumed and disappears" shown in Figures 53(H) to 53(L), if the corresponding lottery result is a "3R time-saving single small win," the reserved icon 9B will not disappear and will continue to be displayed during the winning game, but will not continue to be displayed and will disappear if the result is a "3R normal small win." This configuration allows for unprecedented and innovative presentation that visually entertains players and increases their interest. The same applies to Figures 54 and 55.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment,
In the "first period from the start of the time-saving feature until the Special Chart 1 reserve is consumed and gone" shown in Figures 53(A) to 53(G), if a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the reserve icon 9B may be displayed at a later time after the ball enters. This configuration allows for a visually entertaining and exciting experience for players through a novel presentation not previously available. The same applies to Figure 54.

[Modification]
The following are modified examples of icon display effects.
[Modification 1]
In the icon display effects A to C, the first period in which "an icon is displayed when a game ball enters the starting hole" is set to "the period from the start of the time-saving feature until the special game 1 reserve is consumed and disappears" in Figures 53 (A) to (G) and 54 (A) to (D), and the second period in which "an icon is not displayed even if a game ball enters the starting hole" is set to "the period from the start of the special game 2 reserve consumption until the special game 2 reserve is consumed and disappears" in Figures 53 (H) to (L), 54 (E) to (J), and 55 (A) to (L). However, the first period and the second period can be set to any period.

[Modification 2]
In the icon display effects A to C, the hold icon 9B is used as an example of an icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole. However, the icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole may be an icon other than the hold icon 9B. For example, the icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole may be the hold icon 9A, or any icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole may be used. For example, in the present application, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21, it is always a win ( FIG. 9(A) ). Therefore, if an icon indicating that a win has been confirmed is displayed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21, this icon also corresponds to the icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole of the present application.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole,
During a first period, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the icon is displayed, and during a second period after the first period, an effect can be executed in which the icon is not displayed even if the game ball enters the starting hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
In the second period, an effect can be executed in which the icon displayed in the first period is maintained and the icon is not additionally displayed even if the game ball enters the starting hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1 or A2-2,
In the second period, the icon disappears after the corresponding lottery is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
During the second period, if a player wins the corresponding lottery, the reserved icon may continue to be displayed even during the execution of a winning game.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-4,
During the second period, if the player wins the corresponding lottery, the reserved icon may continue to be displayed during the winning game or may disappear without being displayed, depending on the winning type.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the first period, when a game ball enters the starting hole, the icon may be displayed at a timing delayed from the ball entering the starting hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the winning type expectation suggestion effects A to C using Figures 56 to 58. These winning type expectation suggestion effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc.
The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the normal pattern variation start command, variation performance start command, etc. received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a performance indicating the expected probability of winning type is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Win type expectation suggestion effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a winning type expectation suggestion effect A. The winning type expectation suggestion effect is an effect that executes a suggestion effect suggesting the expectation of winning a specific winning symbol among multiple types of winning symbols of the special symbol or normal symbol while the special symbol or normal symbol is fluctuating. Here, a "normal symbol" is set as the "symbol," and the "expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol" is set as the "expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol in the normal symbol lottery." Below, in the normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state that is executed after winning the special symbol 1 lottery, there are two normal symbol winning types, "long opening 1" and "long opening 2" ( FIG. 13(B): special symbol 1 time-saving state), and an example of an effect that displays the expectation of winning one of the winning types is shown.

In the winning type expectation indication effect A, we will explain that a special symbol change (special symbol 1 change or special symbol 2 change) is being executed in the time-saving state after a jackpot play of the special symbol 1 jackpot type "5R time-saving 100-time jackpot" (Figure 10). The player executes a right hit, and by passing through gate 28, the normal symbol change display 42 (Figure 3) displays the normal symbol, and after the specified change time has passed, the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are two types of winning normal symbol stop symbols corresponding to "long opening 1" and "long opening 2." Specifically, these are "normal symbol_winning symbol 2" and "normal symbol_winning symbol 3" in the "special symbol 1 time-saving state" of Figure 13 (B). When a winning combination of "Long Opening 1" (regular winning symbol 2) is selected and the electric chute 29 opens, the game ball that entered the electric chute winning hole 34 enters the first winning hole 75, opening the first starting hole 30, and the ball entering the first starting hole 30 creates a first special symbol hold (special symbol 1 hold). When a winning combination of "Long Opening 2" (regular winning symbol 3) is selected and the electric chute 29 opens, the game ball that entered the electric chute winning hole 34 enters the second winning hole 76, opening the second starting hole 21, and the ball entering the second starting hole 21 creates a second special symbol hold (special symbol 2 hold). The probability that "Long Opening 1" (regular winning symbol 2) is selected is approximately 277/278, and the probability that "Long Opening 2" (regular winning symbol 3) is selected is approximately 1/279 (FIGS. 13(B) and 14). In the gaming machine 1, the consumption of the first reserved special symbol is prioritized over the consumption of the second reserved special symbol (Figure 21).

As shown in Figure 56 (A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner on the display screen 7a while special pattern 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also displays in which they are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. The changing display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (here, special pattern 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of patterns announces the result of the special pattern drawing (here, special pattern 1 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays two hold icons 9A representing special symbol 1 holds, and a variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special symbol 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a remaining time reduction display, which indicates the number of remaining time reductions, displayed as "50 time reductions remaining," and a variable special symbol display, which indicates the type of special symbol currently being varied, displayed as "Special symbol 1 variation." In Figure 56 (A), at this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and the variable display of the normal symbol begins on normal symbol display 42.

In FIG. 56(B), when the variable display of the normal symbol starts on the normal symbol display 42,
A rectangular image appears on the display screen 7a. The rectangular image is displayed in front of and overlaps the variable display of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and variable displayed decorative symbols 8X and 8Y are displayed within the rectangular image area. The decorative symbols 8X and 8Y are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8X and a right decorative symbol 8Y. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the normal symbol, and the stop display of the set of symbols announces the result of the normal symbol lottery.

In Figure 56(C), the rectangular image that appeared on the display screen 7a is enlarged, and in addition to the display of the changing decorative symbols 8X and 8Y, an expectation suggestion image of "Expected probability of winning Special Symbol 2: 50%" is displayed. This expectation suggestion image indicates the expected probability of winning a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing regular symbol lottery. Here, it indicates that there is a 50% chance of winning the winning type that will acquire the reserved Special Symbol 2, i.e., the probability that "Long Open 2" (Regular Symbol _ Winning Symbol 3) will be selected. In other words, when this expectation suggestion image is displayed, there is a 50% chance that "Long Open 2" (Regular Symbol _ Winning Symbol 3) will be selected, and a 50% chance that any other stopping symbol (a losing symbol or "Long Open 1" (Regular Symbol _ Winning Symbol 2)) will be selected. Figures 56(I) and (J) show the case where "Long Open 1" is selected, and Figures 56(K) and (L) show the case where a losing symbol is selected. In this way, the expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a particular prize type is relatively high, and also suggests that the expectation of winning other prize types is relatively low. For example, the higher the expectation of winning Special Chart 2, the lower the expectation of winning Special Chart 1. This is where it differs from traditional win expectation. Traditional win expectation is the expectation of whether or not you will win, and when there are multiple prize types, the expectation is high for all of them.

Figure 56 (D) shows the state after Figure 56 (C) where the normal symbol display 42 stops and displays the normal symbol at "Normal symbol - Winning symbol 3." In conjunction with this, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y displayed in the rectangular image stop and display at "77," and a result notification image for "Special symbol 2 win" is displayed. This result notification image notifies the user that they have won the winning type that will grant them a reserved special symbol 2, i.e., that "Long Open 2" has been selected.

Figure 56 (E) shows the state after Figure 56 (D) where a "Long Open 2" win has been made, causing the electric chute 29 to open, and the game ball that entered the electric chute winning hole 34 has entered the second winning hole 76. The ball entering the second winning hole 76 opens the second starting hole 21, and the ball entering the second starting hole 21 creates a second special symbol hold (special symbol 2 hold). As a result, a new hold icon 9B is displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the Special Chart 1 variation is repeated, and Figure 56 (F) shows the state when the remaining number of time-saving cycles display shows "0 time-saving cycles remaining." The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the Special Chart 1 variation are displayed frozen. At this time, the Special Chart 1 reserve is cleared, and the Special Chart 2 reserve begins to be consumed. With the end of the final time-saving cycle variation, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state.

Figure 56 (G) shows a state in which a small jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, each with a smiling character image, are displayed in a stopped state. With gaming machine 1, the Special Chart 2 lottery never results in a miss and always results in a win (large or small jackpot) ( Figure 9 (A) ). With gaming machine 1, the odds of a large jackpot are approximately 1 in 312, and a small jackpot are approximately 311 in 312. When a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 2, whether in the time-saving mode or not (non-time-saving mode in this case), either a "3R time-saving single small jackpot" or a "3R normal small jackpot" is selected. There is approximately a 1/2 chance of a "3R time-saving single small jackpot," and approximately a 1/2 chance of a "3R normal small jackpot." Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, each with a smiling character image, indicate a small jackpot win for a "3R time-saving single small jackpot."

In Figure 56 (H), the jackpot game ends and an image of the number of balls won is displayed, saying "Jackpot game ended, 3,000 balls won." The number of balls won displayed in this text image may be the actual number of balls won, or it may not be the actual number of balls but the number of balls planned to be won depending on the type of win. The image of the number of balls won may also be displayed before the jackpot game begins. In this case, the image of the number of balls won may display the number of balls planned to be won depending on the type of win. As described above, in gaming machine 1, the special chart 2 lottery never results in a loss and always results in a win (jackpot or small win) (Figure 9 (A)). Therefore, when a special chart 2 hold occurs, it is guaranteed that a specified amount of balls will be won through a winning game. In other words, when the hold icon 9B is displayed on display screen 7a, it is suggested that a specified amount of balls will be won through a winning game thereafter. Furthermore, in gaming machine 1, when "Long Open 2" (normal symbol - winning symbol 3) is selected in a winning normal symbol lottery, second start hole 21 is opened, and a special symbol 2 reservation is generated when the ball enters second start hole 21. Therefore, when "Long Open 2" is selected in a winning normal symbol lottery, it is guaranteed that a predetermined amount of balls will be paid out through play in the event of a subsequent win. For this reason, the text image displayed in Figure 56 (C) that reads "Expected probability of winning special symbol 2: 50%" can be said to suggest the likelihood of receiving a predetermined amount of balls.

Figure 56(I) is executed after Figure 56(C) and instead of Figure 56(D). Specifically, it shows the state in which the normal symbol display 42 displays the normal symbol as "Normal symbol - winning symbol 2." In conjunction with this, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y displayed in the rectangular image are displayed as "22," and a result notification image for "Winning with special symbol 1" is displayed. This result notification image notifies the player that the winning type for winning special symbol 1 has been selected, i.e., that "Long Open 1" has been selected, despite the image showing the probability of winning special symbol 2 being "50%" displayed in Figure 56(C).

Figure 56 (J) shows that after Figure 56 (I), a win occurs on "Long Open 1," causing the electric chute 29 to open, and the game ball that entered the electric chute winning hole 34 enters the first winning hole 75. The ball entering the second winning hole 76 opens the first starting hole 30, and the ball entering the first starting hole 30 creates a first special symbol hold (special symbol 1 hold). As a result, a new hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Figure 56(K) is executed after Figure 56(C) and instead of Figure 56(D). Specifically, it shows a state in which the normal symbol display 42 stops and displays a losing symbol as the normal symbol. In conjunction with this, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8X and 8Y displayed in the rectangular image stop and display as "34," and a "loser" result notification image is displayed. This result notification image notifies the user that a loss has occurred, despite the "Expected probability of winning special symbol 2: 50%" expectation suggestion image being displayed in Figure 56(C). Figure 56(L) shows a state in which, after Figure 56(K), neither special symbol 1 nor special symbol 2 is reserved, and the result notification image has disappeared.

[Win type expectation suggestion effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating the winning type expectation suggestion effect B. The winning type expectation suggestion effect is an effect that executes a suggestion effect that suggests the expectation of winning a specific winning symbol among multiple types of winning symbols on the special or normal symbols while the special or normal symbols are fluctuating. Here, a "normal symbol" is set as the "symbol," and the "expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol" is set as the "expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol in the normal symbol lottery." Below, in the normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state that is executed after winning the special symbol 1 lottery, there are two normal symbol winning types: "Long Open 1" and "Long Open 2" (FIG. 13(B): Special Symbol 1 Time-Saving State), and an example of an effect that displays the expectation of winning one of the winning types is shown.

In the winning type expectation suggestion effect B, similar to the winning type expectation suggestion effect A (FIG. 56),
This explanation assumes that a special symbol change (special symbol 1 change or special symbol 2 change) is being performed in the time-saving state after a jackpot game of the special symbol 1 jackpot type "5R 100-time time-saving jackpot" (Figure 10). The player hits the right button, and by passing through gate 28, the normal symbol display 42 (Figure 3) displays a normal symbol change. After a predetermined change time has elapsed, the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a confirmation, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are two types of winning normal symbol stop symbols corresponding to "Long Open 1" and "Long Open 2." Specifically, these are "Normal Symbol _ Winning Symbol 2" and "Normal Symbol _ Winning Symbol 3" in the "Special Symbol 1 Time-saving State" of Figure 13 (B). When a winning combination of "Long Opening 1" (regular winning symbol 2) is selected and the electric chute 29 opens, the game ball that entered the electric chute winning hole 34 enters the first winning hole 75, opening the first starting hole 30, and the ball entering the first starting hole 30 creates a first special symbol hold (special symbol 1 hold). When a winning combination of "Long Opening 2" (regular winning symbol 3) is selected and the electric chute 29 opens, the game ball that entered the electric chute winning hole 34 enters the second winning hole 76, opening the second starting hole 21, and the ball entering the second starting hole 21 creates a second special symbol hold (special symbol 2 hold). The probability that "Long Opening 1" (regular winning symbol 2) is selected is approximately 277/278, and the probability that "Long Opening 2" (regular winning symbol 3) is selected is approximately 1/279 (FIGS. 13(B) and 14). In the gaming machine 1, the consumption of the first reserved special symbol is executed in priority over the consumption of the second reserved special symbol (FIG. 21).

As shown in Figure 57 (A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner on the display screen 7a while special pattern 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only a display in which decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be seen moving at high speed, but also displays in which they are not visible due to their high speed movement. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. The changing display of the set of patterns indicates the variable display of the special pattern (here, special pattern 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of patterns notifies the result of the special pattern drawing (here, special pattern 1 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays two hold icons 9A representing the special symbol 1 hold, and a variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special symbol 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a remaining time reduction display, which indicates the number of remaining time reductions, displayed as "50 time reductions remaining," and a variable special symbol display, which indicates the type of special symbol currently being varied, displayed as "Special symbol 1 variation." In Figure 57 (A), at this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and the variable display of the normal symbol begins on normal symbol display 42.

In Figure 57 (B), when decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "789" while the normal symbol display 42 is displaying a fluctuating normal symbol, the color of the displayed left decorative symbol 8L is different from normal. This indicates that the expected probability of winning a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently fluctuating normal symbol lottery is a predetermined value. In other words, the color-changed left decorative symbol 8L is an expectation probability suggestion image. Here, it indicates that the expected probability of winning a winning type that obtains the special symbol 2 reserve, i.e., the probability that "Long Open 2" (normal symbol - winning symbol 3) will be selected, is 50%. In other words, when this expectation probability suggestion image is displayed, there is a 50% chance that "Long Open 2" (normal symbol - winning symbol 3) will be selected, and a 50% chance that another stopped symbol (a losing symbol or "Long Open 1" (normal symbol - winning symbol 2)) will be selected. Figure 57(E) shows the case where "Long Open 1" is selected, and Figure 57(F) shows the case where a losing symbol is selected. The expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific win type is relatively high, and also suggests that the expectation of winning other win types is relatively low.

In FIG. 57(C), after FIG. 57(B), the normal symbol display 42 shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as "normal symbol_winning symbol 3".
Then, a result notification image of "Good job!" will be displayed. This result notification image notifies the user that they have won the winning type to acquire the special chart 2 reservation, that is, that "Long Open 2" has been selected.

Figure 57 (D) shows that after Figure 57 (C), a win occurs in "Long Open 2," causing the electric chute 29 to open, and the game ball that entered the electric chute winning hole 34 enters the second winning hole 76. The ball entering the second winning hole 76 opens the second starting hole 21, and the ball entering the second starting hole 21 creates a second special symbol hold (special symbol 2 hold). This causes a new hold icon 9B to be displayed on the display screen 7a. Afterwards, a presentation similar to Figures 56 (F) to (H) of the win type expectation indication presentation A is executed.

Figure 57(E) is executed after Figure 57(B) and instead of Figure 57(C). Specifically, it shows the state in which the normal symbol display 42 stops and displays the normal symbol as "Normal symbol - Winning symbol 2." In conjunction with this, a result notification image of "Not bad" is displayed. This result notification image notifies the player that the winning type that acquires the reserved special symbol 1 has been selected, despite the display of the expectation suggestion image of the left decorative symbol 8L, which has changed color, in Figure 57(B). After that, an effect similar to that of Figure 56(J) for the winning type expectation suggestion effect A is executed.

Figure 57 (F) is executed after Figure 57 (B) and instead of Figure 57 (C). Specifically, it shows a state in which the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol on the normal symbol display 42. In conjunction with this, a "Sorry" result notification image is displayed. This result notification image notifies the player that a loss has occurred, despite the color-changed expectation suggestion image for the left decorative symbol 8L being displayed in Figure 57 (B). After that, an effect similar to Figure 57 (L) of the win type expectation suggestion effect A is executed.

Figure 57 (G) is executed in place of Figure 57 (B). Specifically, while the normal symbol display 42 is displaying a changing normal symbol, an expectation suggestion image of "Something Good Might Happen" is displayed. Similar to Figure 57 (B), this expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing normal symbol lottery is a predetermined value. Here, it suggests that the expectation of winning a winning type that obtains a special symbol 2 reservation, i.e., the possibility that "Long Open 2" (normal symbol - winning symbol 3) will be selected, is 50%. In this way, the expectation suggestion image is not limited to a change in the color of the decorative symbol, but may also be a predetermined text image.

Figure 57(H), like Figure 57(G), is executed in place of Figure 57(B). Specifically, while the normal symbol display 42 is displaying a changing normal symbol, an expectation suggestion image saying "Something good is sure to happen" is displayed. Like Figure 57(B), this expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing normal symbol lottery is a predetermined value. Here, it suggests that the expectation of winning a winning type that obtains a special symbol 2 reservation, i.e., the possibility that "Long Open 2" (normal symbol - winning symbol 3) will be selected, is 50%. In this way, the expectation suggestion image may be a text image with any content.

Figures 57(I) and (J), like Figures 57(G) and 57(H), are executed instead of Figure 57(B). Specifically, a button image BTN is displayed while the normal symbol display 42 is displaying a changing normal symbol. This button image BTN, like the color-changed left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 57(B), is an expectation suggestion image that indicates a predetermined value of the expected probability of winning a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing normal symbol lottery. Here, it is suggested that the expected probability of winning a winning type that acquires the special symbol 2 reservation, i.e., the probability that "Long Open 2" (normal symbol - winning symbol 3) will be selected, is 50%. In this way, the expectation suggestion image may be any image.

Figure 57(K), like Figures 57(G)-(J), is executed in place of Figure 57(B). Specifically, while the normal symbol display 42 is displaying a changing normal symbol, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each displayed as a frozen smiling character image. The frozen smiling character image, like the color-changed left decorative symbol 8L in Figure 57(B), is an expectation suggestion image that suggests that the expected probability of winning a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing normal symbol lottery is a predetermined value. Here, it is suggested that the expected probability of winning a winning type that obtains special symbol 2 reserve, i.e., the probability that "Long Open 2" (normal symbol - winning symbol 3) will be selected, is 50%. In this way, the expectation suggestion image may appear in various ways.

[Win type expectation suggestion effect C]
58 is a diagram for explaining the winning type expectation suggestion effect C. The winning type expectation suggestion effect is an effect that executes a suggestion effect that suggests the expectation of winning a specific winning symbol among multiple types of winning symbols of special symbols or normal symbols while the special symbols or normal symbols are fluctuating. Here, a "special symbol" is set as the "symbol," and the "expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol" is set as the "expectation of winning with a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the first or second special symbol lottery."

In Figures 58 (A)-(C), we will explain the situation assuming that special symbol 1 is changing in the normal state. The player hits the left side, and when the first starting slot 20 wins, the first special symbol display 41a (Figure 3) displays a changing special symbol. After a predetermined change time has elapsed, the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a confirmed symbol, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are three types of winning special symbol stop symbols corresponding to a "5R 150-time time-saving jackpot," a "5R 100-time time-saving jackpot," and a "3R normal small win (effectively unable to pass V)." Specifically, these are "Special symbol 1_time-saving symbol 1," "Special symbol 1_time-saving symbol 2," and "Special symbol 1_small win symbol without time-saving" in the "non-time-saving state" of Figure 10.

As shown in Figure 58 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing state on the display screen 7a while special symbol 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also those that are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The changing display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (here, special symbol 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol drawing (here, special symbol 1 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays two hold icons 9A representing the special chart 1 hold, and a variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a variable special chart display, labeled "Special Chart 1 Variable," which indicates the type of special chart that is currently variable.

In Figure 58 (B), an expectation suggestion image "5R Time-Shortening 100-Time Jackpot Expectation: 50%" appears on the display screen 7a, overlapping and displayed in front of the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. This expectation suggestion image indicates the expectation of winning a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing special symbol lottery. Here, the expectation of winning a 5R Time-Shortening 100-Time Jackpot, i.e., the probability that "Special Symbol 1 - Time-Shortening Symbol 2" will be selected, is indicated as 50%. In other words, when this expectation suggestion image is displayed, there is a 50% chance that "Special Symbol 1 - Time-Shortening Symbol 2" will be selected, and a 50% chance that other stop symbols (losing symbols, "Special Symbol 1 - Time-Shortening Symbol 1," and "Special Symbol 1 - Small Winning Symbol without Time-Shortening Symbol") will be selected. The expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of winning a specific type of win is relatively high, and also suggests that the expectation of winning other types of wins is relatively low.

After that, the display of the changing special symbol on the first special symbol display 41a (Figure 3) ends, and "Special Symbol 1 - Time-saving Symbol 2" is fixed and stopped as the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol). At the same time, as shown in Figure 58 (C), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "222" on the display screen 7a, indicating that the "5R Time-saving 100 Times Jackpot" has been selected, i.e., that "Special Symbol 1 - Time-saving Symbol 2" has been selected.

Figures 58(D)-(E) are executed after Figure 58(A) and instead of Figures 58(B)-(C). Specifically, an expectation suggestion image reading "5R Time-Shortening 150-Time Jackpot Expectation: 30%" appears on the display screen 7a, overlapping and displayed in front of the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. This expectation suggestion image indicates the expectation of winning with a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing special symbol lottery. Here, it indicates that the expectation of winning the 5R Time-Shortening 150-Time Jackpot, i.e., the probability that "Special Symbol 1 - Time-Shortening Symbol 1" will be selected, is 30%. In other words, when this expectation suggestion image is displayed, there is a 3/10 probability that "Special Symbol 1 - Time-Shortening Symbol 1" will be selected, and a 7/10 probability that other stop symbols (losing symbols, "Special Symbol 1 - Time-Shortening Symbol 2," or "Special Symbol 1 - Small Winning Symbol without Time-Shortening Symbol") will be selected. The probability suggestion image suggests that the probability of winning a particular prize type is relatively high, and also suggests that the probability of winning other prize types is relatively low.

After that, the display of the changing special symbol on the first special symbol display 41a (Figure 3) ends, and "Special Symbol 1 - Time-Saving Symbol 1" is fixed and stopped as the special symbol (special symbol stopping symbol). At the same time, as shown in Figure 58 (E), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as "777" on the display screen 7a, indicating that the "5R Time-Saving 150 Times Jackpot" has been selected, i.e., that "Special Symbol 1 - Time-Saving Symbol 1" has been selected.

Figure 58 (F) is executed after Figure 58 (A) and instead of Figure 58 (B). Specifically, an expectation suggestion image appears on the display screen 7a, displaying both "5R time-saving 150 times jackpot expectation: 15%" and "5R time-saving 100 times jackpot expectation: 30%", and is displayed in front of and overlapping the changing display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. This expectation suggestion image suggests the expectation of winning with a specific winning type (specific winning pattern) in the currently changing special pattern lottery. Here, it is suggested that the expectation of winning a 5R time-saving 150 times jackpot, i.e., the probability that "Special pattern 1_time-saving pattern 1" will be selected, is 15%, and the expectation of winning a 5R time-saving 100 times jackpot, i.e., the probability that "Special pattern 1_time-saving pattern 2" will be selected, is 30%. In other words, when this expectation suggestion image is displayed, In this case, there is a 15/100 chance that "Special Chart 1 - Time-saving Pattern 1" will be selected, a 30/100 chance that "Special Chart 1 - Time-saving Pattern 2" will be selected, and a 55/100 chance that another stop pattern (a losing pattern, "Special Chart 1 - Small Win Pattern without Time-saving") will be selected. In this way, the win type expectation suggestion effect may be configured to show the expectation of a specific win type, or it may be configured to show the expectation of each of multiple win types. The expectation suggestion image suggests that the expectation of a specific win type is relatively high, and also suggests that the expectation of other win types is relatively low.

In Figures 58 (G) to (H), it will be explained that the special symbol 2 variation is being executed in the time-saving state. By consuming the special symbol 2 reservation, the second special symbol display 41b (Figure 3) displays the variation of the special symbol, and when a predetermined variation time has elapsed, the special symbol (
The final display of the special symbol stopping pattern is performed, and the player is notified of the lottery result. Here, there are four types of winning special symbol stopping patterns corresponding to "5R time-saving single big win,""3R time-saving single big win,""3R time-saving single small win," and "3R normal small win." Specifically, in the "time-saving state" of Figure 11, they are "Special symbol 2_time-saving symbol 2,""Special symbol 2_time-saving symbol 3,""Special symbol 2_small win symbol 2 with time-saving," and "Special symbol 2_small win symbol 2 without time-saving."

As shown in Figure 58 (G), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing state on the display screen 7a while special symbol 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also those that are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The changing display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (here, special symbol 2 change), and the stationary display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol drawing (here, special symbol 2 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays a hold icon 9B representing the special chart 2 hold, and a change icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, the change icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 2 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a changing special chart display, labeled "Special Chart 2 Change," which indicates the type of special chart that is currently changing.

In Figure 58 (H), an expectation suggestion image of "3R Time-Shortening Single Small Win Probability: 90%" appears on the display screen 7a, overlapping and displayed in front of the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. This expectation suggestion image indicates the expectation of winning with a specific win type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing special symbol lottery. Here, it indicates that the expectation of winning a 3R Time-Shortening Single Small Win, i.e., the probability that "Special Symbol 2 - Time-Shortening Small Win Symbol 2" will be selected, is 90%. In other words, when this expectation suggestion image is displayed, there is a 9/10 probability that "Special Symbol 2 - Time-Shortening Small Win Symbol 2" will be selected, and a 1/10 probability that other stop symbols ("Special Symbol 2 - Time-Shortening Symbol 2," "Special Symbol 2 - Time-Shortening Symbol 3," or "Special Symbol 2 - No Time-Shortening Small Win Symbol 2") will be selected. No losing symbols are set for Special Symbol 2. The probability suggestion image suggests that the probability of winning a particular prize type is relatively high, and also suggests that the probability of winning other prize types is relatively low.

Figure 58(I) is executed after Figure 58(G) and instead of Figure 58(H). Specifically, an expectation suggestion image appears on the display screen 7a, displaying both "3R Time-Shortened One Big Win Expectation: 10%" and "3R Time-Shortened One Small Win Expectation: 40%." This image is displayed in front of and overlapping the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. This expectation suggestion image indicates the expectation of a specific win type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing special symbol lottery. Here, the expectation of a 3R Time-Shortened One Small Win, i.e., the probability of selecting "Special Symbol 2 - Time-Shortened Symbol 3" is indicated as 10%, and the probability of selecting "Special Symbol 2 - Time-Shortened Small Win Symbol 2" as 40% is indicated. Thus, the win type expectation suggestion effect may indicate the expectation of a specific type of win, or may be configured to indicate the expectation of each of multiple types of wins.

FIG. 58(J) is executed after FIG. 58(G) and instead of FIG. 58(H). Specifically, an expectation suggestion image appears on the display screen 7a, which lists "3R time-saving 1 big win expectation rate: 10%", "3R time-saving 1 small win expectation rate: 30%" and "3R normal small win expectation rate: 10%", and is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R, overlapping the display of these. This expectation suggestion image suggests the expectation rate of winning with a specific winning type (specific winning symbol) in the currently changing special symbol lottery. Here, the expectation rate of winning a 3R time-saving 1 small win, that is, the probability that "Special symbol 2_Time-saving symbol 3" will be selected is 10%, and "
It is suggested that there is a 30% chance that "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Pattern 2 with Time Reduction" will be selected, and a 10% chance that "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Pattern 2 without Time Reduction" will be selected. In this way, the winning type expectation suggestion effect may be configured to show the expectation of a specific winning type, or may be configured to show the expectation of each of multiple winning types.

Figure 58 (K) shows a state in which, after any of the effects in Figures 58 (H) to (K), a 3R time-saving single small win is won, and three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, each with a smiling character image, are displayed in a stopped state. With gaming machine 1, the special symbol 2 lottery never fails and always results in a win (big win or small win) (Figure 9 (A)). With gaming machine 1, the chance of a big win is approximately 1 in 312, and the chance of a small win is approximately 311 in 312. When a small win is won with special symbol 2, either a "3R time-saving single small win" or a "3R normal small win" is selected, regardless of whether the game is in time-saving or non-time-saving mode (non-time-saving mode in this case). There is approximately a 1/2 chance of a "3R time-saving single small win," and an approximately 1/2 chance of a "3R normal small win." Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are smiling character images, indicate a small win in the "3R time-saving single small win."

In Figure 58 (L), the jackpot game ends and an image of the number of balls won is displayed, saying "Jackpot game ended, 3,000 balls won." The number of balls won displayed in this text image may be the actual number of balls won, or it may not be the actual number of balls but the number of balls planned to be won depending on the type of win. The image of the number of balls won may also be displayed before the jackpot game begins. In this case, the image of the number of balls won may display the number of balls planned to be won depending on the type of win. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the special symbol 2 lottery never results in a loss and always results in a win (jackpot or small win) (Figure 9 (A)). Therefore, when a special symbol 2 hold occurs, it is guaranteed that a predetermined amount of balls will be won through a winning game. In other words, when the expectation suggestion images of Figures 58 (H) to (J) are displayed on the display screen 7a, it is suggested that a predetermined amount of balls will be won through a winning game. From this, it can be said that the expectation suggestion images displayed in Figures 58 (H) to (J) suggest the expectation of winning a predetermined amount of balls.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the effects that suggest the expected probability of winning.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 56(C), the display screen 7a can execute a suggestion effect that displays an expectation suggestion image that suggests the expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol among multiple types of winning symbols (normal symbols). With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player and increase their interest. The same is true for Figs. 57 and 58.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 56(C), the suggestive effect is executed while the symbols are changing on the normal symbol display 42. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can be visually entertaining to the player, and the interest can be enhanced. The same is true for Figs. 57 and 58.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 56 (C), when the suggestion effect suggests that the probability of winning with a specific winning symbol is relatively high, it also suggests that the probability of winning with a winning symbol other than the specific winning symbol is relatively low. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player and increase their interest. The same is true for Figures 57 and 58.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 56 (C), the normal symbol display 42 can display variations in normal symbols, and the suggestive effect suggests the likelihood of winning with a specific winning symbol among the normal symbols. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player and increase their interest. The same is true for Figure 57.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 56(B) and 56(C), the display screen 7a displays a variation display of decorative symbols 8X and 8Y corresponding to the variation of normal symbols while the suggestive effect is being executed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by an unprecedented and innovative effect, thereby increasing the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the suggestive effect suggests the expectation of obtaining a predetermined amount of balls, as shown in Figure 56. According to this configuration, the unprecedented and novel effect can provide visual enjoyment to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the winning type expectation indication effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the winning type expectation suggestion performance A, the normal symbol lottery almost always results in a winning combination, but there is a slight possibility of a losing combination. However, it may be configured so that the winning combination is guaranteed without a losing combination. Also, the winning combination in the normal symbol lottery may have the same number of balls or may have different numbers.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
a performance display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation,
the symbol display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of winning symbols,
The effect display means is capable of executing a suggestion effect that suggests an expectation of winning with the specific winning symbol among the plurality of winning symbols,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
The suggestion effect is executed during the pattern change by the pattern display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or A3-2,
In the suggestion effect, when it is suggested that the probability of winning with the specific winning symbol is relatively high, it is suggested that the probability of winning with a winning symbol other than the specific winning symbol is relatively low.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
The symbol display means is capable of displaying variations of normal symbols,
The suggestive effect suggests the expectation of winning with a specific winning symbol in a normal symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-4,
The effect display means executes a variation display effect of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the normal pattern while executing the suggestion effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
The suggestive effect suggests the expectation of obtaining a predetermined amount of balls.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The delayed icon display effects A to C are explained below using Figures 59 to 61. These delayed icon display effects can be executed during decorative pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the reserved ball count command, game state designation command, variation effect start command, etc. received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the delayed icon display effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Icon Delay Display Rendering A]
Figure 59 is a diagram for explaining the delayed icon display effect A. The delayed icon display effect is an effect in which, when a ball is scored into the starting hole, an icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the ball scoring. Here, the "icon" is set to "hold icon 9A" and the "first starting hole 20" is set to "starting hole."

In icon delay display effect A, we will explain it as if special symbol 1 is being changed under normal conditions. The player hits the left side, and when the first starting slot 20 is won, the first special symbol display 41a (Figure 3) displays a change in the special symbol. After a predetermined change time has passed, the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol) corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed and the player is notified of the lottery result.

As shown in Figure 59 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner on the display screen 7a while special symbol 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also those that are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The changing display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (here, special symbol 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of symbols announces the result of the special symbol drawing (here, special symbol 1 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays a hold icon 9A representing the special chart 1 hold, and a variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, the variable icon (the relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a game status display labeled "normal state," and a variable special chart display labeled "special chart 1 variable," which shows the type of special chart currently being changed.

In Figure 59 (A), at this time, a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and the number of first special symbol reservations (number of special symbol 1 reservations) changes from "1" to "2." In other words, a second special symbol 1 reservation (second reservation) has occurred. However, despite the occurrence of a second special symbol 1 reservation, only one reservation icon 9A continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Figure 59 (B) shows the state after the special chart 1 variation shown in Figure 59 (A) has finished. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed frozen. The variation icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C is consumed. Then, at the start of the next special chart 1 variation, the number of memories for the first special chart reservation (number of special chart 1 reservations) changes from "2" to "1," and on the display screen 7a, the reservation icon 9A shifts and becomes the variation icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C. The shifting of the reservation icon 9A causes the reservation icon 9A to disappear. In other words, even though there is one special chart 1 reservation, the reservation icon 9A is no longer displayed. Then, the special chart 1 variation is executed.

In Figure 59 (C), after Figure 59 (B), the display screen 7a displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changes corresponding to the special symbol 1 change. At this time, a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and the number of memories for the first special symbol hold (number of special symbol 1 holds) changes from "1" to "2." In other words, a second special symbol 1 hold has occurred. However, despite the fact that two special symbol 1 holds have occurred, the display screen 7a continues to display no hold icons 9A.

Figure 59 (D) is shown after Figure 59 (C), and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the Special Chart 1 change, two new hold icons 9A corresponding to the two Special Chart 1 holds are displayed simultaneously. Here, a "first delayed display effect" is executed in which the hold icon 9A is not displayed when a new Special Chart 1 hold occurs, and two hold icons 9A are displayed with a delay when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the Special Chart change when a second Special Chart 1 hold occurs. Note that in the "first delayed display effect," the timing at which the hold icon 9A is displayed may be other than the above. For example, the hold icon 9A may not be displayed when a new Special Chart 1 hold occurs, and two hold icons 9A may be displayed when a second Special Chart 1 hold occurs. Alternatively, the hold icon 9A may not be displayed when a new Special Chart 1 hold occurs, and two hold icons 9A may be displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the second Special Chart 1 hold occurred.

Figure 59 (E) shows the state after the special symbol 1 variation shown in Figure 59 (D) has ended. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed frozen. The variation icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C is consumed. Then, at the start of the next special symbol 1 variation, the number of memories in the first special symbol reservation (number of special symbol 1 reservations) changes from "2" to "1," and on the display screen 7a, the reservation icon 9A shifts and becomes the variation icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C. As the reservation icon 9A shifts, there is only one reservation icon 9A. At this time, a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and the number of memories in the first special symbol reservation (number of special symbol 1 reservations) changes from "1" to "2." In other words, a second special symbol 1 reservation has occurred. However, despite the fact that two special symbol 1 reservations have occurred, only one reservation icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, the special symbol 1 variation is executed.

In Figure 59 (F), after Figure 59 (E), the display screen 7a displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special symbol 1 change. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the special symbol 1 change, a new hold icon 9A corresponding to the second special symbol 1 hold that had not been displayed previously is displayed, as shown in Figure 59 (G), resulting in a total of two hold icons 9A being displayed. Here, when a new special symbol 1 hold occurs, the hold icon 9A is not displayed, and a "second delayed display effect" is executed in which the hold icon 9A is displayed with a delay after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the next special symbol change. Note that in the "second delayed display effect," the timing at which the hold icon 9A is displayed may be other than the above. For example, the corresponding hold icon 9A may be displayed with a delay after a predetermined period of time has passed since the creation of a new special symbol 1 hold. Alternatively, after a new special symbol 1 hold occurs, the hold icon 9A may be displayed with a delay during the change effect after a predetermined number of special symbol changes (one or more).

Figure 59 (H) shows the state after the special symbol 1 variation shown in Figure 59 (G) has ended. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed frozen. The variation icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C is consumed. Then, at the start of the next special symbol 1 variation, the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol (number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol) changes from "2" to "1," and on the display screen 7a, the reserved icon 9A shifts to become the variation icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C. The shifting of the reserved icon 9A reduces the number of reserved icons 9A to one. At this time, a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, changing the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol (number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol) from "1" to "2." In other words, a second special symbol 1 variation (second reserved symbol) has occurred. However, despite the occurrence of two reserved symbols, only one reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, the special symbol 1 variation is executed.

In Figure 59 (I), after Figure 59 (H), the display screen 7a displays the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special symbol 1 variation. At this time, a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, and the number of memories for the first special symbol reserve (number of special symbol 1 reserves) changes from "2" to "3." In other words, a third special symbol 1 reserve has been created. However, even though three special symbol 1 reserves have been created, only one reserve icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a. As shown in Figure 59 (J), after a predetermined period has passed since the start of the special symbol 1 variation, a new reserve icon 9A corresponding to the second of the two special symbol 1 reserves (second reserve and third reserve) that had not been displayed previously is displayed, as shown in Figure 59 (K), resulting in a total of two reserve icons 9A being displayed.

Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59 (L), a new hold icon 9A corresponding to the remaining Special Chart 1 hold (third hold) that had not been displayed is displayed, bringing the total to three hold icons 9A. Here, when a new Special Chart 1 hold occurs, the hold icon 9A is not displayed, and when a second Special Chart 1 hold occurs, the two hold icons 9A are displayed in sequence with a staggered timing during the special chart change, creating a "third delay display effect." Note that, in the "third delay display effect," the timing at which the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9A are displayed can be set arbitrarily. For example, in a change that causes a second Special Chart 1 hold to occur, the first hold icon 9A may be displayed at a first timing from the start of the change, and the second hold icon 9A may be displayed at a second timing. Alternatively, the first hold icon 9A may be displayed during the change that causes the second Special Chart 1 hold to occur, and the second hold icon 9A may be displayed during the next or subsequent change.

[Icon Delay Display Rendering B]
Figure 60 is a diagram for explaining the delayed icon display effect B. The delayed icon display effect is an effect in which, when a ball is scored into the starting hole, an icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the ball scoring. Here, the "icon" is set to "hold icon 9B" and the "starting hole" is set to "second starting hole 21."

In icon delay display effect B, we will explain that a special chart change (special chart 1 change or special chart 2 change) is being executed in the time-saving state after a jackpot play of the special chart 1 jackpot type "5R time-saving 100-time jackpot" (Figure 10). The player hits the right side, and by passing through gate 28, electric chute 29 opens, and the game ball that entered electric chute winning hole 34 enters either first winning hole 75 or second winning hole 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special chart 1 time-saving state"). The game ball entering first winning hole 75 or second winning hole 76 opens either first starting hole 30 or second starting hole 21, and the game ball entering the opened starting hole 30, 21 generates a first special chart hold (special chart 1 hold) or second special chart hold (special chart 2 hold). Depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through the gate 28, the probability of the first start gate 30 opening is approximately 277/278, and the probability of the second start gate 21 opening is approximately 1/279 (Figures 13(B) and 14). In the gaming machine 1, the consumption of the reserved first special symbol takes priority over the consumption of the reserved second special symbol (Figure 21).

As shown in Figure 60 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a during the special symbol 1 change. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also a display in which they are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including a left decorative symbol 8L, a center decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R. The variable display of the set of symbols represents the variable display of the special symbol (here, the special symbol 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery (here, the special symbol 1 lottery result).

Display screen 7a displays two hold icons 9A representing the special chart 1 hold, and a variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a remaining time reduction display, indicated as "2 time reductions remaining," showing the number of remaining time reductions, and a variable special chart display, indicated as "Special chart 1 variable," showing the type of special chart currently being variable. In Figure 60 (A), at this time, the gaming ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the gaming ball enters second winning hole 76, and second starting hole 21 is opened.

As shown in Figure 60 (B), a game ball enters the opened second starting hole 21, and the number of stored second special symbol reserves (number of special symbol 2 reserves) changes from "0" to "1." In other words, the first special symbol 2 reserve (first reserve) has occurred. However, even though the first special symbol 2 reserve has occurred, the reserve icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

In Figure 60(C), after Figure 60(B), during the same fluctuation, the gaming ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the gaming ball enters first winning hole 75, and first starting hole 30 is opened. As shown in Figure 60(D), the gaming ball enters the opened first starting hole 30, creating a third special chart 1 hold (third hold), and a third hold icon 9A is newly displayed. In other words, for special chart 2 hold, hold icon 9B is not displayed after the hold is created, while for special chart 1 hold, hold icon 9A is displayed immediately after winning.

In Figure 60(E), after Figure 60(D), during the same fluctuation, the gaming ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the gaming ball enters second winning slot 76, opening second starting slot 21. As shown in Figure 60(F), the gaming ball enters the opened second starting slot 21, and the number of memories for the second special symbol hold (number of special symbol 2 holds) changes from "1" to "2." In other words, a second special symbol 2 hold (second hold) has been created. However, even though two special symbol 2 holds have been created, hold icon 9B is not displayed on display screen 7a. In other words, for special symbol 1 holds, hold icon 9A is displayed immediately after winning, while for special symbol 2 holds, hold icon 9B is not displayed even when they are created.

In Figure 60 (G), after Figure 60 (F), during the same fluctuation, the gaming ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the gaming ball enters first winning hole 75, and first starting hole 30 is opened. As shown in Figure 60 (H), the gaming ball enters the opened first starting hole 30, creating a fourth special chart 1 hold (fourth hold), and a fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed. In other words, for special chart 2 hold, hold icon 9B is not displayed after the hold is created, while for special chart 1 hold, hold icon 9A is displayed immediately after winning.

Figure 60 (I) shows the state when the special chart 1 variation shown in Figures 60 (A) to (H) has finished. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped. The variation icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is consumed. Then, on the display screen 7a, the pending icon 9A shifts and becomes the variation icon (relevant pending icon) 9C. As a result of the shifting of the pending icon 9A, one pending icon 9A is removed, making three. Then, the special chart 1 variation is executed.

As shown in FIG. 60(J), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a while the special chart 1 is being changed. On the display screen 7a, three reserved icons 9A representing the reserved special chart 1 and a variable icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon (relevant reserved icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special chart 1 lottery. In addition, on the display screen 7a,
The remaining number of times for time reduction, indicated as "1 time reduction remaining," which shows the number of times for time reduction remaining, the currently changing special chart, indicated as "Special chart 1 change," which shows the type of special chart currently changing, and the final time reduction state change, indicated as "Last one," which shows that this is the last change in the time reduction state are displayed. Here, the final change in the time reduction state is shown.

Figure 60 (K) shows the state after Figure 60 (J), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the special chart 1 variation. On the display screen 7a, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special chart 1 variation continues. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the special chart 1 variation, a new reserve icon 9B corresponding to the first reserve of the two special chart 2 reserves (first reserve, second reserve) that were not displayed previously is displayed.

Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 60 (L), a new hold icon 9B corresponding to the remaining special chart 2 hold (second hold) that was not displayed is displayed, resulting in a total of two hold icons 9B being displayed. Here, a delayed display effect is implemented in which hold icons 9B are not displayed for special chart 2 holds that occurred between the start of the time-saving feature and before the predetermined period has passed since the start of the final time-saving feature, and are instead displayed together after the predetermined period has passed since the start of the final time-saving feature. Note that when hold icons 9B are displayed together after the predetermined period has passed since the start of the final time-saving feature, multiple hold icons 9B may be displayed simultaneously, or they may be displayed one after another in sequence. When displaying them one after another in sequence, the timing at which the first hold icon 9B and the second hold icon 9B are displayed can be set as desired.

[Icon Delay Display Rendering C]
Figure 61 is a diagram for explaining the delayed icon display effect C. The delayed icon display effect is an effect in which, when a ball is scored into the starting hole, an icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the ball scoring. Here, the "icon" is set to "hold icon 9B" and the "starting hole" is set to "second starting hole 21."

In icon delay display effect C, we will explain that a special chart change (special chart 1 change or special chart 2 change) is being executed in the time-saving state after a jackpot game of the special chart 1 jackpot type "5R time-saving 100-time jackpot" (Figure 10). The player hits the right side, and by passing through gate 28, electric chute 29 opens, and the game ball that entered electric chute winning hole 34 enters either first winning hole 75 or second winning hole 76 (see Figure 13 (B) "Special chart 1 time-saving state"). The game ball entering first winning hole 75 or second winning hole 76 opens either first starting hole 30 or second starting hole 21, and the game ball entering the opened starting hole 30, 21 generates a first special chart hold (special chart 1 hold) or second special chart hold (special chart 2 hold). Depending on the opening pattern of the electric chute 29 when passing through the gate 28, the probability of the first start gate 30 opening is approximately 277/278, and the probability of the second start gate 21 opening is approximately 1/279 (Figures 13(B) and 14). In the gaming machine 1, the consumption of the reserved first special symbol takes priority over the consumption of the reserved second special symbol (Figure 21).

As shown in Figure 61 (A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing state on the display screen 7a while special pattern 1 is changing. The changing display here includes not only a display in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are visible as they move at high speed, but also displays in which they are invisible due to their high speed movement. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. The changing display of the set of patterns represents the variable display of the special pattern (here, special pattern 1 change), and the stationary display of the set of patterns announces the result of the special pattern drawing (here, special pattern 1 drawing result).

Display screen 7a displays two hold icons 9A representing the Special 1 hold and a variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C. Here, variable icon (relevant hold icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running Special 1 lottery. Display screen 7a also displays a remaining time-saving display ("12 time-saving times remaining"), indicating the number of remaining times for the time-saving period, and a variable special symbol ("Variable Special Symbol 1"), indicating the type of currently variable special symbol. In Figure 61(A), the game ball passes through gate 28, and the opening pattern of electric chute 29 causes the game ball to enter second winning slot 76, opening second starting slot 21. The game ball enters the opened second starting slot 21, changing the number of second special symbol holds (number of special symbol 2 holds) from "0" to "1." In other words, the first Special 2 symbol hold (first hold) has occurred. However, even though the first special chart 2 reservation has occurred, the reservation icon 9B is not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Figure 61 (B) shows the state after multiple Special Chart 1 variations have been executed since Figure 61 (A). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the Special Chart 1 variations are displayed in a changing manner, and the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is activated is displayed as "5 times remaining." At this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and the opening pattern of electric chute 29 causes the game ball to enter second winning slot 76, opening second start slot 21. The game ball enters the opened second start slot 21, and the number of second special chart reserves (number of special chart 2 reserves) changes from "1" to "2." In other words, a second Special Chart 2 reserve (second reserve) has been created. However, despite the existence of two Special Chart 2 reserves, reserve icon 9B is not displayed on display screen 7a.

Figure 61 (C) shows the state after multiple Special Chart 1 variations have been executed since Figure 61 (B). The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the Special Chart 1 variations are displayed in a changing manner, and the remaining number of times for time reduction is displayed as "2 times remaining for time reduction." At this time, the game ball passes through gate 28, and the opening pattern of electric chute 29 causes the game ball to enter second winning slot 76, opening second start slot 21. As the game ball enters the opened second start slot 21, the number of second special chart reserves (number of special chart 2 reserves) changes from "2" to "3." In other words, a third Special Chart 2 reserve (third reserve) has been created. However, despite the fact that three Special Chart 2 reserves have been created, reserve icon 9B is not displayed on display screen 7a.

In Figure 61 (D), after Figure 61 (C), during the same fluctuation, the gaming ball passes through gate 28, and due to the opening pattern of electric chute 29, the gaming ball enters first winning slot 75, opening first starting slot 30. When the gaming ball enters the now-opened first starting slot 30, a third special chart 1 reserve (third reserve) is generated, and a third reserve icon 9A is newly displayed. The generation of special chart 1 reserve triggers the display of a new reserve icon 9B corresponding to the first reserve of the three special chart 2 reserves (first to third reserves) that were not previously displayed.

Figure 61(E) shows an effect in which the text image "Not Yet" is displayed during the same variation after Figure 61(D). This text image suggests that the number of displayed hold icons 9B will increase further. Then, as shown in Figure 61(F), two new hold icons 9B corresponding to the remaining two Special Chart 2 holds (Second Hold and Third Hold) that had not been displayed are displayed, resulting in a total of three hold icons 9B being displayed. Here, for the Special Chart 2 holds that occurred after the time-saving feature began, the hold icons 9B are not displayed immediately after the hold occurs. Instead, when the Special Chart 1 hold occurs, a delayed display effect is executed in which all hold icons 9B that had not been displayed up to that point are displayed together in conjunction with the display of the hold icon 9A. Note that when the hold icons 9B are displayed together, multiple hold icons 9B may be displayed simultaneously, or they may be displayed one after another in sequence. When displaying them one after another in sequence, the timing at which the first hold icon 9B and the second hold icon 9B are displayed can be set as desired.

FIG. 61(G) is executed after FIG. 61(C) and replaces FIG. 61(D)-(F). FIG. 61(G) shows the next special symbol 1 change from FIG. 61(C), with decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changing and displayed. A change icon (relevant pending icon) 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the change icon (relevant pending icon) 9C corresponds to the currently running special symbol 1 drawing. The display screen 7a also displays a remaining time-saving count indicator, indicated as "1 time-saving time remaining," which shows the number of times remaining for the time-saving time; a currently changing special symbol indicator, indicated as "Special symbol 1 change," which shows the type of special symbol currently changing; and a final time-saving state change indicator, indicated as "Last one time," which shows the final change in the time-saving state. Here, the final change in the time-saving state is shown.

Figure 61 (H) shows the state after Figure 61 (G), when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the special chart 1 variation. On the display screen 7a, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the special chart 1 variation continues. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the special chart 1 variation, a new reserve icon 9B corresponding to the first reserve of the three special chart 2 reserves (reserves 1 to 3) that had not been displayed previously is displayed.

Figure 61 (I) shows an effect in which the text image "Not Yet" is displayed during the same variation after Figure 61 (H). This text image suggests that the number of displayed hold icons 9B will increase further. Then, as shown in Figure 61 (J), two new hold icons 9B corresponding to the remaining two Special Chart 2 holds (Second Hold and Third Hold) that were not displayed are displayed, resulting in a total of three hold icons 9B being displayed. Here, a delayed display effect is executed in which hold icons 9B are not displayed for Special Chart 2 holds that occurred between the start of the time-saving feature and before the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the final time-saving feature, but are instead displayed together after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the final time-saving feature. Note that when hold icons 9B are displayed together after the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the final time-saving feature, multiple hold icons 9B may be displayed simultaneously, or they may be displayed one after another in sequence. When displaying them one after another in sequence, the timing at which the first hold icon 9B and the second hold icon 9B are displayed can be set as desired.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of delayed icon display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 59, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20, an effect can be produced in which the reserved icon 9A is displayed at a delayed timing after the ball enters. With this configuration, an unprecedented and innovative effect can be provided to the player, visually entertaining the player and increasing their interest. The same is true for Figures 60 and 61.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when multiple game balls enter the first starting hole 20, as shown in Figures 59(A) and (C), multiple reserved icons 9A are displayed together at a delayed time after the balls enter, as shown in Figure 59(D). This configuration allows for a novel and unprecedented presentation that visually entertains the player and increases their interest. The same applies to Figures 60 and 61.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in this effect, when multiple game balls enter the first starting hole 20, as shown in Figures 59(E), (H), and (I), one of the multiple reserved icons 9A is displayed at a delayed time after the balls enter, as shown in Figure 59(K), and then the remaining reserved icons 9A are displayed, as shown in Figure 59(L). This configuration allows for a novel effect that has never been seen before to visually entertain the player and increase their interest. The same applies to Figures 60 and 61.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, this effect is executed in the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 60(B)(F), and when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21 before the final fluctuation of the time-saving state,
As shown in (K) and (L), the reserved icon 9B is displayed during the final fluctuation of the time reduction. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has not been seen before, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figure 61.

[Modification]
The following shows a modified example of the delayed icon display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the icon delay display effects A to C, the reserved icon 9A or the reserved icon 9B is used as an example of the icon representing the game ball entering the starting hole. However, the icon representing the game ball entering the starting hole may be an icon other than the reserved icons 9A and 9B. In other words, any icon representing the game ball entering the starting hole may be used. For example, in the present application, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a win is always determined ( FIG. 9(A) ). Therefore, if an icon indicating a confirmed win is displayed when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, this icon also falls under the category of the icon representing the game ball entering the starting hole of the present application.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an icon representing that the game ball has entered the starting hole,
When the game ball enters the starting hole, an effect can be executed in which the icon is displayed at a timing delayed from the ball entering the starting hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
In the effect, when a plurality of game balls enter the starting hole, the plurality of icons are displayed together at a timing delayed from the balls entering the starting hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
In the performance, when a plurality of game balls enter the starting hole, one of the plurality of icons is displayed at a timing delayed from the balls entering the starting hole, and then the remaining reserved icons are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
The effect is executed during a time-saving state, and when a game ball enters the starting hole before the final variation of the time-saving state, the icon is displayed during the final variation of the time-saving state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The time-saving count notification effects A to C are explained below using Figures 62 to 64. These time-saving count notification effects can be executed during a jackpot game during time-saving mode. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the jackpot game-related commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the time-saving count notification effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Time-saving notification effect A]
Figure 62 is a diagram to explain the time-saving count notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the chance time entry effect is started. This chance time entry effect is executed in the ending effect during a jackpot game. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 and executes the chance time entry effect. Here, a message image MSG saying "Chance Time Entry" is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, the number of chance times (number of continuations) is either 100 or 150. During the chance time, unless a jackpot occurs, the variable effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the chance time.

When a predetermined condition is met during the repeated variable effects, a reach formation effect is executed, as shown in Figure 62 (B). A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at the "5" symbol. At this time, the center effect symbol 8C continues to change.

When a jackpot is reached, the display symbols will stop in a jackpot pattern, as shown in Figure 62 (C). Here, the left, center, and right display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop as "5" symbols. An example of a jackpot pattern is when the display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop as a double number. However, a jackpot may also be signaled using special symbols other than numeric symbols. For example, the left and right display symbols 8L and 8R will become "5" symbols, and the center display symbol 8C will become a special symbol. Another example is when the left, center, and right display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will all become special symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a jackpot has occurred. The jackpot notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "Jackpot" is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, this jackpot notification effect can also be omitted. Following the stopping of the effect symbols in the jackpot mode shown in Figure 62 (C), the effect shown in Figure 62 (E) can also be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (E), the chance time addition effect is executed. The chance time addition effect is an effect that suggests that the number of chance times (number of continuations) will be added, and an image that suggests the number of chance times will be added is displayed. The chance time addition effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, an image of the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "Chance time added" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 62 (F) to (J), a charge effect is executed. The charge effect is an effect that displays a meter image MTG and a numerical image SCG to notify the number of chance times (number of continuations). The charge effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot round command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a horizontally long meter image MSG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a numerical image SCG is displayed above the meter image MSG. In this embodiment, the number of game balls acquired is not notified. By not notifying the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to focus the player's attention on the charge effect.

In FIG. 62(F), the numerical image SCG is "0". Also, the meter image MTG is blank to match the numerical image SCG. In this embodiment, the numerical image SCG and the meter image MTG are "0" at the start of the charge effect, but this is not limited to this. For example, at the start of the charge effect, the numerical image SCG and the meter image MTG
may be the number of remaining chance times at the time of the big win.

In Figure 62 (G), the numerical image SCG is "10." The meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. The increase in the meter image MTG is indicated by hatching (the same applies below). Note that the numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG do not have to be perfectly synchronized (matched). For example, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may change continuously, and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may change in stages. The reverse may also be possible. The same applies below.

In Fig. 62(H), the numeric image SCG is "26." The hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numeric image SCG.
In Fig. 62(I), the numeric image SCG is "55." The hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numeric image SCG.
In Figure 62(J), the numeric image SCG is "100." Also, the meter image MTG is entirely hatched.

The charge effect is executed during a round of play during a jackpot game. Therefore, the value of the numerical image SCG may be increased in accordance with the entry of a prize into the large prize slot 30. Furthermore, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased in accordance with the entry of a prize into the large prize slot 30. In a multi-round game, the increase rate of the numerical value of the numerical image SCG or the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased as the round game progresses. For example, in a 3R round game, the increase rate is "2" in the first round, "3" in the second round, and "5" in the third round. With this configuration, the increase rate is small in the early stages and increases towards the end, contributing to increased interest.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (K), a result effect is executed. The result effect is an effect that notifies the number of chance times (number of continuations). This result effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "MAX 100 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In addition, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (L), a continuation notification effect is executed. The continuation notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that chance time will continue. The continuation notification effect is executed by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "Chance time continues" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Time-saving notification effect B]
63 is a diagram for explaining the time-saving count notification effect B. The time-saving count notification effect B is another example of the time-saving count notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the chance time entry effect is started. This chance time entry effect is executed in the ending effect during a jackpot game. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90 and executes the chance time entry effect. Here, a message image MSG saying "Chance Time Entry" is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, the number of chance times (number of continuations) is either 100 or 150. During chance time, unless a jackpot occurs, the variable effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to chance time.

When a predetermined condition is met during the repeated variable effects, a reach formation effect is executed, as shown in Figure 63 (B). A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at the "5" symbol. At this time, the center effect symbol 8C continues to vary.

When a jackpot is reached, the display symbols will stop in a jackpot pattern, as shown in Figure 63 (C). Here, the left, center, and right display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop as "5" symbols. An example of a jackpot pattern is when the display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop as a double number. However, a jackpot may also be signaled using special symbols other than numeric symbols. For example, the left and right display symbols 8L and 8R will become "5" symbols, and the center display symbol 8C will become a special symbol. Another example is when the left, center, and right display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will all become special symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a jackpot has occurred. The jackpot notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "Jackpot" is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, this jackpot notification effect can also be omitted. Following the stopping of the effect symbols in the jackpot mode shown in Figure 63 (C), the effect shown in Figure 63 (E) can also be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (E), the chance time addition effect is executed. The chance time addition effect is an effect that suggests that the number of chance times (number of continuations) will be added, and an image that suggests the number of chance times will be added is displayed. The chance time addition effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, an image of the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "Chance time added" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 63 (F) to (J), a charge effect is executed. The charge effect is an effect that displays a meter image MTG and a numerical image SCG to notify the number of chance times (number of continuations). The charge effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot round command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a horizontally long meter image MSG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a numerical image SCG is displayed above the meter image MSG. In this embodiment, the number of game balls acquired is not notified. By not notifying the number of game balls in this way, it is possible to focus the player's attention on the charge effect.

In Figure 63 (F), the numerical image SCG is "0." The meter image MTG is also blank to match the numerical image SCG. In this embodiment, the numerical image SCG and meter image MTG are "0" at the start of the charge effect, but this is not limited to this. For example, at the start of the charge effect, the numerical image SCG and meter image MTG may be set to the number of remaining chance times at the time of the jackpot.

In Figure 63 (G), the numerical image SCG is "10." The meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numerical image SCG. The increase in the meter image MTG is indicated by hatching (the same applies below). Note that the numerical value of the numerical image SCG and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG do not have to be perfectly synchronized (matched). For example, the numerical value of the numerical image SCG may change continuously, and the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may change in stages. The reverse may also be possible. The same applies below.

In Fig. 63(H), the numerical value image SCG is "26." The hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numerical value image SCG. Furthermore, in this example, the meter image MTG is enlarged compared to the meter images MTG in Figs. 63(F) and (G).
In Fig. 63(I), the numerical value image SCG is "55." The hatched portion of the meter image MTG also increases in accordance with the numerical value of the numerical value image SCG. Furthermore, in this example, the meter image MTG is enlarged compared to the meter image MTG in Fig. 63(H).
In Fig. 63(J), the numeric image SCG is "100." The meter image MTG is also entirely hatched. The meter image MTG remains enlarged and has the same size as in Fig. 63(I).

The charge effect is executed during a round of play during a jackpot game. Therefore, the value of the numerical image SCG may be increased in accordance with the winning of a prize in the large prize slots 30, 35. Also, the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased in accordance with the winning of a prize in the large prize slots 30, 35. In a multi-round game, the increase rate of the numerical value of the numerical image SCG or the hatched portion of the meter image MTG may be increased as the round game progresses. For example, in a 3R round game, the increase rate may be "2" in the first round, "3" in the second round, and "5" in the third round. With this configuration, the increase rate is small in the early stages and increases towards the end, contributing to increased interest.

In this embodiment, the meter image MTG is enlarged and displayed during the charge effect. This enlargement of the meter image MTG is achieved by gradually increasing the size of the meter image MTG. At this time, the meter image MTG may be enlarged as the round of play progresses. For example, in a 3-round play, the meter image MTG displayed in the first round is enlarged twice, in the second and third rounds. On the other hand, the enlargement of the meter image MTG may be achieved by continuously increasing the size of the meter image MTG. With this configuration, the meter image MTG is small in the early stages and becomes larger towards the end, which contributes to increased interest. Furthermore, the numerical values of the numerical image SCG may be enlarged separately from the meter image MTG.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (K), a result effect is executed. The result effect is an effect that notifies the number of chance times (number of continuations). This result effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "MAX 100 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In addition, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (L), a continuation notification effect is executed. The continuation notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that chance time will continue. The continuation notification effect is executed by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "Chance time continues" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Time-saving notification effect C]
64 is a diagram for explaining the time-shortening count notification effect C. The time-shortening count notification effect C is an example when the number of chance times (number of continuations) reaches 150.
First, as shown in Figure 64 (A), the chance time entry effect is started. This chance time entry effect is executed in the ending effect during a jackpot game. The chance time entry effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "Chance time entry" is displayed on the display screen 7a. During the chance time, the variable effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the chance time unless a jackpot is achieved.

When a predetermined condition is met during the repeated variable effects, a reach formation effect is executed, as shown in Figure 64 (B). A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at the "5" symbol. At this time, the center effect symbol 8C continues to change.

When a jackpot is reached, the display symbols will stop in a jackpot pattern, as shown in Figure 64 (C). Here, the left, center, and right display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all stop as "5" symbols. An example of a jackpot pattern is when the display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop as a double number. However, a jackpot may also be signaled using special symbols other than numeric symbols. For example, the left and right display symbols 8L and 8R will become "5" symbols, and the center display symbol 8C will become a special symbol. Another example is when the left, center, and right display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will all become special symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a jackpot has occurred. The jackpot notification effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "Jackpot" is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, this jackpot notification effect can also be omitted. Following the stopping of the effect symbols in the jackpot mode shown in Figure 64 (C), the effect shown in Figure 64 (E) can also be executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (E), the chance time addition effect is executed. The chance time addition effect is an effect that suggests that the number of chance times (number of continuations) will be added, and an image that suggests the number of chance times will be added is displayed. The chance time addition effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot opening command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, an image of the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a message image MSG saying "Chance time added" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (F), a charge effect is executed. The charge effect is an effect that displays a meter image MTG and a numerical image SCG to notify the number of chance times (number of continuations). The charge effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot round command or ending command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a horizontally long meter image MSG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a numerical image SCG is displayed above the meter image MSG. The numerical image SCG is set to "100". The meter image MTG is also entirely hatched. A message image MSG reading "Hit right" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, the number of game balls acquired is not notified. By not notifying the number of game balls in this way, the player can focus their attention on the charge effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (G), a meter image enlargement effect is executed. The meter image enlargement effect is an effect in which the meter image MTG displayed in Figure 64 (F) is enlarged and displayed. The meter image enlargement effect is executed by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the big win ending command received from the sub-control board 90. Here, the meter image MTG is enlarged and displayed so that both ends thereof extend beyond the display screen 7a. Note that the numerical image SCG is displayed without being enlarged. Of course, the numerical image SCG may also be enlarged and displayed in the same manner as the meter image MTG.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (H), a result effect is executed. The result effect is an effect that notifies the number of chance times (number of continuations). This result effect is executed by analyzing the jackpot ending command received by the image control microcomputer 101 from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "MAX 100 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Also, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a meter image MTG and a numerical image SCG are displayed above the message image MSG. Here, an image shrinking movement effect is executed in which the meter image MTG, which was enlarged in Figure 64 (G), shrinks and moves to the top right corner of the display screen 7a. Due to this image shrinking movement effect, the numerical image SCG also moves along with the meter image MTG.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (I), a continuation notification effect is executed. The continuation notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that chance time will continue. The continuation notification effect is executed by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the jackpot ending command received from the sub-control board 90. Here, a message image MSG saying "Chance time continues" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (J), a variable effect is executed. The variable effect is an effect in which the effect symbols stop changing. During the chance time, the variable effect is repeated the number of times during the chance time unless a jackpot is achieved. Here, it is assumed that 100 variable effects have been executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (K), an end notification effect is executed. The end notification effect is an effect that notifies that chance time has ended. The end notification effect is executed as an effect for the 100th change in chance time. Here, a message image MSG saying "Chance time ends" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that if the number of chance times (number of continuations) is 100, chance time ends here. On the other hand, if the number of chance times (number of continuations) is 150, an additional effect in Figure 64 (L) is executed.

In Figure 64 (L), an additional effect is executed. The additional effect is an effect that notifies the addition of the number of chance times (number of continuations). The additional effect is executed as the effect of the final change in chance time. Here, a message image MSG saying "Chance time +50" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In other words, if the number of chance times (number of continuations) is 150, an additional 50 times will be announced in the effect of the 100th change in chance time.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the time-saving notification display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a notification effect during a jackpot game that notifies the player of the number of chance times that will occur after the jackpot game (FIGS. 62(F)-(K), 63(F)-(K), 64(F)-(H)). With this configuration, the number of chance times that will occur after the jackpot game is notified during the jackpot game, so the player becomes aware of the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in a jackpot game during a chance time, an announcement effect is executed to announce the number of chance times after the jackpot game (FIGS. 62(A)-(K), 63(A)-(K), 64(A)-(K)). This configuration makes the player more aware of the continuation of an advantageous gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a chance time addition effect is executed in which an image suggesting an addition of the number of chance times is displayed (FIGS. 62(E), 63(E), and 64(E)). This configuration makes the player more conscious of the continuation of an advantageous gaming state, and can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of chance times is counted up and displayed as a numerical image SCG (FIGS. 62(F)-(J), 63(F)-(J)). This configuration makes the player more aware of the continuation of an advantageous gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the increase in the number of chance times is displayed using the meter image MTG (FIGS. 62(F)-(J), 63(F)-(J), 64(F)-(H)). This configuration makes the player more aware of the continuation of an advantageous gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an image is displayed suggesting that the chance time will continue (FIG. 62(L), FIG. 63(L), FIG. 64(I)). This configuration makes the player more aware of the continuation of the advantageous gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of game balls acquired in a jackpot game is not displayed (FIGS. 62(F)-(J), 63(F)-(J), 64(F)). This configuration makes the player more aware of the continuation of an advantageous game state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that the chance time addition effects (Fig. 62 (E), Fig. 63 (E), Fig. 64 (E)), charge effects (Fig. 62 (F)-(J), Fig. 63 (F)-(J), Fig. 64 (F)), meter image enlargement effects (Fig. 64 (G)), result effects (Fig. 62 (K), Fig. 63 (K), Fig. 64 (H)), and continuation notification effects (Fig. 62 (L), Fig. 63 (L), Fig. 64 (I)) correspond to "notification effects." Also, chance time (time-shortened state) corresponds to the "advantageous game state," jackpot play corresponds to "special play," and the number of chance times corresponds to the "number of continuations."

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the time-saving number notification display is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the number of chance times (continuation number) was reported. That is, the number of times the time-saving game state (low probability high base state) continued was reported. In contrast, the number of times the probability variable game state (high probability high base state) continued may be reported.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the notification effect is performed in the jackpot game during the chance time.
In a jackpot game (low probability low base state), an announcement effect may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the meter image enlargement effect and the image reduction movement effect are executed by enlarging the meter image MTG and then reducing and moving it (FIGS. 64(G)(H)). In contrast to this, it is also possible to perform an effect in which an informing image that notifies the number of chance times is enlarged, reduced, and moved, not limited to the meter image MTG.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine that executes a special game when a player wins a predetermined lottery, and transitions to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player as a result of the special game,
During the special game, a notification effect can be executed to notify the number of continuations, which is the number of fluctuations over which the advantageous game state continues.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1,
The notification effect is executed when the predetermined lottery is won in the advantageous game state and the special game is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-2,
In the notification performance, an image suggesting that the number of continuations of the advantageous game state will be increased is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the notification performance, a numerical value is counted up and displayed until the number of continuations is reached.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
In the notification performance, an increase in the numerical value until the number of continuations is reached is displayed using a meter image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-5,
In the notification performance, an image is displayed suggesting that the advantageous game state will continue.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
In the notification performance, the number of balls acquired in the special game is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-7,
The consecutive numbers include a first consecutive number and a second consecutive number greater than the first consecutive number,
In the notification performance, the performance is performed using the first continuation number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-9]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4,
The count-up display in the notification performance is performed in parallel with the game ball entering a specific ball entrance in the special game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-10]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-5,
The display of the meter image in the notification performance is performed in parallel with the entry of a game ball into a specific ball entry port in the special game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following explains irregular decorative symbol start/stop effects A-C using Figures 65-67. These irregular decorative symbol start/stop effects A-C are executed during special symbol variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an irregular decorative symbol start/stop effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect A. The decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect A is an effect that occurs during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect A, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a decorative symbol pre-start effect is first performed. In this decorative symbol pre-start effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed stopped at the position of the first line LN1. The first line LN1 is positioned slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In the figure, the left decorative symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the center decorative symbol 8C is a "3" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is a "4" symbol. In addition, the character CRA is performing a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (B), a decorative pattern change start effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change start effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1 begin to change. Specifically, of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L begins to change first, then the center decorative pattern 8C begins to change, and then the right decorative pattern 8R begins to change. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each move in the lower left direction of the display screen 7a (in the direction of the arrow in the figure). Note that the character CRA continues the specified effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (C), decorative pattern change presentation 1 is performed. In this decorative pattern change presentation 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change (move) from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2. The second line LN2 is located in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, slopes downward to the right, and is not parallel to the first line LN1. Note that the character CRA continues the specified presentation.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (D), decorative pattern change presentation 2 is performed. In this decorative pattern change presentation 2, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the second line LN2, the decorative patterns are gradually erased starting from the portion where they reached the second line LN2. Specifically, first, the decorative pattern 8L reaches the second line LN2, then the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the second line LN2. Note that the character CRA continues the specified presentation while changing location or stopping.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (E), decorative pattern change effect 3 is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect 3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were erased from the second line LN2 gradually appear from the third line LN3. Specifically, first, the decorative pattern 8L appears from the third line LN3, then the center decorative pattern 8C appears from the third line LN3, and then the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the third line LN3. The third line LN3 is located in the lower right position of the display screen 7a, slopes downward to the left, and is not parallel to the first line LN1 and the second line LN2. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that appear from the third line LN3 gradually appear from the third line LN3 toward the upper left of the display screen 7a, and then change (move) toward the upper left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L appearing from the third line LN3 is a "2" symbol, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a "4" symbol, and the right decorative pattern 8R is a "5" symbol. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are number symbols different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that reached the second line LN2 and were erased. However, this is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 may be the same number symbols as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that reached the second line LN2 and were erased. Furthermore, the character CRA continues the predetermined performance while changing location or stopping.

Next, as shown in Figure 65 (F), decorative pattern change presentation 4 is performed. In this decorative pattern change presentation 4, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 each move onto the first line LN1 and are displayed as stopped. Specifically, first, the left decorative pattern 8L appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is displayed as stopped, then the middle decorative pattern 8C appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is displayed as stopped, and then the right decorative pattern 8R appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is displayed as stopped.

[Decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect B. The decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect B is an effect that occurs during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect B, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a decorative symbol pre-start effect is first performed. In this decorative symbol pre-start effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed stopped at the position of the first line LN1. The first line LN1 is positioned slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In the figure, the left decorative symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the center decorative symbol 8C is a "3" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is a "4" symbol. In addition, the character CRA is performing a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (B), a decorative pattern change start effect is performed. In this decorative pattern change start effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1 begin to change. Specifically, of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L begins to change first, then the center decorative pattern 8C begins to change, and then the right decorative pattern 8R begins to change. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each move downward on the display screen 7a (in the direction of the arrows in the figure). Note that the character CRA continues the specified effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (C), decorative pattern change presentation 1 is performed. In this decorative pattern change presentation 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change (move) from the first line LN1 toward the second line LN2. The second line LN2 is positioned below the first line LN1 and is parallel to the first line LN1. Note that character CRA continues the specified presentation.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (D), decorative pattern change presentation 2 is performed. In this decorative pattern change presentation 2, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the second line LN2, the decorative patterns are gradually erased starting from the portion where they reached the second line LN2. Specifically, first, the decorative pattern 8L reaches the second line LN2, then the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the second line LN2. Note that the character CRA continues the specified presentation while changing location or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), decorative pattern variation effect 3 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation effect 3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were erased from the second line LN2 gradually appear from the third line LN3. Specifically, first, the decorative pattern 8L appears from the third line LN3, then the center decorative pattern 8C appears from the third line LN3, and then the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the third line LN3. The third line LN3 is positioned above the first line LN1 and is parallel to the first line LN1 and the second line LN2. In other words, the first line LN1 is positioned between the third line LN3 and the second line LN2. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that appear from the third line LN3 gradually appear downward from the third line LN3 on the display screen 7a and vary (move) downward on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L appearing from the third line LN3 is a "2" symbol, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a "4" symbol, and the right decorative pattern 8R is a "5" symbol. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are number symbols different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that reached the second line LN2 and were erased. However, this is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 may be the same number symbols as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that reached the second line LN2 and were erased. Furthermore, the character CRA continues the predetermined performance while changing location or stopping.

Next, as shown in Figure 66 (F), decorative pattern change presentation 4 is performed. In this decorative pattern change presentation 4, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 each move onto the first line LN1 and are displayed as stopped. Specifically, first, the left decorative pattern 8L appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is displayed as stopped, then the middle decorative pattern 8C appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is displayed as stopped, and then the right decorative pattern 8R appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is displayed as stopped.

[Decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect C. The decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect C is an effect that occurs during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effect C, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a decorative symbol pre-start effect is first performed. In this decorative symbol pre-start effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the center decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed stopped at the position of the first line LN1. The first line LN1 is positioned slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. In the figure, the left decorative symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the center decorative symbol 8C is a "3" symbol, and the right decorative symbol 8R is a "4" symbol. In addition, the character CRA is performing a predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), a decorative symbol change start effect is performed. In this decorative symbol change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed at the position of the first line LN1 start to change. Specifically, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, first, the left decorative symbol 8L starts to change, then the center decorative symbol 8C starts to change, and then the right decorative symbol 8R starts to change. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each move downward on the display screen 7a (in the direction of the arrow in the figure). Note that the character CRA continues the predetermined effect.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (C), decorative pattern change presentation 1 is performed. In this decorative pattern change presentation 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change (move) from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2. The second line LN2 is positioned below the first line LN1 and is parallel to the first line LN1. Note that character CRA continues the specified presentation.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (D), decorative pattern change presentation 2 is performed. In this decorative pattern change presentation 2, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the second line LN2, the decorative patterns are gradually erased starting from the portion where they reached the second line LN2. Specifically, first, the decorative pattern 8L reaches the second line LN2, then the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the second line LN2. Note that the character CRA continues the specified presentation while changing location or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), decorative pattern variation effect 3 is performed. In this decorative pattern variation effect 3, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were erased from the second line LN2 gradually appear from the third line LN3. Specifically, first, the decorative pattern 8L appears from the third line LN3, then the center decorative pattern 8C appears from the third line LN3, and then the right decorative pattern 8R appears from the third line LN3. The third line LN3 is positioned above the first line LN1 and is parallel to the first line LN1 and the second line LN2. In other words, the first line LN1 is positioned between the third line LN3 and the second line LN2. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that appear from the third line LN3 gradually appear downward from the third line LN3 on the display screen 7a and fluctuate (move) downward on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L appearing from the third line LN3 is a "2" symbol, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a "4" symbol, and the right decorative pattern 8R is a "5" symbol. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 are number symbols different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that reached the second line LN2 and were erased. However, this is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appearing from the third line LN3 may be the same number symbols as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that reached the second line LN2 and were erased. Furthermore, the character CRA continues the predetermined performance while changing location or stopping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), decorative pattern change presentation 4 is performed. In this decorative pattern change presentation 4, the left decorative pattern 8L that appeared from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is displayed stopped on the first line LN1, and a spiral image UZ is displayed to hide the lower portion of the stopped left decorative pattern 8L. The spiral image UZ is an image that rotates like a spiral. When the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the first line LN1 and the spiral image UZ is displayed, a bouncing sound is announced from the speaker. When the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the first line LN1, the spiral image UZ is displayed to hide the lower portion of the left decorative pattern 8L, and the bouncing sound is announced, so that the player feels as if the left decorative pattern 8L is bouncing off the first line LN1 when it reaches the first line LN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), decorative symbol variation effect 5 is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect 5, the center decorative symbol 8C appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is displayed stopped on the first line LN1, and a spiral image UZ is displayed to hide the lower portion of the center decorative symbol 8C. Furthermore, the right decorative symbol 8R appearing from the third line LN3 reaches the first line LN1 and is displayed stopped on the first line LN1, and a spiral image UZ is displayed to hide the lower portion of the right decorative symbol 8R. The spiral image UZ is an image that rotates like a spiral. When the center decorative symbol 8C reaches the first line LN1 and the spiral image UZ is displayed, a bouncing sound is announced from the speaker. When the center decorative symbol 8C reaches the first line LN1, the spiral image UZ is displayed to obscure the lower portion of the center decorative symbol 8C, and a bouncing sound is announced, giving the player the feeling that the center decorative symbol 8C is bouncing along the first line LN1 when it reaches the first line LN1. Also, when the right decorative symbol 8R reaches the first line LN1 and the spiral image UZ is displayed, a bouncing sound is announced from the speaker. When the right decorative symbol 8R reaches the first line LN1, the spiral image UZ is displayed to obscure the lower portion of the right decorative symbol 8R, and a bouncing sound is announced, giving the player the feeling that the right decorative symbol 8R is bouncing along the first line LN1 when it reaches the first line LN1. At this time, the spiral image UZ of the left decorative symbol 8L has disappeared.

Next, as shown in Figure 67 (H), decorative pattern change effect 6 is performed. In this decorative pattern change effect 6, the spiral image UZ of decorative patterns 8C and 8R disappears, and decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each move and are displayed stationary on the first line LN1.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern change effects 4 and 5 of the decorative pattern irregular start/stop effect C, the lower parts of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are hidden by the spiral image UZ, but it is sufficient that the area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R visible to the player changes, and an image of a character or the like can be substituted for the spiral image UZ, and the middle, upper, right, left, etc. of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be hidden instead of the lower parts.

In the irregular decorative symbol start/stop effect described above, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that appeared from the third line LN3 moved toward the first line LN1, but this is not limited to this. They may also move toward a fourth line LN4, which is different from the first line LN1 and the second line LN2, and be displayed stopped on the fourth line LN4.

In the above-described irregular decorative pattern start/stop effect, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, the left decorative pattern 8L moves first, then the middle decorative pattern 8C moves, then the right decorative pattern 8R moves, and then the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the second line LN2 first, then the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the second line LN2, and then the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the second line LN2. However, this is not limited to this. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also move from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2 simultaneously, or the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also reach the second line LN2 simultaneously. In this case, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may or may not disappear simultaneously after reaching the second line LN2.

In the decorative pattern irregular start/stop performance, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R appear on the third line LN3 and move to the first line LN1, first the left decorative pattern 8L appears, then the middle decorative pattern 8C appears, then the right decorative pattern 8R appears, and then the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the first line LN1 first, then the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the first line LN1, and then the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the first line LN1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may appear from the third line LN3 at the same time, and the decorative pattern 8L
, 8C, and 8R may be configured to reach the first line LN1 at the same time.

In the irregular decorative symbol start/stop effect described above, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the first line LN1 to the second line LN2, and when they reach the second line LN2, they are gradually erased, and then gradually appear from the third line LN3, moving to the first line LN1 and displayed as stopped symbols. However, this is not limited to this, and the following configurations are also possible. For example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may move from the first line LN1 to the third line LN3, and when they reach the third line LN3, they are gradually erased, and then gradually appear from the second line LN2, moving to the first line LN1 and displayed as stopped symbols. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may move from the second line LN2 to the third line LN3, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that reach the third line LN3 may be gradually erased, and then gradually appear from the first line LN1 and move to the second line LN2 where they are displayed stationary. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may move from the second line LN2 to the first line LN1, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that reach the first line LN1 may be gradually erased, and then gradually appear from the third line LN3 and move to the second line LN2 where they are displayed stationary. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may move from the third line LN3 to the first line LN1, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that reach the first line LN1 may be gradually erased, and then gradually appear from the second line LN2 and move to the third line LN3 where they are displayed stationary. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may move from the third line LN3 to the second line LN2, and when they reach the second line LN2, they may gradually disappear, gradually appear from the first line LN1, and move to the third line LN3 where they are displayed stationary.

[Example of effect]
In the irregular decorative symbol start/stop effect of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped on the first line LN1, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the first line LN1 toward the second line LN2, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear from the third line LN3. This configuration adds an element of surprise to the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the irregular decorative symbol start/stop effect of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that appear from the third line LN3 move toward the first line LN1. With this configuration, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R suddenly appear from the third line LN3 and move toward the first line LN1, which is the movement start position, which adds a variety of unexpected elements to the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the decorative pattern irregular start/stop effects B and C of the above embodiment, the first line LN1 is positioned between the second line LN2 and the third line LN3. With this configuration, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the first line LN1 toward the second line LN2, then appear from the third line LN3. As they move toward the first line LN1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move in a direction approximately perpendicular to each line LN. This makes it easier for players to recognize the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, making the movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R more surprising for players. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the decorative symbol irregular start/stop effects B and C of the above embodiment, a third line LN3 is positioned above the first line LN1, and a second line LN2 is positioned below the first line LN1. With this configuration, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the first line LN1 toward the second line LN2, then appear from the third line LN3, and move further toward the first line LN1. Because the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move in a generally linear fashion, players can easily recognize the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, making the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R more likely to be unexpected. This increases the player's interest in the game.

In the irregular decorative symbol start/stop effect of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the first line LN1 toward the second line LN2. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the second line LN2, and disappear from the portion of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that reach the second line LN2. With this configuration, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear from the second line LN2 and reappear from the third line LN3, giving the impression that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have warped, providing the player with a greater sense of surprise in the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a display effect in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a first line,
The second display effect is a display effect in which the decorative pattern changes in a predetermined direction from the first line toward a second line different from the first line,
the third display effect is a display effect in which the decorative pattern appears from a third line different from the first line and the second line,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the decorative pattern that appears from the third line moves toward the first line.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
The first line is disposed at a position between the second line and the third line.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
the third line is disposed above the first line, and the second line is disposed below the first line;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the second display effect of the combination effect, when the decorative pattern moving in the predetermined direction reaches the second line, it disappears from the part that it has reached.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Scrolling background effects A to C are explained below using Figures 68 to 70. These scrolling background effects can be executed during the changing effect of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a scrolling background effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Scrolling background effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating the scrolling background effect A.
First, as shown in Figure 68 (A), the change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the left, center, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and change at high speed.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at the "9" symbol. At this time, the center effect symbol 8C continues to change.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (C), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that notifies the player that a normal reach effect will develop into an SP reach effect. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are reduced in size and moved to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (D), a background image display effect is executed. The background image display effect is an effect in which a dedicated background image is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, background image SG (shown hatched) is displayed. Background image SG is displayed behind the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R. In other words, it is partially covered by the "9" patterns, which are the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R displayed in front.

Next, as shown in Figures 68 (E) to (K), a scrolling display effect is executed. In the scrolling display effect, the background image SG is scrolled downward as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the middle display symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position on the scrolling background image SG. The displayed middle display symbol 8C is scrolled together with the background image SG, so as to be attached to a predetermined position on the background image SG. The middle display symbol 8C then frames out from the bottom of the display screen 7a. The middle display symbols 8C are displayed in the background image SG in the following order: "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → ... This achieves a variable display of the middle display symbol 8C accompanied by the scrolling of the background image SG. Note that even when the background image SG is scrolled, the "9" symbol, which is a reach symbol, is not affected by the scrolling and does not change position from its predetermined position on the display screen 7a.

In Figure 68 (E), the "1" symbol, which is the middle performance symbol 8C, is displayed in the upper left position of the scrolling background image SG. The "1" symbol is displayed closer to the front than the background image SG. As a result, part of the background image SG is covered by the "1" symbol. The same applies to the other symbols below.

In Figure 68 (F), the "1" symbol is scrolled to the bottom left of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. Also, the "2" symbol, which is the middle performance symbol 8C, is displayed in the upper right position of the scrolling background image SG.

In Figure 68 (G), the "2" symbol scrolls to the bottom right of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. Also, the "3" and "4" symbols, which are the middle performance symbols 8C, are displayed consecutively. The "3" symbol is displayed to the left of the "2" symbol. Also, the "4" symbol is displayed in the upper center position.

Figure 68 (H) shows the "2" and "3" symbols, which are scrolled together with the background image SG, framing out of the display screen 7a, and then the "4" symbol framing out from the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In Figure 68 (I), character image CRA is displayed in the upper left position of the scrolling background image SG. Like the middle performance pattern 8C, character image CRA is scrolled together with background image SG, adhering to a predetermined position on the background image SG. Character image CRA is displayed closer to the front than background image SG, covering part of it.

In Figure 68 (J), the character image CRA scrolls to the bottom of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. In addition, the "5" and "6" symbols, which are the middle performance symbols 8C, are displayed continuously. The "5" symbol is displayed overlapping the character image CRA at approximately the center of the background image SG. The "5" symbol is displayed closer to the front than the character image CRA and background image SG, and covers part of the character image CRA and background image SG. The "6" symbol is displayed in the upper left position of the background image SG.

In Figure 68 (K), the character image CRA, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol are scrolling toward the bottom of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. This shows the character image CRA and the "5" symbol framing out from the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Once the scrolling display effect has ended, the middle symbol change effect is executed, as shown in Figure 68 (L). The middle symbol change effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C moves at a relatively slow speed. Here, the middle symbol 8C moves downward as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Scrolling background effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating the scrolling background effect B.
First, as shown in Figure 69 (A), the change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the left, center, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and change at high speed.

Next, as shown in Figure 69 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at the "9" symbol. At this time, the center effect symbol 8C continues to change.

Next, as shown in Figure 69 (C), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that notifies the player that a normal reach effect will develop into an SP reach effect. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are reduced in size and moved to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 69 (D), a background image display effect is executed. The background image display effect is an effect in which a dedicated background image is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the background image SG (shown hatched) is displayed. The background image SG is displayed behind the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R. In other words, it is partially covered by the "9" pattern, which is the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R displayed in front.

Next, as shown in Figures 69 (E) to (K), a scrolling display effect is executed. In the scrolling display effect, the background image SG is scrolled downward as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the middle display symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position on the scrolling background image SG. The displayed middle display symbol 8C is scrolled together with the background image SG, so as to be attached to a predetermined position on the background image SG. The middle display symbol 8C then frames out from the bottom of the display screen 7a. The middle display symbols 8C are displayed in the background image SG in the following order: "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → ... This achieves a variable display of the middle display symbol 8C accompanied by the scrolling of the background image SG. Note that even when the background image SG is scrolled, the "9" symbol, which is a reach symbol, is not affected by the scrolling and does not change position from its predetermined position on the display screen 7a.

In Figure 69 (E), the "1" symbol, which is the middle performance symbol 8C, is displayed in the upper left position of the scrolling background image SG. The "1" symbol is displayed closer to the front than the background image SG. As a result, part of the background image SG is covered by the "1" symbol. The same applies to the other symbols below. Furthermore, the "1" symbol is rotated around the vertical axis J1 as it is scrolled. This makes it easier to distinguish it from the background image SG, making the "1" symbol stand out.

In Figure 69 (F), the "1" symbol scrolls to the bottom left of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. In addition, the "2" symbol, which is the middle performance symbol 8C, is scrolled into the frame from the top of the display screen 7a. As the "2" symbol scrolls, it is rotated around the vertical axis J2. This makes it easy to distinguish from the background image SG, making the "2" symbol stand out.

In Figure 69 (G), the "2" symbol scrolls to the bottom right of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. In addition, the "3" and "4" symbols, which are the middle performance symbols 8C, are displayed consecutively. The "3" symbol is displayed to the left of the "2" symbol. The "4" symbol is also framed in from the top of the display screen 7a. The "3" and "4" symbols are also rotated around the vertical axes J3 and J4 as they scroll. This makes them easier to distinguish from the background image SG, and the "3" and "4" symbols stand out.

Figure 69 (H) shows the "2" and "3" symbols, which are scrolled together with the background image SG, framing out of the display screen 7a, and then the "4" symbol framing out from the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In Figure 69 (I), a character image CRA is displayed in the upper left position of the scrolling background image SG. Similar to the middle performance pattern 8C, the character image CRA is scrolled together with the background image SG, adhering to a predetermined position on the background image SG. The character image CRA is displayed closer to the front than the background image SG, covering part of it.

In Figure 69 (J), the character image CRA is scrolling toward the bottom of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. The "5" and "6" symbols, which are the center effect symbols 8C, are also displayed continuously. The "5" symbol is displayed overlapping the character image CRA at approximately the center of the background image SG. The "5" symbol is displayed closer to the front than the character image CRA and background image SG, covering a portion of the character image CRA and background image SG. The "6" symbol is displayed at the upper left of the background image SG. The "5" and "6" symbols are also rotated around the vertical axes J5 and J6 as they scroll. This makes them easier to distinguish from the background image SG, making the "5" and "6" symbols stand out.

In Figure 69 (K), the character image CRA, the "5" symbol, and the "6" symbol are scrolling toward the bottom of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. This shows the character image CRA and the "5" symbol framing out from the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Once the scrolling display effect has ended, the middle symbol change effect is executed, as shown in Figure 69 (L). The middle symbol change effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C moves at a relatively slow speed. Here, the middle symbol 8C moves downward as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Scrolling background effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating the scrolling background effect C.
First, as shown in Figure 70 (A), the change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the left, center, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change and change at high speed.

Next, as shown in Figure 70 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R both stop at the "9" symbol. At this time, the center effect symbol 8C continues to change.

Next, as shown in Figure 70 (C), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that notifies the player that a normal reach effect will develop into an SP reach effect. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are reduced in size and moved to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 70 (D), a background image display effect is executed. The background image display effect is an effect in which a dedicated background image is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, background image SG (shown hatched) is displayed. Background image SG is displayed behind the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R. In other words, it is partially covered by the "9" patterns, which are the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R displayed in front.

Next, as shown in Figures 70 (E) to (J), a scrolling display effect is executed. In the scrolling display effect, the background image SG is scrolled downward as indicated by the arrow YG. At this time, the middle display symbol 8C is displayed at a predetermined position on the scrolling background image SG. The displayed middle display symbol 8C is scrolled together with the background image SG, so as to be attached to a predetermined position on the background image SG. The middle display symbol 8C then frames out from the bottom of the display screen 7a. The middle display symbols 8C are displayed in the background image SG in the following order: "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → ... This achieves a variable display of the middle display symbol 8C accompanied by the scrolling of the background image SG. Note that even when the background image SG is scrolled, the "9" symbol, which is a reach symbol, is not affected by the scrolling and does not change position from its predetermined position on the display screen 7a.

In Figure 70 (E), the "1" symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed in the upper left position of the scrolling background image SG. The "1" symbol is displayed closer to the front than the background image SG. As a result, the "1" symbol covers part of the background image SG. The same applies to the other symbols below.

In Figure 70 (F), the "1" symbol scrolls to the bottom left of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. In addition, the "2" symbol, which is the middle performance symbol 8C, is displayed in the upper right position of the scrolling background image SG. The "2" symbol is displayed overlapping the "9" symbol, which is the right performance symbol 8R, and is displayed behind the "9" symbol. In other words, the "9" symbol, which is the reach symbol, is displayed in the foreground. This makes the reach symbol easier for players to recognize. This display order is the same for other symbols in relation to the reach symbol.

In Figure 70 (G), the "2" symbol scrolls to the bottom right of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. In addition, the "3" and "4" symbols, which are the middle performance symbols 8C, are displayed consecutively. The "3" symbol is displayed to the left of the "2" symbol. In addition, the "4" symbol is displayed in the upper center position.

Figure 70 (H) shows the "2" and "3" symbols, which are scrolled together with the background image SG, framing out of the display screen 7a, and then the "4" symbol framing out from the bottom of the display screen 7a.

In Figure 70 (I), a character image CRA is displayed in the upper left position of the scrolling background image SG. The character image CRA is displayed overlapping the "9" symbol, which is the left effect symbol 8L. Furthermore, a "5" symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C, is displayed overlapping the character image SG and the "9" symbol. At this time, the "9" symbol, which is the reach symbol, is displayed in the foreground, the "5" symbol is displayed behind the "9" symbol, the character image CRA is displayed behind the "5" symbol, and the background image SG is displayed behind the character image CRA. This makes the reach symbol easiest for the player to recognize, followed by the "5" symbol, which is the middle effect symbol 8C. This display order is the same for other symbols in relation to the reach symbol and character image.

In Figure 70 (J), the character image CRA and the "5" symbol are scrolling to the bottom of the display screen 7a along with the background image SG. In addition, the "6" symbol, which is the middle performance symbol 8C, is displayed. The "6" symbol is displayed in the upper left position of the background image SG.

In Figure 70 (K), the scrolling display effect ends, the background image SG changes scroll direction, and as indicated by the arrow YG, it scrolls to the left and frames out from the left side of the display screen 7a. By changing the scroll direction and framing out of the background image SG, it becomes easier to understand that the scrolling display effect has ended, and it can also surprise the player. At this time, the middle display pattern 8C is rapidly fluctuating vertically in the center of the reach pattern.

Next, as shown in Figure 70 (L), a middle symbol change effect is executed. The middle symbol change effect is an effect in which the middle symbol 8C moves at a relatively slow speed. Here, the middle symbol 8C moves downward as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of scrolling background effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the background image SG displayed on the back side of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is scrolled, and a scrolling variable effect is executed in which the effect symbol 8C is displayed at a specific position of the scrolling background image SG (Figs. 68(E)-(K), 69(E)-(K), and 70(E)-(J)). According to this configuration, the variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes a novel effect, which can increase the interest in the game. Note that the background image SG corresponds to the "background image," the predetermined position where the center effect symbol 8C is displayed corresponds to the "specific position," and the scrolling background effect corresponds to the "scroll variable effect."

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle performance symbol 8C displayed at a predetermined position on the background image SG is scrolled together with the background image SG (FIGS. 68(E)-(K), 69(E)-(K), 70(E)-(J)). This configuration makes the movement of the middle performance symbol 8C novel, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle performance symbol 8C is scrolled together with the background image SG and frames out from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 68(H)(K), 69(H)(K), 70(H)). According to this configuration, the disappearance of the middle performance symbol 8C becomes novel, which can increase the interest of the game.

When the middle performance pattern 8C is displayed at a predetermined position in the background image SG, it may be displayed within the display screen 7a (Fig. 68 (E)-(G)(J), Fig. 69 (E)(G)(J), Fig. 70 (E)-(G)(I)(J)), or it may be framed in from outside the display screen 7a (Fig. 69 (F)(G)).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the reach formation effect (Fig. 68 (B), Fig. 69 (B), Fig. 70 (B)) in which parts of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a predetermined manner to form a reach pattern, the effect is executed on the middle effect symbol 8C other than the reach pattern. With this configuration, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C, which is directly linked to the jackpot, becomes innovative, which can increase the interest in the game. Note that the "9" symbols, which are the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, correspond to the "reach pattern," and the middle effect symbol 8C corresponds to the "final stop pattern."

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the "9" symbol, which is a reach symbol, is displayed on the front side of the background image SG, covering part of the background image SG, and does not move from a predetermined position on the display screen 7a even when the background image SG is scrolled (FIGS. 68(E)-(K), 69(E)-(K), 70(E)-(J)). This configuration makes it easy to recognize the reach symbol, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed closer to the player than the background image SG and further back than the "9" symbol, which is a reach symbol (FIG. 70(F)(I)). This configuration makes it easier to recognize the reach symbol in relation to the middle effect symbol 8C, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed at a specific position of the background image SG, rotated around the vertical axis of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIGS. 69(E)-(H)(J)(K)). With this configuration, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is scrolled together with the background image SG, stands out, increasing the interest in the game.

[Modification]
Below are some variations of the scrolling background effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is scrolled along with the background image SG and frames out from the display screen 7a. Alternatively, a symbol erasure effect may be implemented in which the middle effect symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a. This configuration highlights the disappearing middle effect symbol 8C, enhancing the interest of the game.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the background image SG is scrolled downward. However, the scroll direction of the background image SG is not particularly limited. For example, the background image SG may be scrolled upward, leftward, rightward, or diagonally. Furthermore, the scroll direction may be changed during the scroll display effect.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the character image CRA is displayed within the display screen 7a and then scrolled together with the background image SG. However, the character image CRA may be scrolled together with the background image SG from outside the display screen 7a and then framed into the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, after the reach formation effect, the center effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol other than the reach symbol, is scrolled together with the background image SG. In contrast, before the reach formation effect, at least one of the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R, and the center effect symbol 8C may be scrolled together with the background image SG. For example, after the left effect symbol 8L stops, the right effect symbol 8R is scrolled together with the background image SG to perform a reach-inducing effect.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, when the middle performance pattern 8C is rotated and displayed, the middle performance pattern 8C is rotated around the vertical axis of the middle performance pattern 8C. In contrast, the axis around which the middle performance pattern 8C is rotated may be any axis. For example, it may be a left-right axis or a diagonal axis. Furthermore, the axes J1 to J6 around which the middle performance pattern 8C is rotated are at angles to each other. In contrast, the axes around which the middle performance pattern 8C is rotated may be in the same direction. Furthermore, the timing at which the middle performance pattern 8C is rotated is not particularly limited. In the scrolling display, it may be rotated continuously, intermittently, or only once at the time of the initial display.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine,
In the variable display of the performance pattern, a background image displayed on the back side of the performance pattern is scrolled, and a scroll variable performance can be executed in which the performance pattern is displayed at a specific position of the background image that is scrolled.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
In the scroll variation effect, the effect pattern displayed at the specific position of the background image is scrolled together with the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2,
In the scroll variation effect, the effect pattern is scrolled together with the background image and framed out of the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
The scroll variation effect is executed for a final stop pattern other than the reach pattern after a reach formation effect in which a part of the effect pattern stops in a predetermined manner to form a reach pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
In the scroll variation presentation, the reach symbol is displayed on the front side of the background image, covers a part of the background image, and does not change its position from a predetermined position on the display screen even when the background image is scrolled.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or B2-5,
In the scroll variation effect, the final stop symbol is displayed in front of the background image and behind the reach symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-6,
In the scroll variation effect, the effect pattern is displayed at the specific position of the background image by rotating around the vertical axis of the effect pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-7,
In the scroll variation effect, the effect pattern is scrolled together with the background image and framed in from outside the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-9]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-4 to B2-8,
In the scroll variation effect, a special image that is displayed on the front side of the background image and on the back side of the effect pattern can be displayed, and the special image is scrolled together with the background image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-10]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-9,
The special image is displayed behind the reach symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The image superimposition button effects A to C are explained below using Figures 71 to 73. These image superimposition button effects A to C are executed during the special symbol variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the image superimposition button effect, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Image superimposition button effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating the image superimposition button effect A. The image superimposition button effect A is an effect that occurs during one variation of the special symbol. In the image superimposition button effect A, as shown in FIG. 71(A), a text image display effect is first performed. This text image display effect occurs during a reach state, and three action images XB1 are displayed. Each action image XB1 is composed of a text image XB11 and a chance-up image XB12. Each action image XB1 has the same outline shape. The text image XB11 is composed of a yellow letter "E." The chance-up image XB12 is composed of the word "chance" within a rectangular frame, suggesting anticipation of a jackpot. Each action image XB1 moves around the display screen 7a without touching each other. In this character image display effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are formed with the same number pattern "7" in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the center decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed, expressing a reach state. In this character image display effect, the character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 71 (B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three action images XB1 are superimposed to form one action image XB1, and button image XB2 is displayed to the right of action image XB1. Button image XB2 is an image representing effect button 63, and is an image that encourages the player to operate effect button 63. The words "Press repeatedly!" are displayed inside button image XB2, encouraging the player to press effect button 63 repeatedly. Note that in this button display effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and an effect in which character CRA moves around on display screen 7a continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), effect effect 1 is performed. This effect is performed when the player repeatedly presses effect button 63. Specifically, action image XB1 and button image XB2 continue to be displayed, while effect image XB3 is displayed. This effect image XB3 is a blue effect that is arranged to surround action image XB1 and changes the shape of the outer periphery of effect image XB3 (the area (surface) of effect image XB3). In the figure, effect image XB3 is indicated by hatching. At this time, as the player repeatedly presses effect button 63, action image XB1 changes from yellow to the same blue as effect image XB3. This indicates to the player that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased. Note that in effect effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and the effect of character CRA moving around on display screen 7a continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), effect effect 2 is performed. This effect effect 2 is performed when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1, button image XB2, and effect image XB3 continue to be displayed, and as the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, the colors of the action image XB1 and effect image XB3 change from blue to green. This indicates to the player that the likelihood of a big win has increased. In effect effect 2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the ready-to-win state, and the character CRA continues to move around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 71 (E), effect effect 3 is performed. This effect is performed when the player repeatedly presses effect button 63. Specifically, action image XB1, button image XB2, and effect image XB3 continue to be displayed, and as the player repeatedly presses effect button 63, the colors of action image XB1 and effect image XB3 change from green to red. This indicates to the player that their chances of winning a jackpot have increased. In effect effect 2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and the character CRA continues to move around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 71 (F), a development suggestion effect is performed. In this development suggestion effect, a character CRB different from character CRA appears, and a development suggestion image XB4 is displayed. The development suggestion image XB4 is an image that suggests development into a super reach effect, and displays the words "Development!" The reach state is continued to be displayed by decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 71 (G), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a double number (all seven symbols), indicating a jackpot. Note that the character CRB continues to be displayed.

[Image superimposition button effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating the image superimposition button effect B. The image superimposition button effect B is an effect that occurs during one variation of the special symbol. In the image superimposition button effect B, as shown in FIG. 72(A), a text image display effect is first performed. This text image display effect occurs during a reach state, and three action images XB1 are displayed. Each action image XB1 is composed of a text image XB11 and a chance-up image XB12. Each action image XB1 has the same outline shape. The text image XB11 is composed of a yellow letter "E." The chance-up image XB12 is composed of the word "chance" within a rectangular frame, suggesting anticipation of a jackpot. Each action image XB1 moves around the display screen 7a without touching each other. In this character image display effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are formed with the same number pattern "7" in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the center decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed, expressing a reach state. In this character image display effect, the character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three action images XB1 are superimposed to form one action image XB1, and button image XB2 is displayed on action image XB1 (text image XB11 and chance-up image XB12). Button image XB2 is an image representing effect button 63, and is an image that encourages the player to operate effect button 63. The word "Press repeatedly!" is displayed inside button image XB2, encouraging the player to press effect button 63 repeatedly. Note that in this button display effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and an effect in which character CRA moves around on display screen 7a continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), effect effect 1 is performed. This effect effect 1 is performed when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63. Specifically, the action image XB1 and button image XB2 continue to be displayed, and effect image XB3 is displayed. This effect image XB3 is a blue effect that is arranged to surround the action image XB1 and changes the shape of the outer periphery of effect image XB3 (the area (surface) of effect image XB3). In the figure, effect image XB3 is indicated by hatching. At this time, as the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, the action image XB1 changes from yellow to the same blue as effect image XB3. This indicates to the player that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased. In effect effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the ready-to-win state, and the character CRA continues to move around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (D), effect effect 2 is performed. This effect is performed when the player repeatedly presses effect button 63. Specifically, action image XB1, button image XB2, and effect image XB3 continue to be displayed, and as the player repeatedly presses effect button 63, the colors of action image XB1 and effect image XB3 change from blue to green. This indicates to the player that their chances of winning a jackpot have increased. In effect effect 2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and the character CRA continues to move around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (E), effect effect 3 is performed. This effect is performed when the player repeatedly presses effect button 63. Specifically, action image XB1, button image XB2, and effect image XB3 continue to be displayed, and as the player repeatedly presses effect button 63, the colors of action image XB1 and effect image XB3 change from green to red. This indicates to the player that their chances of winning a jackpot have increased. In effect effect 2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and the character CRA continues to move around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (F), a development suggestion effect is performed. In this development suggestion effect, a character CRB different from character CRA appears, and a development suggestion image XB4 is displayed. The development suggestion image XB4 is an image that suggests development into a super reach effect, and displays the words "Development!" The reach state is continued to be displayed by decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 72 (G), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a double number (all seven symbols), indicating a jackpot. Note that the character CRB continues to be displayed.

[Image superimposition button effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating the image superimposition button effect C. The image superimposition button effect C is an effect that occurs during one variation of the special symbol. In the image superimposition button effect C, as shown in FIG. 73(A), a text image display effect is first performed. This text image display effect occurs during a reach state, and three action images XB1 are displayed. Each action image XB1 is composed of a text image XB11 and a chance-up image XB12. Each action image XB1 has the same outline shape. The text image XB11 is composed of a yellow letter "E." The chance-up image XB12 is composed of the word "chance" within a rectangular frame, suggesting anticipation of a jackpot. Each action image XB1 moves around the display screen 7a without touching each other. In this character image display effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are formed with the same number pattern "7" in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and the center decorative pattern 8C fluctuates at high speed, expressing a reach state. In this character image display effect, the character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three action images XB1 are superimposed to form one action image XB1, and button image XB2 is displayed on action image XB1 (text image XB11 and chance-up image XB12). Button image XB2 is an image representing effect button 63, and is an image that encourages the player to operate effect button 63. The word "Press repeatedly!" is displayed inside button image XB2, encouraging the player to press effect button 63 repeatedly. Note that in this button display effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and an effect in which character CRA moves around on display screen 7a continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), effect effect 1 is performed. This effect effect 1 is performed when the player repeatedly presses effect button 63. Specifically, action image XB1 and button image XB2 continue to be displayed, while effect image XB3 is displayed. This effect image XB3 is a blue effect that is arranged to surround action image XB1 and changes the shape of the outer periphery of effect image XB3 (the area (surface) of effect image XB3). In the figure, effect image XB3 is indicated by hatching. At this time, as the player repeatedly presses effect button 63, action image XB1 changes from yellow to the same blue as effect image XB3. This indicates to the player that the likelihood of a jackpot has increased. Note that in effect effect 1, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and the effect of character CRA moving around on display screen 7a continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (D), effect effect 2 is performed. This effect is performed when the player repeatedly presses effect button 63. Specifically, action image XB1, button image XB2, and effect image XB3 continue to be displayed, and as the player repeatedly presses effect button 63, the colors of action image XB1 and effect image XB3 change from blue to green. This indicates to the player that their chances of winning a jackpot have increased. In effect effect 2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and the character CRA continues to move around on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (E), effect effect 3 is performed. This effect is performed when the player repeatedly presses effect button 63. Specifically, action image XB1, button image XB2, and effect image XB3 continue to be displayed, and as the player repeatedly presses effect button 63, the colors of action image XB1 and effect image XB3 change from green to red. This indicates to the player that their chances of winning a jackpot have increased. In effect effect 2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state, and the effect of character CRA moving around on display screen 7a continues.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (F), a development suggestion effect is performed. In this development suggestion effect, a character CRB different from the character CRA appears, and a development suggestion image XB4 is displayed. The development suggestion image XB4 is an image suggesting development to a super reach effect, and the words "Development!" are displayed. The display of the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (G), button display effect 2 is performed. This button display effect 2 is an effect in which button image XB2A and heart-shaped image XB5 are displayed. Button image XB2A is an image representing effect button 63 and is an image that urges the player to operate effect button 63. The word "Press!" is displayed inside button image XB2A, urging the player to press effect button 63 once. Heart-shaped image XB5 is a heart-shaped icon image. Button image XB2A and heart-shaped image XB5 are positioned so that they overlap, with button image XB2A being positioned closer to the player than heart-shaped image XB5. Note that character CRB continues to be displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the reach state.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (H), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. This jackpot symbol display effect is performed when the player presses the effect button 63 once. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a double digit (all seven symbols), indicating a jackpot. Note that the character CRB continues to be displayed.

In the above-mentioned image superimposition button effect C, the more the color of the action image XB1 and effect image XB3 change as the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, i.e., the more the effect effect progresses, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. However, this is not limited to this, and the more the color of the action image XB1 and effect image XB3 change, i.e., the more the effect effect progresses, the lower the likelihood of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the above image superimposition button effect C, button image XB2 and button image XB2A are buttons of the same shape, but this is not limited to this and they may be buttons of different shapes.

[Modification]
In the image superimposition button presentation of the above embodiment, in effect presentations 1 to 3, the shape of the outer periphery of the effect image XB3 (the area (surface) of the effect image XB3) is changed, but this is not limited to this, and the shape of the outer periphery of the effect image XB3 (the area (surface) of the effect image XB3) may be fixed without changing.

In the image superimposition button presentation of the above embodiment, an action image XB1 including a character image XB11 and a button image XB2 are displayed, and then the player operates the presentation button 63 to change the color of the action image XB1 from yellow to blue, green, or red. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the player may operate the presentation button 63 to change other aspects of the action image XB1 (e.g., shape, pattern).
In addition, in the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, an action image XB1 including a character image XB11 and a button image XB2 are displayed, and then, the more the player operates the effect button 63, the display mode (e.g., color, shape, pattern) of the button image XB2 may be gradually changed, like the action image XB1 or effect image XB3 of effect effects 1 to 3.

In the image superimposition button effects of the above embodiment, the change in the display mode (color) of the action image XB1 and the change in the display mode (color) of the effect image XB3 are the same, but this is not limited to this, and the change in the display mode of the action image XB1 and the change in the display mode of the effect image XB3 may be different. For example, if the color of the action image XB1 changes from yellow to red, the color of the effect image XB3 may change from blue to purple.

In the image superimposed button effects in the above embodiment, the text image display effects, button display effects 1 and 2, effect effects 1-3, and development suggestion effects were performed during the reach state, but this is not limited to this. For example, they may be performed while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing outside of the reach state, or while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary (for example, while waiting for customers (demo screen)).

In the image superimposition button effects B and C of the above embodiment, three action images XB1 are superimposed, and then the button image XB2 is placed on the action image XB1. However, this is not limited to this. For example, a button image XB2 may be placed on each of the three action images XB1 in advance, and then the superimposition effect may be performed to create a single image in which the button image XB2 is placed on the action image XB1.

In the image superimposed button effect C of the above embodiment, the text written inside (the included text) of button image XB2 and button image XB2A are different, but they may be the same. For example, button image XB2 and button image XB2A may each include the text "Repeat!" or "Press!".

[Example of effect]
In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, an action image XB1 including a text image XB11 and a button image XB2 are displayed. Then, the player operates the effect button 63 to change the display mode (color) of the action image XB1 from yellow to blue, green, and red. With this configuration, the player operates the effect button 63 in response to the display of the text image XB11 and the button image XB2. This operation causes the display mode of the action image XB1 to change gradually, giving the player a sense of participation in the game while building anticipation for a jackpot. This increases the player's interest in the game.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, when a player operates the effect button 63 to change the display mode (color) of the action image XB1 from yellow to blue, green, or red, an effect image XB3 is displayed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 63, and the display mode of the effect image XB3 also changes from blue to green to red. With this configuration, when the player operates the button 63, the display mode of the action image XB1 changes gradually, and the effect image XB3 also changes gradually. This gives older players a sense of participation in the game while also creating a sense of anticipation for a bigger jackpot. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, the action image XB1, whose display state changes when the player operates the effect button 63, includes a text image XB11. This configuration allows the player to change the color of the text through their own operation, giving the player the feeling that they are participating in the game. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

In the image superimposition button effect of the above embodiment, when the player changes the action image XB1 by operating the effect button 63, the effect image XB3 is used as the image that changes along with it. With this configuration, when the player changes the action image through their own operation, the effect image XB3 can also change at the same time, giving the player a sense of being truly involved in the game. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is a display effect that displays a first image,
the second display effect is a display effect that displays an operation means image representing the operation means,
the third display effect is a display effect in which a display mode of the first image is changed from a first mode to a second mode by operating the operating means,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the fourth display effect is a display effect in which a second image different from the first image is displayed, and a display mode of the second image is changed from a third mode to a fourth mode by operating the operating means;
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
In the combination effect, after the display mode of the first image is changed to the second mode in the third display effect, the display mode of the first image is further changed to the fifth mode by operating the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
the first image is a character image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
The second image is an effect image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character selection effects A to C will be explained below using Figures 74 to 76. In Figures 74 to 76, the various movable props and decorative members arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for clarity. Figure 74 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect A, Figure 75 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect B, and Figure 76 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect C.

This character selection effect allows the player to select a preferred character (a specific character preferred by the player) from among multiple characters by pressing the effect button 63 on the front frame 53 or the select button 68, which has up, down, left, and right push buttons (pressing the upper side of the upper push button, pressing the right side of the right push button, pressing the lower side of the lower push button, or pressing the left side of the left push button), or allows the gaming machine 1 to randomly select a character. When the player selects a character in the character selection effect, a special effect can then be executed in which the manner of the effect symbol variation effect (variable display) changes. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the character selection effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first briefly explain the presentation patterns, then explain character selection presentation A, character selection presentation B, and character selection presentation C in order.

[Performance design]
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 74 (A), for example, a left stereoscopic image performance pattern 8L, a middle stereoscopic image performance pattern 8C, and a right stereoscopic image performance pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the variable performance (variable display) of the performance patterns begins in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are card-type effect patterns that are normal effect patterns, and within the cards, the number patterns (numbers "1" through "9") are accompanied by character patterns that correspond to the number patterns. The number "7" is bright red. The odd numbers "1," "3," "5," and "9," excluding the number "7," all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2," "4," "6," and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) are each accompanied by various character patterns in multiple colors (full color), and the character patterns are displayed large as the main effect pattern. For this reason, the size of the number patterns is smaller than the size of the character patterns accompanied by the number patterns. The normal effect patterns are not subjected to variable effects (changing display) in the special effects described below, but are subjected to variable effects (changing display) in the normal effects. Because the number symbols (odd and even) each have a color, for example, when the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R align to form a provisionally stopped number, forming a reach, and the effect subsequently unfolds, the more times a player experiences effects that unfold via reach, the more opportunities they have to personally discover the relationship (pattern) between the colors of the provisionally stopped number symbols and the unfolding effect. This helps to increase interest by having the number symbols (odd and even) each have a color.

Specifically, the character A is attached to the number "1," the character B to the number "2," the character C to the number "3," the character D to the number "4," the character E to the number "5," the character F to the number "6," the character A (displayed in a different manner from the character A attached to the number "1") to the number "7," the character C (displayed in a different manner from the character C attached to the number "3") to the number "8," and the character G to the number "9." In this way, although the character A is attached to the numbers "1" and "2" respectively and overlaps, and the character C is attached to the numbers "3" and "8" respectively and overlaps, the display manner of the character designs is different.

As mentioned above, the normal effect pattern is a card-type effect pattern, but after the character selection effect is performed, when a special effect different from the normal effect begins, the normal effect pattern switches to a special effect pattern different from the normal effect pattern. In this special effect pattern, the card figures and character figures that make up the normal effect pattern disappear, and the size of the number figures expands to the same size as the character figures, leaving only the number figures, but they are smaller than the size of the card figures (one to two times smaller than the size of the card figures). In other words, the special effect pattern is a stand-alone number figure, unlike the card-type effect pattern that is the normal effect pattern. The color of the number figures in this special effect pattern is the same as the color of the number figures in the normal effect pattern. For this reason, even the special effect symbols have the same colors as the normal effect symbols, with the number "7" having a bright red color, the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" excluding the number "7" all having the same bright green color, and the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all having the same bright blue color.

When the effect pattern change (changing display) begins, the stopped effect pattern first moves slowly (at a low speed) upwards in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, after the stopped display of the effect pattern is released and the effect pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), it gradually increases its speed downwards from a low speed, changing from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the effect pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent effect pattern as it changes at high speed. The effect pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing temporarily stopped, or displayed as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the effect pattern moves slowly up and down in small increments.

To briefly explain the variable icons and hold icons, as shown in Figures 74 (A) and (B), the variable icons 9C corresponding to the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special chart hold is consumed are displayed (placed) in the variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided for the first special chart hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) in each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the change in the performance symbol (change display), the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) on the top right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbol holds based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbol holds based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at all times on the top right side of the display screen 7a. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, and are therefore difficult to distinguish from the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are always displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and are also displayed in the foreground of the display screen 7a, with other images positioned behind them, so their visibility is not obstructed by other images.

The background images used in special effects (referred to as "special background images") are special images that are not included in normal background images. Normal background images include, for example, city images, forest images, ocean images, seabed images, and underground images. Special background images include space images, images of the inside of a spaceship, base images, and game hall images. Normal and special background images may be still images or videos.

[Character selection effect A]
Next, the character selection effect A will be described with reference to Figure 74. As shown in Figure 74(A), a city image HG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect pattern change effect (change display) has ended, resulting in the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R being displayed stationary. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all normal effect patterns, and the card contains number patterns (numbers "1" to "9") with character patterns corresponding to the number patterns attached. The left performance pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol with a bright blue number "2" pattern 8La attached to a character pattern 8Lb, the middle performance pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped symbol with a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca attached to a character pattern 8Cb, and the right performance pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped symbol with a bright blue number "6" pattern 8Ra attached to a character pattern 8Rb, and since a miss has been confirmed, the variable icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a.

Here, hold icons 9A are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three hold icons 9A that have not been consumed and are stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable display of the performance pattern (variable display) begins, as shown in Figure 74 (B). When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, leaving only two unconsumed hold icons 9A in stock.

After that, while the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are still being displayed (variable display), the character selection effect A begins. When the character selection effect A begins, as shown in Figures 74(C) and (D), the left effect symbol 8L, which is the normal effect symbol, the center effect symbol 8C, which is the normal effect symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R, which is the normal effect symbol, are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a). Furthermore, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, all the hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and the character selection image CSG is displayed across the entire display screen 7a. Accordingly, the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, is hidden from the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). Furthermore, even when the character selection image CSG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the number of reserved balls mentioned above is displayed as a numerical value, with the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 displayed as blue numbers on the left side and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a.

The character selection image CSG is divided into eight regions (multiple regions) that radiate outward from the center of the display screen 7a, forming eight option images. These eight option images include seven option images for selecting seven characters, Character A to Character G, and one option image for randomly selecting one of Character A to Character G by the gaming machine 1. The seven characters, Character A to Character G, are the same as the character designs (Character A to Character G) that appear on the numerical designs that make up the normal effect designs described above.

Of the eight option images, starting from the top option image and going clockwise, they are assigned and arranged as follows: "Character A", which is the option image for selecting character A; "Character B", which is the option image for selecting character B; "Character C", which is the option image for selecting character C; "Character D", which is the option image for selecting character D; "Random", which is the option image for randomly selecting a character on the gaming machine 1 side; "Character E", which is the option image for selecting character E; "Character F", which is the option image for selecting character F; and "Character G", which is the option image for selecting character G.

As a result, "Character A," an option image for selecting character A, is placed in the upper option image, and "Random," an option image for randomly selecting a character on the gaming machine 1 side, is placed in the lower option image opposite, with "Character A" and "Random" aligned vertically. "Character E," an option image for selecting character E, is placed in the option image opposite "Character B," an option image for selecting character B, with "Character B" and "Character E" aligned on the same straight line sloping upward to the right. "Character F," an option image for selecting character F, is placed in the option image opposite "Character C," an option image for selecting character C, with "Character C" and "Character F" aligned on the same horizontal line. "Character G," an option image for selecting character G, is placed in the option image opposite "Character D," an option image for selecting character D, with "Character D" and "Character G" aligned on the same straight line sloping downward to the right.

In the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, an operation guide area BS1 is provided in front of the option image "Character D" for selecting character D, in the shape of a horizontal rectangle, to explain the operation for selecting and confirming a character. To the left of the operation guide area BS1, a presentation button image BG modeled after the presentation button 63 is located, and to the right of that, a select button image SG modeled after the select button 68 with buttons that can be pressed up, down, left, and right is located. Both the presentation button image BG and the select button 68 are displayed in a flashing manner.

When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the option image corresponding to the currently selected character (in other words, the previously selected character) flashes (see Figure 74 (C)). In this case, since the currently selected character is Character A, "Character A" is flashing. In this state, each time the right button of the select button 68 is pressed, an option image is repeatedly selected in the following order clockwise from "Character A," with "Character B" flashing, "Character C" flashing, "Character D" flashing, "Random" flashing, "Character E" flashing, "Character F" flashing, "Character G" flashing, "Character A" flashing, "Character B" flashing, and so on, resulting in a display mode in which only the selected option image flashes. Each time the left button of the select button 68 is pressed, an option image is repeatedly selected in the counterclockwise direction, with only the selected option image flashing. Each time the upper or lower button of the select button 68 is pressed, an option image opposite the currently flashing option image is selected, resulting in a display mode in which only the selected option image flashes. When the player presses the select button 68 to select a character of their choice, and then presses the effect button 63, the selected character is confirmed. When the player presses the select button 68 to select random, and then presses the effect button 63, random is confirmed.

Note that pressing the select button 68 and the effect button 63 is treated as valid from the time the character selection image CSG is displayed until the character selection decision time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed. If the select button 68 and the effect button 63 are not pressed from the time the character selection image CSG is displayed until the character selection decision time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, then once the character selection decision time has elapsed, the character corresponding to the option image that flashed when the character selection image CSG was displayed is deemed to have been selected and decided again (if the option image that flashed when the character selection image CSG was displayed was "Random," then "Random" is deemed to have been selected and decided again).

Furthermore, if the select button 68 is pressed but the effect button 63 is not pressed between the time the character selection image CSG is displayed and the time the character selection confirmation time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the character corresponding to the flashing option image selected by pressing the select button 68 will be considered to have been selected and confirmed once the character selection confirmation time has elapsed (if the flashing option image selected by pressing the select button 68 is "random", then "random" will be considered to have been selected and confirmed).

When the player selects "Character E" by pressing the select button 68 and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm, or when the player selects "Character E" by pressing the select button 68 and the character selection confirmation time has elapsed (see Figure 74 (D)), the character selection effect A ends and a special effect begins, as shown in Figure 74 (E).

This special effect begins when the player selects "Character A," "Character B," "Character C," "Character D," "Character E," "Character F," or "Character G" in Character Selection A, and will not begin if "Random" is selected.

When the special effect begins, the character selection image CSG and operation guide area BS1 are hidden from the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and operation guide area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), and the display screen 7a switches to a spaceship interior image HG2 as a special background image instead of the normal background image. At this time, an image CRE of the upper body of the character (here, character E) selected by the player in the character selection image CSG is positioned in front of the spaceship interior image HG2 and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, all hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are positioned in front of character E and displayed again on the display screen 7a. In this state, the variable effects (variable displays) of the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are still continuing, but are not displayed on the display screen 7a (disappeared from the display screen 7a). At this time, the voice of the voice actor who plays character E is heard from the speaker 67. Examples of the voice include "Character E is here," and "We'll support you."

Even when the character selection image CSG and operation guide area BS1 are hidden from the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and operation guide area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a) and the display screen 7a switches to the spaceship interior image HG2 as a special background image instead of the normal background image, the number of reserved balls described above is displayed as a number on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, with the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 displayed as blue numbers on the left and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other.

Then, the character selection image CSG and operation guide area BS1 are hidden from the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and operation guide area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), and the display screen 7a switches to the spaceship interior image HG2 as the special background image. After a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 74 (F), the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R in the variable effect (variable display) are positioned in front of the image CRE of character E's upper body and are displayed again on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R switch from the card-type effect patterns as normal effect patterns to special effect patterns. As described above, in this special effect pattern, the card figures and character patterns that make up the normal effect pattern disappear, and the size of the number patterns is enlarged to the size of the character patterns, leaving only the number patterns. In other words, from the point in Figure 74 (F), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are each performing a variable effect (variable display) using the numerical patterns that are special effect patterns. In addition, the size of the image CRE of character E's upper body is extremely large compared to the size of the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, which are special effect patterns, and the image CRE of character E's upper body is displayed in a more noticeable manner than the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, which are special effect patterns.

After that, as shown in Figures 74(G) and (H), first the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the special effect symbol number "6", then the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the special effect symbol number "5", and finally the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the special effect symbol number "7", and the same symbol is not temporarily stopped, and then it is stopped, confirming a loss. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In Figures 74(G) and (H), an image CRE of the upper body of character E is also displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that in Figures 74(G) and (H), after the left effect symbol 8L and right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same time, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, and then it is not temporarily stopped at the same symbol, and then it is stopped, confirming a loss.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (variable display) of the effect pattern starts, as shown in Figure 74 (I). When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state is created in which only one hold icon 9A remains stocked without being consumed.

Furthermore, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the special background image on the display screen 7a switches from the spaceship interior image HG2 to the base image HG3. At this time, the image CRE of the upper body of the character (here, character E) selected by the player in the character selection image CSG switches to an image different from the image displayed in Figures 74(E)-(H) (here, image CRE of the upper body of character E without character E's wings), which is positioned in front of the base image HG3 and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C, hold icon 9A, variable display position 9Cd, all hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are positioned in front of character E and displayed on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, at this time, the special effect symbols left 8L, middle 8C, and right 8R are again hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), but the variable effect (variable display) of the left 8L, middle 8C, and right 8R symbols has begun.

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moved to the variable display position 9Cd and became the variable icon 9C, the special effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 74(J), the display screen 7a switches back from the special background image, base image HG3, to the normal background image, city image HG1. At this time, the image CRE of the upper body of character E, which no longer has wings, disappears from the display screen 7a, and a character display area BS2 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, where an enlarged portion of the image CRE of the upper body of character E (from the chest to the face) is displayed. The character display area BS2 is positioned in front of the normal background image, city image HG1, and in front of the variable area of the right effect pattern 8R. This prevents a portion of the image of the upper body of character E, CRE, displayed in character display area BS2 (from the chest to the face), from being obscured by right effect pattern 8R and becoming difficult to see.

Furthermore, when the special effect ends (in other words, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has passed since the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moved to the variable display position 9Cd and became the variable icon 9C), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R switch from the special effect pattern to a card-type effect pattern as a normal effect pattern. From the point at which the special effect ends (in other words, when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has passed since the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moved to the variable display position 9Cd and became the variable icon 9C, the point in Figure 74 (J)), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R each perform a variable effect (variable display) using the normal effect pattern.

First, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright green number "1" symbol 8La and a character symbol 8Lb attached. Then, as shown in FIG. 74(K), the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright red number "7" symbol 8Ra and a character symbol 8Rb attached. Finally, the center effect symbol 8C is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright blue number "6" symbol 8Ca and a character symbol 8Cb attached. The same symbol is not displayed as a temporary stop, and then it is displayed as a stop, confirming a miss. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIG. 74(K), the character display area BS2 is also displayed, and a portion of the image CRE of the upper body of character E (from the chest to the face) is also displayed in the character display area BS2. In addition, in Figures 74 (J) and (K), after the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed temporarily stopped at the same time, the middle performance pattern 8C is displayed temporarily stopped, and the same pattern is not displayed temporarily stopped, and then it is displayed stopped, and a miss is confirmed.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in Figure 74 (L), the variable display of the display pattern begins, and the normal display patterns, left display pattern 8L, middle display pattern 8C, and right display pattern 8R, all change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state (simultaneously), resulting in a display mode in which they fluctuate rapidly. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, a state results in which none of the hold icons 9A are consumed and there are no stocked hold icons. In Figure 74 (L), the character display area BS2 is also displayed, and a portion of the image of the upper body of character E, CRE (from the chest to the face), is also displayed in the character display area BS2.

If the normal effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do not line up and stop, a loss is confirmed; however, if the normal effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do line up and stop, a win is confirmed, and a winning game begins in which the player is awarded a profit.

In this way, once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed across multiple variable effects (multiple variable displays) using the normal effect patterns, left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R. At this time, a portion of the image of the upper body of character E, CRE (the part from the chest to the face), is displayed in the character display area BS2.

Furthermore, when a special effect is performed, in Figures 74 (F) to (H), the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are special effect patterns in which the card figures and character figures that make up the normal effect patterns disappear and the size of the number figures is enlarged to the same size as the character figures, leaving only the number figures, but smaller than the size of the card figures (one to two times smaller than the size of the card figures). This helps to make the image CRE of the upper body of character E stand out when character E selected by the player appears (is displayed) as the image CRE of the upper body of character E on the display screen 7a.

Once character display area BS2 is displayed on display screen 7a, it is displayed across multiple variable effects (multiple variable displays) using the normal effect patterns of left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R. However, if character selection effect A is performed again and the player selects and confirms the same character as last time (here, character E ("Character E")), a special effect will be performed, and character E will appear in the effects shown in Figure 74 (E) and subsequent pages. Also, if character selection effect A is performed again and the player selects and confirms a character different from last time (for example, character B ("Character B")), a special effect will be performed, and character B will appear in the effects shown in Figure 74 (E) and subsequent pages.

Furthermore, once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, as described above, it is displayed across multiple variable effects (multiple variable displays) using the normal effect symbols, left effect symbol 8L, center effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. In this embodiment, when the non-display condition is met (for example, when multiple variable effects (multiple variable displays) have been reached 100 times), the character display area BS2 is hidden from the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). Even if a special effect is performed and then the special effect ends and the normal effect is restored (i.e., even if the special effect symbol is restored to the normal effect symbol), if the player selects a character when the character selection effect A is performed again, the special effect will be performed again.

[Character selection effect B]
Next, the character selection effect B will be described with reference to Figure 75. As shown in Figure 75(A), a city image HG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect pattern change effect (change display) has ended, resulting in the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R being displayed stationary. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all normal effect patterns, and the card contains number patterns (numbers "1" to "9") with character patterns corresponding to the number patterns. The left performance pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol with a bright blue number "2" pattern 8La attached to a character pattern 8Lb, the middle performance pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped symbol with a bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca attached to a character pattern 8Cb, and the right performance pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped symbol with a bright blue number "6" pattern 8Ra attached to a character pattern 8Rb, and since a miss has been confirmed, the variable icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a.

Here, hold icons 9A are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three hold icons 9A that have not been consumed and are stocked. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable display of the performance pattern (variable display) begins, as shown in Figure 75 (B). When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, leaving only two unconsumed hold icons 9A in stock.

Then, while the variable effects (variable display) of the left effect symbol 8L, center effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R continue, character selection effect B begins. When character selection effect B begins, as shown in Figures 75(C) and (D), the normal effect symbol left effect symbol 8L, the normal effect symbol center effect symbol 8C, and the normal effect symbol right effect symbol 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and further, the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, all hold icons 9A, and first hold display position 9Ad through fourth hold display position 9Ad are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and the character selection image CSG is displayed across the entire display screen 7a. Accordingly, the normal background image city image HG1 is hidden from the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). Furthermore, even when the character selection image CSG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the number of reserved balls described above is displayed as a numerical value, with the number of first special charts reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 displayed as blue numbers on the left side and the number of second special charts reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a.

The character selection image CSG is divided into eight regions (multiple regions) that radiate outward from the center of the display screen 7a, thereby forming eight option images. These eight option images include seven option images for selecting seven characters, character A to character G, and one option image for randomly selecting one of characters A to character G by the gaming machine 1. The seven characters, character A to character G, are the same as the character designs (character A to character G) that appear on the numerical designs that make up the normal effect designs described above.

Of the eight option images, starting from the top option image and going clockwise, they are assigned and arranged as follows: "Character A", which is the option image for selecting character A; "Character B", which is the option image for selecting character B; "Character C", which is the option image for selecting character C; "Character D", which is the option image for selecting character D; "Random", which is the option image for randomly selecting a character on the gaming machine 1 side; "Character E", which is the option image for selecting character E; "Character F", which is the option image for selecting character F; and "Character G", which is the option image for selecting character G.

As a result, "Character A," an option image for selecting character A, is placed in the upper option image, and "Random," an option image for randomly selecting a character on the gaming machine 1 side, is placed in the lower option image opposite, with "Character A" and "Random" aligned vertically. "Character E," an option image for selecting character E, is placed in the option image opposite "Character B," an option image for selecting character B, with "Character B" and "Character E" aligned on the same straight line sloping upward to the right. "Character F," an option image for selecting character F, is placed in the option image opposite "Character C," an option image for selecting character C, with "Character C" and "Character F" aligned on the same horizontal line. "Character G," an option image for selecting character G, is placed in the option image opposite "Character D," an option image for selecting character D, with "Character D" and "Character G" aligned on the same straight line sloping downward to the right.

In the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, an operation guide area BS1 is provided in front of the option image "Character D" for selecting character D, in the shape of a horizontal rectangle, to explain the operation for selecting and confirming a character. To the left of the operation guide area BS1, a presentation button image BG modeled after the presentation button 63 is located, and to the right of that, a select button image SG modeled after the select button 68 with buttons that can be pressed up, down, left, and right is located. Both the presentation button image BG and the select button 68 are displayed in a flashing manner.

When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the option image corresponding to the currently selected character (in other words, the previously selected character) flashes (see FIG. 75(C)). In this case, since the currently selected character is Character A, "Character A" is flashing. In this state, each time the right button of the select button 68 is pressed, an option image is repeatedly selected in the following order clockwise from "Character A," with "Character B" flashing, "Character C" flashing, "Character D" flashing, "Random" flashing, "Character E" flashing, "Character F" flashing, "Character G" flashing, "Character A" flashing, "Character B" flashing, and so on, resulting in a display mode in which only the selected option image flashes. Each time the left button of the select button 68 is pressed, an option image is repeatedly selected counterclockwise, with only the selected option image flashing. Each time the upper or lower button of the select button 68 is pressed, an option image on the opposite side of the currently flashing option image is selected, resulting in a display mode in which only the selected option image flashes. The player presses the select button 68 to select a character of his/her choice, and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm the selected character. The player presses the select button 68 to select random, and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm random.

Note that pressing the select button 68 and the effect button 63 is treated as valid from the time the character selection image CSG is displayed until the character selection decision time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed. If the select button 68 and the effect button 63 are not pressed from the time the character selection image CSG is displayed until the character selection decision time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, then once the character selection decision time has elapsed, the character corresponding to the option image that flashed when the character selection image CSG was displayed is deemed to have been selected and decided again (if the option image that flashed when the character selection image CSG was displayed was "Random," then "Random" is deemed to have been selected and decided again).

Furthermore, if the select button 68 is pressed but the effect button 63 is not pressed between the time the character selection image CSG is displayed and the time the character selection confirmation time (15 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the character corresponding to the flashing option image selected by pressing the select button 68 will be considered to have been selected and confirmed once the character selection confirmation time has elapsed (if the flashing option image selected by pressing the select button 68 is "random", then "random" will be considered to have been selected and confirmed).

When the player selects "Random" by pressing the select button 68 and then presses the effect button 63 to confirm, or when the player selects "Random" by pressing the select button 68 and the character selection confirmation time has elapsed (see Figure 75 (D)), the character selection effect B ends, and as shown in Figure 75 (E), the special effect that started in Figure 74 (E) of the character selection effect A described above does not start here, and the normal effect is carried out (continues) as in Figure 75 (B), the character selection image CSG and operation guide area BS1 are hidden from the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG and operation guide area BS1 disappear from the display screen 7a), the display screen 7a switches back to the original normal background image, the city image HG1, and the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are positioned in front of the normal background image, the city image HG1, and are again displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the normal effect pattern does not switch from the card-type effect pattern to the special effect pattern, but the card-type effect pattern is again displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal effect pattern, and the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R each perform a variable effect (variable display) based on the normal effect pattern.

Furthermore, when a player selects "Random" by pressing the select button 68 and confirms by pressing the effect button 63, or when a player selects "Random" by pressing the select button 68 and the character selection confirmation time has elapsed, a horizontally long rectangular character display area BS2 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. Here, because the player selected "Random" in the character selection image CSG, the gaming machine 1 (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) arbitrarily selects a character (here, character C is selected), and a portion of the image CRC of character C's upper body (from the chest to the face) is enlarged and displayed in the character display area BS2. The character display area BS2 is positioned in front of the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, and in front of the variable area of the right effect pattern 8R. This prevents the portion of the image CRC of character C's upper body (from the chest to the face) displayed in the character display area BS2 from being obscured by the right effect pattern 8R and becoming difficult to see.

As mentioned above, the special effects are generated when the player selects "Character A,""CharacterB,""CharacterC,""CharacterD,""CharacterE," or "Character F" in the character selection effect B.
This effect starts when either "Character G" or "Character G" is selected, but does not start when "Random" is selected. In this case, the player selected "Random" in character selection effect B, so the special effect does not start.

Then, as shown in Figure 75(F), the left effect symbol 8L first displays a temporary stop display of a bright green number "1" symbol 8La with a character symbol 8Lb attached. Then, as shown in Figure 75(G), the right effect symbol 8R displays a temporary stop display of a bright red number "7" symbol 8Ra with a character symbol 8Rb attached. Finally, the center effect symbol 8C displays a temporary stop display of a bright blue number "6" symbol 8Ca with a character symbol 8Cb attached. The same symbol is not temporarily displayed, and then the display is stopped, confirming a miss. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In Figures 75(F) and (G), the character display area BS2 is also displayed, and a portion of the image CRC of the upper body of character C (from the chest to the face) is also displayed in the character display area BS2. In addition, in Figures 75 (F) and (G), after the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are simultaneously temporarily stopped, the center performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped, and the same symbol is not temporarily stopped, and then it is stopped, and a miss is confirmed.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in Figure 75(H), the variable display (variable display) of the display pattern begins, and the normal display patterns, the left display pattern 8L, the middle display pattern 8C, and the right display pattern 8R, all change simultaneously from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, there is now only one hold icon 9A remaining in stock without being consumed. In Figure 75(H), the character display area BS2 is also displayed, and a portion of the image of the upper body of character C, CRC (from the chest to the face), is also displayed in the character display area BS2.

After that, as shown in Figure 75(I), first, the left effect symbol 8L appears as a stopped display with the number "3" symbol 8La and a character symbol 8Lb attached, then the right effect symbol 8R appears as a stopped display with the number "2" symbol 8Ra in bright blue and a character symbol 8Rb attached, and finally the middle effect symbol 8C appears as a temporary stop display with the number "7" symbol 8Ca in bright red and a character symbol 8Cb attached, and then the same symbol is not temporarily displayed, and then it is displayed as a stopped display, confirming a loss. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In Figure 75(I), the character display area BS2 is also displayed, and a portion of the image CRC of the upper body of character C (from the chest to the face) is also displayed in the character display area BS2. In addition, in Figure 75 (I), after the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are simultaneously displayed as temporarily stopped, the center effect pattern 8C is displayed as temporarily stopped, and the same pattern is not displayed as temporarily stopped, and then it is displayed as stopped, confirming a miss.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in Figure 75 (J), the variable display (variable display) of the display pattern begins, and the normal display patterns, the left display pattern 8L, the center display pattern 8C, and the right display pattern 8R, all change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state at the same time, resulting in a display mode that changes rapidly. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is not consumed and there are no stocked items. In Figure 75 (J), the character display area BS2 is also displayed, but here, a part of the image CRC of the upper body of the character C (from the chest to the face) is displayed in the character display area BS2. This is because the player selected "random" when character selection presentation B was performed, and so the character displayed in character display area BS2 has switched from a portion of the image CRC of the upper body of character C (the portion from the chest to the face) to a portion of the image CRE of the upper body of character E (the portion from the chest to the face). Of course, this character CRC is a character selected arbitrarily on the gaming machine 1 side (by the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90). For this reason, the characters arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 side (by the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) last time and this time may happen to be the same character.

If the normal effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do not line up and stop, a loss is confirmed; however, if the normal effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do line up and stop, a win is confirmed, and a winning game begins in which the player is awarded a profit.

In this way, once the character display area BS2 is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed across multiple variable effects (multiple variable displays) using the normal effect symbols, left effect symbol 8L, center effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the character displayed in the character display area BS2 is a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRC of character C, arbitrarily selected by the gaming machine 1 (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) each time multiple variable effects (multiple variable displays) are displayed. The number of times these multiple variable effects (multiple variable displays) are spanned (the number of variable effects performed (the number of variable displays)) is also arbitrarily determined by the gaming machine 1 (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90). This allows the period during which a character is displayed in the character display area BS2 to be randomized, allowing for variation in the character in the character display area BS2 and the period during which the character is displayed in the character display area BS2.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the non-display condition is met (for example, when the number of times a character has been arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 (in the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) reaches 10), the character display area BS2 is hidden from the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a).

In addition, characters arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 side (in the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) are switched as multiple variable presentations (multiple variable displays) every two variable presentations (two variable displays) as shown in Figures 75 (E) to (I). However, instead of two change effects (two change displays), they may be switched every certain number of change effects (certain number of change displays) (for example, they may be switched every 5 change effects (5 change displays), every 10 change effects (10 change displays), or every 15 change effects (15 change displays)), or they may be switched every random number of change effects (random number of change displays) (for example, they may be switched like this: 7 change effects (7 change displays) → 3 change effects (3 change displays) → 10 change effects (10 change displays) → 5 change effects (5 change displays) → 5 change effects (5 change displays) → 9 change effects (9 change displays) → ...).

[Character selection effect C]
Next, the character selection effect C will be explained with reference to Figure 76. The character selection effect C is performed when the player operates the select button 68, which has up, down, left, and right push buttons, after all reserved icons 9A have been consumed, the effect symbol variation effect (variable display) has ended and is displayed as stopped, and a loss has been confirmed. When a battle effect is performed, the enemy character selected by the player in the character selection effect C appears, and a special effect is then initiated. Note that in this embodiment, after the character selection effect C, a battle effect is always performed in the first effect symbol variation effect (variable display).

As shown in FIG. 76(A), when character selection effect C begins, the normal effect symbol 8L (left effect symbol), the normal effect symbol 8C (center effect symbol), and the normal effect symbol 8R (right effect symbol) are hidden from (disappear from) the display screen 7a, and further, variable display position 9Cd and first hold display position 9Ad to fourth hold display position 9Ad are hidden from (disappear from) the display screen 7a, and the character selection image CSG is displayed across the entire display screen 7a. Note that even when the character selection image CSG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the number of reserved balls described above is displayed numerically, with the number of first special reserved symbols based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 displayed as blue numbers on the left and the number of second special reserved symbols based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a.

The character selection image CSG allows the player to select from multiple enemy characters an enemy character to fight against the ally character CRA in the battle presentation, and three enemy characters (left enemy character, central enemy character, and right enemy character) are arranged on the same horizontal line on the display screen 7a as option images spaced equally apart. In other words, the three option images are arranged on the same horizontal line spaced equally apart. There are seven enemy characters: enemy character CRB, enemy character CRC, enemy character CRD, enemy character CRE, enemy character CRF, enemy character CRG, and enemy character CRH.

In the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, there is a horizontally long rectangular operation guide area BS1 that explains the operation for selecting and confirming an enemy character. To the left of the operation guide area BS1, there is a presentation button image BG that resembles the presentation button 63, and to the right of that there is a select button image SG that resembles the select button 68, which has up, down, left, and right push buttons. Both the presentation button image BG and the select button 68 are displayed in a flashing manner.

In addition, below the enemy character on the left, on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a horizontally long rectangular enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB), which is an option image that allows the gaming machine 1 to randomly select one of the multiple enemy characters.

When the character selection image CSG is displayed, the option image for the enemy character that corresponds to the currently selected enemy character (in other words, the enemy character selected previously) flashes. In this case, the currently selected enemy character is enemy character CRC, so the option image located in the center of the display screen 7a is displayed and flashing. An option image for selecting enemy character CRD is located and displayed to the left of enemy character CRC, and an option image for selecting enemy character CRB is located and displayed to the right of enemy character CRC. To the left of enemy character CRD is an arrow image that prompts the player to press the left button of the select button 68, and it flashes red, while to the right of enemy character CRB is an arrow image that prompts the player to press the right button of the select button 68, and it flashes red. Both arrow images are used to display other enemy characters on the display screen 7a.

In this state, each time the right-side depression button of the select button 68 is pressed, of the three enemy characters (an option image for selecting the left-side enemy character, an option image for selecting the central enemy character, and an option image for selecting the right-side enemy character) that are displayed and arranged at equal intervals on the same horizontal line on the display screen 7a, the option image for selecting the left-side enemy character moves leftward and disappears from the display screen 7a, the option image for selecting the central enemy character switches from a flashing display mode to a non-flashing display mode and moves leftward to be displayed in the option image for selecting the left-side enemy character, the option image for selecting the right-side enemy character moves leftward and is displayed in the option image for selecting the central enemy character and switches from a non-flashing display mode to a flashing display mode, and a new image appears on the display screen 7a from the right side of the display screen 7a to be displayed in the option image for selecting the right-side enemy character. 76(A), each time the right-side button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reels spin leftward to display an option image for selecting the central enemy character in the following order: enemy character CRB → enemy character CRH → enemy character CRG → enemy character CRF → enemy character CRE → enemy character CRD → enemy character CRC → enemy character CRB → enemy character CRH → .... When the effect button 63 is pressed, the central enemy character is determined. When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's preferred enemy character and then presses the effect button 63, the selected central enemy character is determined.

On the other hand, each time the left-side pressure button of the select button 68 is pressed, of the three enemy characters (option image for selecting the left-side enemy character, option image for selecting the central enemy character, and option image for selecting the right-side enemy character) that were displayed on the display screen 7a and arranged at equal intervals on the same horizontal line, the option image for selecting the right-side enemy character moves to the right and disappears from the display screen 7a, the option image for selecting the central enemy character switches from a flashing display mode to a non-flashing display mode and moves to the right and is displayed in the option image for selecting the right-side enemy character, the option image for selecting the left-side enemy character moves to the right and is displayed in the option image for selecting the central enemy character and switches from a non-flashing display mode to a flashing display mode, and a new image appears on the display screen 7a from the left side of the display screen 7a and is displayed in the option image for selecting the left-side enemy character. Here, in Figure 76 (A), each time the left button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reel spins to the right as option images for selecting the central enemy character are displayed in the following order: enemy character CRB → enemy character CRC → enemy character CRD → enemy character CRE → enemy character CRF → enemy character CRG → enemy character CRH → enemy character CRB → enemy character CRC → ... When the player presses the select button 68 to select the player's preferred enemy character and then presses the effect button 63, the selected central enemy character is confirmed.

Each time the upper button or lower button of the select button 68 is pressed, the selection switches from the central enemy character to the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB), the central enemy character is displayed in a non-blinking mode, and the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) is enabled and displayed in a blinking mode; alternatively, the selection switches from the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) to the central enemy character, the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) is displayed in a non-blinking mode, and the central enemy character is enabled and displayed in a blinking mode. When the player presses the select button 68 to select the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) and then presses the effect button 63, random is selected.

Note that pressing the select button 68 and pressing the effect button 63 are treated as valid until the character selection determination time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the character selection image CSG was displayed. If the select button 68 and the effect button 63 are not pressed until the character selection determination time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the character selection image CSG was displayed, then once the character selection determination time has elapsed, the enemy character that flashed when the character selection image CSG was displayed (i.e., the enemy character in the center) is deemed to have been selected and determined again (if the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) is flashing when the character selection image CSG is displayed, then "random" is deemed to have been selected and determined again).

Furthermore, if the select button 68 is pressed but the effect button 63 is not pressed between the time the character selection image CSG is displayed and the character selection confirmation time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the central enemy character will be considered to have been selected and confirmed once the character selection confirmation time has elapsed (if the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) is flashing due to the select button 68 being pressed, "random" will be considered to have been selected and confirmed again).

The special effect begins when the player selects one of "enemy character CRB," "enemy character CRC," "enemy character CRD," "enemy character CRE," "enemy character CRF," "enemy character CRG," or "enemy character CRH" in character selection effect C, and does not begin when "Random" is selected.

First, in Figure 76 (A), when the player selects the enemy character CRB (that is, when the enemy character CRB is placed as the central enemy character on the display screen 7a and is displayed in a flashing manner), after which the character selection image CSG is displayed and the character selection decision time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the character selection presentation C ends, and as shown in Figure 76 (B), the character selection image CSG, operation guide area BS1 and enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) are hidden from the display screen 7a (the character selection image CSG, operation guide area BS1 and enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) disappear from the display screen 7a), and the city image HG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left presentation pattern 8L, center presentation pattern 8C and right presentation pattern 8R are again displayed in a stopped state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all card-type effect symbols that are normal effect symbols, with the number symbols (numbers "1" through "9") on the card accompanied by a character symbol corresponding to the number symbol. The left effect symbol 8L is displayed as a stopped symbol with the number "2" symbol 8La in bright blue accompanied by a character symbol 8Lb, the center effect symbol 8C is displayed as a stopped symbol with the number "3" symbol 8Ca in bright green accompanied by a character symbol 8Cb, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a stopped symbol with the number "6" symbol 8Ra in bright blue accompanied by a character symbol 8Rb. Because a miss has been confirmed, the variable icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a.

In this state, if three game balls enter the first start hole in succession, the hold icon 9A will be displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon will be displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there will be only three hold icons 9A stored without being consumed. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation will assume that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 76(C), the variable display (variable display) of the left display pattern 8L, the center display pattern 8C, and the right display pattern 8R starts, and the display screen 7a switches to the spaceship interior image HG2 as a special background image instead of the normal background image.
A battle effect is started. Accordingly, a special effect is started. When the battle effect starts, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and an enemy character (here, enemy character CRB) selected by the player in the character selection image CSG as the opponent of the ally character CRA appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, resulting in an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Although the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are positioned in front of the spaceship interior image HG2 and displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, the size of the enemy character CRB is larger than the size of the ally character CRA, resulting in a display mode in which the enemy character CRB stands out more than the ally character CRA in the battle effect.

The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are positioned in front of the spaceship interior image HG2 and displayed prominently in the center of the display screen 7a, while the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are currently in a change effect (change display), are positioned in front of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C, change display position 9Cd, all reserved icons 9A, and the first reserved display position 9Ad through the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are also positioned in front of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. This ensures that the change effect (change display) of the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, as well as the change icon 9C, change display position 9Cd, all reserved icons 9A, and the first reserved display position 9Ad through the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, are not obstructed by the battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB and are difficult to see.

In addition, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in Figure 76(C) moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R switch from the normal card-type effect pattern to the special effect pattern. As described above, this special effect pattern is one in which the card figures and character designs that make up the normal effect pattern disappear, and the number designs are enlarged to the size of the character designs, leaving only the number designs. In other words, from the point in Figure 76(C), the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are each performing a variable effect (variable display) using the number designs, which are special effect patterns. Additionally, the size of the enemy character CRB is significantly larger than the sizes of the special effect symbols, left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R, respectively, making the enemy character CRB more noticeable in display than the special effect symbols, left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R.

Then, as shown in Figure 76 (D), first the left effect symbol 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with the number "6", which is a special effect symbol, then the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with the number "5", which is a special effect symbol, and finally the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed as a temporary stop with the number "7", which is a special effect symbol, and the same symbol is not displayed as a temporary stop, and then it is displayed as a stopped symbol, and a loss is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that in Figure 76 (D), after the left effect symbol 8L and right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a temporary stop simultaneously, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed as a temporary stop, and then it is not displayed as a temporary stop with the same symbol, and then it is displayed as a stopped symbol, and a loss is confirmed.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the special effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 76(E), the display screen 7a switches from the base image HG3, which is the special background image, to the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, and is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad.
The screen moves to the next screen, and there is only one pending icon 9A stored without being consumed.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R switch from special effect patterns to card-type effect patterns as normal effect patterns, and the effect pattern variable effect (variable display) begins. In other words, from the point in time shown in Figure 76 (E), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are each variable effect (variable display) using the normal effect patterns.

First, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright green number "1" symbol 8La and a character symbol 8Lb attached. Then, as shown in Figure 76 (F), the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright red number "7" symbol 8Ra and a character symbol 8Rb attached. Finally, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright blue number "6" symbol 8Ca and a character symbol 8Cb attached. The same symbol is not displayed as a temporary stop, and then the symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, confirming a loss. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that in Figure 76 (F), after the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed as temporary stop symbols simultaneously, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed as a temporary stop symbol, and then the same symbol is not displayed as a temporary stop symbol, and then the symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, confirming a loss.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable display of the effect pattern (variable display) begins, and the normal effect patterns, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, all change simultaneously from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, a state results in which no hold icons 9A are consumed and there are no stocked hold icons 9A.

If the normal effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do not line up and stop, a loss is confirmed; however, if the normal effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do line up and stop, a win is confirmed, and a winning game begins in which the player is awarded a profit.

On the other hand, if the player selects the enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB) in Figure 76(A), then after the character selection image CSG is displayed and the character selection determination time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the screen will be the same as Figure 76(B) described above, as shown in Figure 76(G). No further explanation will be given here.

In this state, if three game balls enter the first start hole in succession, the hold icon 9A will be displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon will be displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there will be only three hold icons 9A stored without being consumed. For the sake of convenience, the following explanation will assume that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in Figure 76 (H), the variable performance (variable display) of the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R begins, and the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a without switching to a special background image. At this time, the card-type performance pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal performance pattern without switching from the card-type performance pattern to the special performance pattern, and the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are each performing a variable performance (variable display) using the normal performance pattern.

After that, as shown in Figure 76 (I), the ally character CRA does not appear from the right side of the display screen 7a, and since the player has selected "random" in the character selection image CSG as the opponent for the ally character CRA, only the enemy character (here, the enemy character CRD is selected) arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 side (in the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, but there is no battle presentation in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fight in the center of the display screen 7a. The enemy character CRD is normally placed in front of the city image HG1, which is the background image, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are in the variable effect (variable display), are placed in front of the enemy character CRD and displayed on the display screen 7a, while the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, all hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are also placed in front of the enemy character CRD and displayed on the display screen 7a. This ensures that the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, which are in the variable effect (variable display), as well as the variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, all hold icons 9A, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, are not obstructed by the effect of the enemy character CRD and are difficult to see.

Note that although the ally character CRA does not appear in Figures 76 (H) and (I), there are cases in which the ally character CRA does appear. In this case, when the battle presentation begins, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. Because the player has selected "random" as the opponent for the ally character CRA, an enemy character (here, the enemy character CRD) arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 side (in the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90) appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, resulting in a presentation in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD battle in the center of the display screen 7a. Although the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD are usually positioned in front of the city image HG1, which is the background image, and are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRD is larger than the ally character CRA, resulting in a display mode in which the enemy character CRD stands out more than the ally character CRA in the battle presentation.

Then, first, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright green number "1" symbol 8La and a character symbol 8Lb attached, and then, as shown in Figure 76 (J), the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright red number "7" symbol 8Ra and a character symbol 8Rb attached, and finally, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright blue number "6" symbol 8Ca and a character symbol 8Cb attached, and the same symbol is not displayed as a temporary stop, and then it is displayed as a stopped symbol, confirming a loss. Note that in Figure 76 (J), after the left effect symbol 8L and right effect symbol 8R are displayed as a temporary stop simultaneously, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed as a temporary stop, and then it is not displayed as a temporary stop with the same symbol, and then it is displayed as a stopped symbol, confirming a loss.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in Fig. 76 (K), the variable display of the effect pattern (variable display) begins, and the normal effect patterns, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R, all change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state at the same time, becoming a display mode that changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, there is a state in which only one hold icon 9A is stocked without being consumed.

After that, if the normal effect symbols, left effect symbol 8L, center effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R, do not line up and are displayed, a loss is confirmed. However, if the left effect symbol 8L, center effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R line up and are displayed, a win is confirmed, and a winning game begins in which the player is awarded a profit.

In this way, when the character selection effect C is performed and the player selects an enemy character, as a special effect, in Figures 76 (C) and (D), the display screen 7a switches from the normal background image to the spaceship interior image HG2 as a special background image, and the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R switch from the normal card-type effect patterns to special effect patterns, and when the change (change effect (change display) by change icon 9C) ends and the next change begins ( When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in Figure 76 (E), the display screen 7a switches from the special background image, base image HG3, back to the normal background image, city image HG1, and the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C and right effect pattern 8R switch from the special effect pattern to a card-type effect pattern as a normal effect pattern, and the effect pattern variable effect (variable display) begins.

In contrast, when the player selects random, one of the multiple enemy characters is arbitrarily selected on the gaming machine 1 side (in the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90), and in Figures 76 (H) to (J), the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, is displayed on the display screen 7a without switching to a special background image, and the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R remain as the normal effect pattern, card-type effect patterns, without switching to special effect patterns. When the change effect (change display) using the change icon 9C ends and the next change begins (when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C), in Figure 76 (K), the city image HG1, which is the normal background image, continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C and right effect pattern 8R continue to be the normal card-type effect patterns, and the change effect (change display) of the effect patterns begins.

In addition, when character selection effect C is performed, the left effect pattern 8L, center effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R in Figures 76 (C) and (D) are used as special effects. These are special effect patterns in which the card figures and character figures that make up the normal effect patterns disappear and the size of the number figures is enlarged to the same size as the character figures, leaving only the number figures, but smaller than the size of the card figures (one to two times smaller than the size of the card figures). This helps to make the enemy character CRB selected by the player stand out when it appears (is displayed) on the display screen 7a.

In this embodiment, even if a special effect is performed and then ends and returns to the normal effect (i.e., returns from the special effect symbol to the normal effect symbol), as described above, if the character selection effect C is performed again and the player selects a character, the special effect will be performed again.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the character selection effects:
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character selection presentation A of Figure 74, the character selection presentation B of Figure 75, and the character selection presentation C of Figure 76, a lottery is made for a "win" or a "lose" based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (based on its acceptance by the ball receiving port), and the image display device 7 (display means) is provided which displays a left presentation pattern 8L, a middle presentation pattern 8C, and a right presentation pattern 8R (a set of presentation patterns) which can notify the player of the lottery result of "win" or "lose", and a first presentation is executed in which a plurality of option images including a plurality of character images are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and the player operates the select button 68 (operation means) or the presentation button 63 (operation means) to select one option image from the plurality of option images (Figures 74 (C) and (D) for character selection presentation A, Figures 75 (C) and (D) for character selection presentation B, and Figure 76 (A) for character selection presentation C). When the selected option image in the first effect is one of the multiple character images, a second effect can be executed, which executes a special effect different from the normal effect (special effects in character selection effect A are shown in FIGS. 74(E)-(I) and in character selection effect C are shown in FIGS. 76(C) and (D)). This configuration allows the player to select one option image from the multiple option images by operating the select button 68 (operation means) or the effect button 63 (operation means), allowing the player to select the character image of their choice. Furthermore, because the special effect is executed only when the player selects the character image of their choice, the player is more likely to actively operate the select button 68 (operation means) or the effect button 63 (operation means) in order to see the special effect, which increases the player's motivation to operate the select button 68 (operation means) or the effect button 63 (operation means). This increases the player's interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second presentation in the character selection presentation B of Figure 75 and the character selection presentation C of Figure 76 is designed to execute a normal presentation when the one option image selected in the first presentation is not one of the multiple character images (in the character selection presentation B, the normal presentation is from Figure 75 (E) onwards, and in the character selection presentation C, the normal presentation is from Figure 76 (H) onwards). According to this configuration, when a player operates the select button 68 (operation means) or the effect button 63 (operation means) to select not a character image as one of the multiple option images but instead selects another image ("random" in Figure 75 (D) in character selection effect B, or "enemy character random option image ACB (random option image ACB)" in Figure 76 (A) in character selection effect C), a normal effect is executed instead of a special effect, so that the player will actively operate the select button 68 (operation means) or the effect button 63 (operation means) in order to see the special effect, which can further increase the player's motivation to operate the select button 68 (operation means) or the effect button 63 (operation means).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special effects in the character selection effect A of Figure 74 and the character selection effect C of Figure 76 are displayed larger than the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) when the character image, which is one of the option images selected in the first effect, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (in character selection effect A, the image CRE of the upper body of character E in Figures 74 (E) to (I), and in character selection effect C, Figures 76 (C) and (D)). According to this configuration, the character image that the player prefers is displayed larger than the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R (each performance pattern in a set of performance patterns), thereby making the character image more noticeable than the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R (each performance pattern in a set of performance patterns).This allows variation to be added to the changing performance (changing display) of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R, which can easily become monotonous, thereby reducing the monotony of the changing performance (changing display) of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the character selection effect A of Figure 74, the character selection effect B of Figure 75, and the character selection effect C of Figure 76 can be executed during the period from when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) are displayed in a changing effect (changing display) until they are displayed as stopped, or when the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 (is not received by the ball receiving hole) and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) are not displayed in a changing effect (changing display). According to this configuration, when the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in a set of effect symbols) are undergoing a variable effect (variable display), the player may operate the select button 68 (operation means) or the effect button 63 (operation means) to execute a first effect in which one option image is selected from a plurality of option images, thereby increasing the opportunity for the player to select a character image of his or her choice. Furthermore, when the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 (is not received by the ball receiving hole) and the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (each effect symbol in a set of effect symbols) are not undergoing a variable effect (variable display), the player can be given an opportunity to select a character image of his or her choice in cases where the game ball does not enter the first start hole 20 even though the player is actually playing, or when the player starts playing while the gaming machine 1 is in a waiting state for customers.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the normal presentation of the character selection presentation B of Figure 75 and the character selection presentation C of Figure 76 (from Figure 75 (E) onwards for character selection presentation B, and from Figure 76 (H) onwards for character selection presentation C), the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R (each presentation pattern in a set of presentation patterns) are displayed in a variable manner as normal presentation patterns consisting of the numbers "1" (number pattern) to "9" (number pattern) with character patterns (decorative images) added, and then displayed as stopped. In the special effects in the character selection effect A of Fig. 74 and the character selection effect C of Fig. 76 (special effects in the character selection effect A are Fig. 74 (E) to (I), and in the character selection effect C are Fig. 76 (C) and (D)), the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) are displayed as special effect patterns in which the numbers "1" (number pattern) to "9" (number pattern), which are the numbers that make up the normal effect patterns, and the character patterns (decorative images), are enlarged in size, and then displayed as special effect patterns that are configured without the character patterns (decorative images). The size of the special effect patterns is smaller than the size of the normal effect patterns. According to this configuration, the changing performance (changing display) of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R (each performance pattern in a set of performance patterns) can be performed using normal performance patterns or special performance patterns, so in this respect too, the monotony of the changing performance (changing display) of the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R can be reduced.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a special effect is executed in the second effect of the character selection effect A of Figure 74 and the character selection effect C of Figure 76, and when the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) are displayed as special effect patterns in a variable manner and then stopped, and the lottery result of "win" or "lose" is announced as "lose (fail)", a third effect can be executed by executing a normal effect without executing the special effect until the first effect is executed again, and the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) are displayed as normal effect patterns in a variable manner and then stopped, and the lottery result of "win" or "lose" is announced (Figures 74 (E) to (L) for character selection effect A, and Figures 76 (C) to (F) for character selection effect C). According to this configuration, when a special effect is executed, the variable effect (variable display) does not continue with the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) as the special effect patterns, but rather, once the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R (each effect pattern in a set of effect patterns) are displayed as special effect patterns in a variable display and then stopped and displayed, in the next variable effect (variable display) (i.e., when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C), the special effect pattern switches to the normal effect pattern, which makes it less likely that the freshness of the special effect pattern will be lost.

[Modification]
Below, variations of the character selection presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
The character selection effect A in Fig. 74, the character selection effect B in Fig. 75, and the character selection effect C in Fig. 76 are performed when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20, which is the ball receiving opening. In other words, they are performed in a gaming state known as a left-handed hit (normal gaming state). However, they may also be performed when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 210, which is the ball receiving opening. In other words, they may be performed in a gaming state known as a right-handed hit (a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state). They may also be performed when the gaming ball passes through the gate 28, which is the ball receiving opening.

[Modification 2]
In the character selection presentation A of FIG. 74 and the character selection presentation B of FIG. 75, a portion of the upper body image CRE of character E (from the chest to the face) is displayed in the character display area BS2. Character E, which is the upper body image CRE, may perform an action that causes a change to the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9A. For example, character E, which is the upper body image CRE, may fire a light ball from his sword toward the variable icon 9C, causing the variable icon 9C to change to the variable icon 9C' with a higher probability of winning, or may fire it toward the reserved icon 9A as a so-called pre-reading presentation, causing the reserved icon 9A to change to the reserved icon 9A' with a higher probability of winning. Furthermore, in the character selection presentation B of FIG. 75, a portion of the upper body image CRC of character C (from the chest to the face) is displayed in the character display area BS2. Character C, which is the upper body image CRC, may perform an action that causes a change to the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9A. For example, character C, which is an image CRC of the upper body, may fire a ball of light from his sword towards variable icon 9C, causing variable icon 9C to change into variable icon 9C' with a higher chance of winning, or may fire it towards reserve icon 9A as a so-called pre-reading effect, causing reserve icon 9A to change into reserve icon 9A' with a higher chance of winning.

[Modification 3]
In the character selection presentation A of Fig. 74 and the character selection presentation B of Fig. 75, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRE of character E is displayed in character display area BS2. Character E, which is the upper body image CRE, may be displayed as an animation moving around within character display area BS2, or may be displayed as an animation jumping out of character display area BS2 and moving around display screen 7a. For example, a moving image of character E, the upper body image CRE, may appear in the character display area BS2 and move around the display screen 7a, moving toward the variable icon 9C and slashing the variable icon 9C with a sword to change it into a variable icon 9C' with a higher probability of winning, or moving toward the reserved icon 9A displayed in the second reserved display position 9Ad and slashing the reserved icon 9A with a sword to change it into a reserved icon 9A' with a higher probability of winning, or moving toward the left and right display symbols 8L and 8R (the center display symbol 8C is in a variable display (variable display)) that are not aligned with the same number and are displayed as a temporary stop, and slashing the other display symbol with a sword to align them with the same number, forming a reach. Also, in the character selection display B of FIG. 75, a portion of the upper body image CRC of character C (from the chest to the face) is displayed in the character display area BS2. Character C, which is the image CRC of the upper body, may be a moving image moving around within the character display area BS2, or may be a moving image jumping out of the character display area BS2 and moving around the display screen 7a. For example, as a moving image in which character C, which is the image CRC of the upper body, jumps out of the character display area BS2 and moves around the display screen 7a, character C may move toward variable icon 9C, slashing variable icon 9C with a sword and changing it to variable icon 9C' with a higher probability of winning, or, for example, move toward reserved icon 9A displayed at second reserved display position 9Ad, slashing this reserved icon 9A with a sword and changing it to reserved icon 9A' with a higher probability of winning, or, in order to align one of the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R (the center performance symbol 8C is in a variable performance (variable display)) that are not aligned with the same number pattern and are displayed as a temporary stop, character C may move to the other performance symbol and slash with a sword, aligning them with the same number pattern and forming a reach.

[Modification 4]
In the character selection presentation A of FIG. 74 and the character selection presentation B of FIG. 75, a partial image (from the chest to the face) of the upper body image CRE of character E is displayed in the character display area BS2. Character E, which is the upper body image CRE, may be transformed by throwing an item from the character display area BS2 toward the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, or various effect symbols. For example, items may include a sword, a treasure chest, a light ball, an icon, etc. When an item collides with the variable icon 9C, the variable icon 9C becomes difficult to see due to the effect image of the collision. As the effect image disappears, the variable icon 9C appears, and it may change to a variable icon 9C with a higher probability of winning, or it may remain unchanged as the current variable icon 9C. When an item collides with the reserve icon 9A displayed at the second reserve display position 9Ad, the reserve icon 9A becomes difficult to see due to the effect image of the collision, and as the effect image disappears, the reserve icon 9A appears and may change to a reserve icon 9A with a higher expected win probability, or may remain unchanged as the current reserve icon 9A. When an item collides with, for example, a left performance pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped, the left performance pattern 8L becomes difficult to see due to the effect image of the collision, and as the effect image disappears, the left performance pattern 8L appears and changes to a pattern with the same number as the right performance pattern 8L, forming a reach, or may remain as the current left performance pattern 8L without changing to a pattern with the same number as the right performance pattern 8L.

[Modification 5]
In the character selection effect A of Figure 74, the character selection effect B of Figure 75, and the character selection effect C of Additional Figure X3, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are card-type effect patterns as normal effect patterns, and the number patterns (numbers "1" to "9") on the cards are accompanied by character patterns corresponding to the numbers. The number "1" is accompanied by character A, the number "2" is accompanied by character B, the number "3" is accompanied by character C, the number "4" is accompanied by character D, the number "5" is accompanied by character E, the number "6" is accompanied by character F, the number "7" is accompanied by character A (displayed in a different manner from character A attached to number "1"), the number "8" is accompanied by character C (displayed in a different manner from character C attached to number "3"), and the number "9" is accompanied by character G. In this way, character A was attached to the numbers "1" and "2" and overlapped, and character C was attached to the numbers "3" and "8" and overlapped. Seven characters, character A to character G, may be divided into two groups, and a symbol representing each group may be attached to the normal effect pattern. For example, group A includes four characters, character A, character C, character E, and character G (in other words, characters attached to odd-numbered number patterns), and the group symbol "A" is attached to the lower left side of the normal effect pattern, and group B includes three characters, character B, character D, and character F (in other words, characters attached to even-numbered number patterns), and the group symbol "B" is attached to the lower left side of the normal effect pattern.

[Modification 6]
In the character selection effect A of Fig. 74, the character selection effect B of Fig. 75, and the character selection effect C of Fig. 76, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are card-type effect patterns as normal effect patterns, and the card has number patterns (numbers "1" to "9") with character patterns corresponding to the number patterns attached, whereas the card figures and character patterns that make up the normal effect patterns disappear as special effect patterns, and the size of the number patterns is expanded to the extent that they match the size of the character patterns, leaving only the number patterns. However, the configuration of the normal effect patterns and the configuration of the special effect patterns may be interchanged. In other words, the special effect pattern is a card-type effect pattern in which a number pattern (number "1" to number "9") is attached to the character pattern corresponding to the number pattern within the card, while the normal effect pattern may be configured so that the card figures and character patterns that make up the special effect pattern disappear and the number patterns are enlarged to the size of the character patterns, leaving only the number patterns.

[Modification 7]
Character selection display A in Figure 74, character selection display B in Figure 75, and character selection display C in Figure 76 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means for displaying a set of effect symbols that can draw a lottery based on the reception of a gaming ball in a ball receiving port and notify the result of the lottery,
a first effect in which a plurality of option images including a plurality of character images are displayed on the display means and the player operates the operation means to select one option image from the plurality of option images;
a second effect that executes a special effect different from a normal effect when the one option image selected in the first effect is any one of the plurality of character images;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
the second effect executes the normal effect when the one option image selected in the first effect is not any one of the plurality of character images;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
In the special effect, when the character image which is the one option image selected in the first effect is displayed on the display means, it is displayed larger than each effect pattern in the set of effect patterns.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-2 or D1-3,
The first effect can be executed during a period from when each of the effect symbols in the set of effect symbols is displayed in a variable manner to when each of the effect symbols is displayed in a stationary manner, or when a game ball is not received in the ball receiving opening and each of the effect symbols in the set of effect symbols is not displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-2 to D1-4,
In the normal performance, each performance symbol in the set of performance symbols is displayed as a normal performance symbol in which a decorative image is added to a number symbol, and then displayed as a stopped symbol,
In the special effect, each of the effect patterns in the set of effect patterns is displayed as a special effect pattern in which the size of the number pattern among the number pattern and the decorative image constituting the normal effect pattern is enlarged and the number pattern is not included in the decorative pattern, and then the special effect pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern,
The size of the special effect pattern is smaller than the size of the normal effect pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-5,
When the special effect is executed in the second effect, and each of the effect symbols in the set of effect symbols is variably displayed as the special effect symbol and then stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result that the player has lost, the special effect is not executed and the normal effect is executed until the first effect is executed again, and each of the effect symbols in the set of effect symbols is variably displayed as the normal effect symbol and then stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result, thereby executing a third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Display effects A to C produced by the performance device will be explained below using Figures 77 to 79. In Figures 77 to 79, various movable props and decorative components arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as well as the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 arranged in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, may be omitted for clarity of the drawings. Figure 77 is a diagram explaining display effect A produced by the performance device, Figure 78 is a diagram explaining display effect B produced by the performance device, and Figure 79 is a diagram explaining display effect C produced by the performance device.

Here, we will explain the case where the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, which is made of a colorless, transparent, flat plate member, is attached to the game board 2 without being attached to the central opening of the front frame 53. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the game board 2 so that it is positioned between the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the decorative member 10, which is made of a colored, opaque member. As a result, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 → illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 → decorative member 10 are arranged on the game board 2 in the following order moving forward. Furthermore, although the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is positioned in front of the image display device 7, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is approximately one to two times smaller than the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but only a portion of it.

Also, here, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 are formed from a colorless transparent material, and are able to change their own light emission mode by irradiating light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end faces of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14. The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 each have a light-guiding section formed along their outer periphery, and the light-guiding section emits light when irradiated with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end faces of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14, causing their own outer shape (outline) to appear illuminated.

The display effect produced by this effect device is achieved by arranging various movable parts (first movable part 14, second movable part 15, third movable part 17), an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, decorative member 10, etc. in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which displays various images, so as to cover a portion of the display screen 7a. Of the various movable parts, the first specific movable part (first movable part 14, second movable part 15), the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, etc., illuminate the first specific movable part (first movable part 15) of the images displayed on the display screen 7a. It may be possible to implement a performance in which the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second specific movable prop 14, second movable prop 15), illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, etc. can be seen, and it may be possible to implement a performance in which the images displayed on the display screen 7a in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second specific movable prop 14, decorative prop 15, etc. can be made difficult to see through the various movable props, such as the second specific movable prop 17 and decorative prop 10.

In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a display effect by the effect device is included, it reads the corresponding image data from ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, displays the image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable element 15, displays the image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable element 17, or displays the image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10.

The lamp control board 107 also analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if the commands include instructions to execute a display effect using the effect device, it changes the position of the second movable part 15 provided on the gaming board 2, changes the position of the third movable part 17 provided on the gaming board 2, changes the positions of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 formed from a colorless transparent member provided on the gaming board 2, changes the light emission pattern of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 formed from a colorless transparent member provided on the gaming board 2 by irradiating them with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end face of each, or displays an image on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed from a colorless transparent member provided on the gaming board 2 by irradiating it with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18.

The structures of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable part 15, the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable part 17, and the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 are identical to those of the image display device 7. That is, the built-in backlight of the image display device 7 illuminates, thereby making it possible to view various images displayed on the display screen 7a. The built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable part 15 illuminates, thereby making it possible to view various images displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a. The built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable part 17 illuminates, thereby making it possible to view various images displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a. The built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 illuminates, thereby making it possible to view various images displayed on the display screen.

The display effects produced by the performance device are performed using a performance device consisting of an image display device 7, a first movable part 14, a second movable part 15 (a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided on the second movable part 15), a third movable part 17 (a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided on the third movable part 17), an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, a decorative member 10 (a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10), etc.

Furthermore, when multiple movable parts (multiple movable bodies) such as the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and the third movable part 17 are activated, if any one movable part (one movable body) or two movable parts (two movable bodies) among the multiple movable parts (multiple movable bodies) are activated during the variable performance (variable display) of multiple performance symbols, this indicates to the player that there is a higher chance of a win occurring after the variable performance (variable display) of multiple performance symbols has ended (i.e., after the multiple performance symbols have stopped and been displayed), compared to when all of the multiple movable parts (multiple movable bodies) are not activated. For this reason, players are highly interested in the operation of the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and the third movable part 17.

When a predetermined image is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by irradiating it with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the edge of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, this suggests to the player that there is a high probability of a win occurring after the variable effect (variable display) of multiple effect symbols has ended (i.e., after multiple effect symbols have been displayed stationary), compared to when light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is not irradiated from the edge of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 and the predetermined image is not displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. For this reason, players are highly interested in the display of the predetermined image on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18.

Here, we will first provide a brief explanation of the display patterns, then explain display effect A by the display device, display effect B by the display device, and display effect C by the display device in that order.

[Performance design]
On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 77(H), the left stereoscopic image effect pattern 8L, the center stereoscopic image effect pattern 8C, and the right stereoscopic image effect pattern 8R are card-type effect patterns, and within the cards, number patterns (numbers "1" through "9") are accompanied by character patterns corresponding to the number patterns. The number "7" is bright red. The odd numbers "1,""3,""5," and "9" (excluding the number "7") all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2,""4,""6," and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The number patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) are each accompanied by various character patterns in multiple colors (full color), and the character patterns are displayed large as the main effect pattern. For this reason, the size of the number patterns is smaller than the size of the character patterns accompanied by the number patterns. In this way, because the number symbols (odd number symbols and even number symbols) each have a color, for example, when the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R align with the same number symbol to form a provisional stop display, and the effect is then developed, the more times the player experiences effects that develop via reach, the more opportunities the player has to personally discover the relationship (pattern) between the colors of the provisionally displayed number symbols and the developed effect.In this way, the fact that the number symbols (odd number symbols and even number symbols) each have a color can contribute to increasing interest.

Specifically, the character A is attached to the number "1," the character B to the number "2," the character C to the number "3," the character D to the number "4," the character E to the number "5," the character F to the number "6," the character A (displayed in a different manner from the character A attached to the number "1") to the number "7," the character C (displayed in a different manner from the character C attached to the number "3") to the number "8," and the character G to the number "9." In this way, the character A is attached to the numbers "1" and "2," respectively, and the character C is attached to the numbers "3" and "8," respectively, respectively, but the display manner of the character designs is different.

The left stereoscopic image effect pattern 8L, the center stereoscopic image effect pattern 8C, and the right stereoscopic image effect pattern 8R are displayed in their respective variable areas from top to bottom of the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) of the effect patterns begins in a display mode in which the reels spin in the following order: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ...

When the effect pattern change (changing display) begins, the stopped effect pattern first moves slowly (at a low speed) upwards in a floating display mode for a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 millimeters) (in other words, the stopped display of the effect pattern is released, and the effect pattern enters a display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases its speed downwards, changing from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and changing at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the effect pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent effect pattern as it changes at high speed. The effect pattern slows down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state and appearing temporarily stopped, or displayed as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, then displayed as stopped). When in a temporarily stopped state, the effect pattern moves slowly up and down in small increments.

To briefly explain the variable icons and hold icons, for example, as shown in Figure 77 (A), the variable icons 9C corresponding to the left performance pattern 8L, middle performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special chart hold is consumed are displayed (placed) in the variable display position 9Cd (above a rectangular image (base image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the variable display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided for the first special chart hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) in each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above a rectangular image (base image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stored. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd and moving towards the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Note that while both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, they may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimension is the same for both). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable symbol display (variable display), the first special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special symbols held based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols held based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, at the upper right side of the display screen 7a. These numbers represent the number of reserved balls, making them less likely to be confused by the various background and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a and more intuitively understandable. These numbers are always displayed and positioned in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and are also positioned at the forefront of the display screen 7a while other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

[Display effect A by effect device]
Next, the display performance A by the performance device will be explained with reference to Figure 77. As shown in Figure 77 (A), a city image HG1 is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable performance (variable display) of the performance symbol has begun. At this time, the second movable role device 15 and the third movable role device 17 are both stationary in the retracted position, and no images are displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided for the second movable role device 15 and the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided for the third movable role device 17.

After that, as shown in Figure 77 (B), the second movable device 15 begins to move from the retracted position toward the advanced position (the center position of the display screen 7a), and an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided with the second movable device 15. This image is identical to the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable device 15, based on the position of the second movable device 15. In other words, the first image, which is the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the second movable device 15 moving in front of the display screen 7a, is obstructed by the second movable device 15. Therefore, this obstructed image, the first image, is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided with the second movable device 15, and the first image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed through the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided with the second movable device 15. When the second movable device 15 begins to move from the retracted position to the advanced position, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided on the second movable device 15 is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the center effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display).

In addition, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the arm member 15b is made difficult to see via the arm member 15b (which is colored, opaque, and has a decorative design) that moves the second movable device 15 from the retracted position to the advanced position (the center position of the display screen 7a).

After that, when the second movable device 15 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position (the center position of the display screen 7a), a blinking flash image IG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds), in a display mode in which a single lightning bolt runs from the top right to the bottom left of the display screen 7a (the flash image IG1 displayed in a display mode in which a single lightning bolt runs is a moving image (video)). At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable device 15 is the city image HG1, which is the background image, the center effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display), and the flash image IG1.

Thereafter, when the second movable part 15 reaches the advanced position (the center position of the display screen 7a) from the retracted position and comes to a standstill, as shown in FIG. 77(C), the third movable part 17 starts moving from the retracted position toward the advanced position. As a result, based on the position of the third movable part 17, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable part 17 is blocked by the third movable part 17. In other words, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the third movable part 17 moving in front of the display screen 7a, is blocked by the third movable part 17. This blocked second image is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable part 17, and the second image can be made difficult to see through the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable part 17. At this time, the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the left performance pattern 8L during the changing performance (changing display).

After that, blinking flash images IG2, IG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds), with two lightning bolts running from the upper left to the lower right of the display screen 7a (the flash images IG2, IG2 displayed in the two lightning bolt running mode are moving images). At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a of the second movable device 15, which is stationary in the advanced position (center position of the display screen 7a) (i.e., the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable device 15) is the city image HG1, which is the background image, the center effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display), and the two flash images IG2, IG2. In contrast, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a attached to the third movable device 17, which is moving towards the advance position, still shows no image, so the second image (i.e., the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17) is still obstructed by the third movable device 17 and difficult to see. In Figure 77 (C), the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the left performance pattern 8L during the variable performance (variable display).

After that, the flash images IG2, IG2 disappear from the display screen 7a, and the third movable part 17 reaches the advanced position from the retracted position and comes to a stationary state (the advanced position of the third movable part 17 is a position where the third movable part 17 and the second movable part 15 do not overlap (do not interfere) with each other in the front-to-back direction when the second movable part 15 is stopped at its advanced position (the center position of the display screen 7a), and the right end of the third movable part 17 and the left end of the second movable part 15 are separated by a predetermined distance (for example, 10 mm). 77(D), on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable prop 17, rather than on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a blinking flash image IG3 is displayed as the third image for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a in a display mode in which a single lightning bolt runs from top to bottom on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a (the flash image IG3 displayed in a display mode in which a single lightning bolt runs is a moving image (video)). Even at this point, because the blinking flash image IG3 is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable prop 17, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable prop 17 is difficult to see through the third movable prop 17. In Figure 77 (D), the second image is the city image HG1 which is the background image, the left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (variable display), the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad (if a hold icon 9A is present at the third hold display position 9Ad or the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A is also included). In this way, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable device 17 does not display the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17, but instead displays a third image, a blinking flash image IG3 which is completely different from the second image.

The third image was a flashing image IG3, which indicated the expected probability of winning for the change (the expected probability of winning for the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R during the change performance (change display) by the change icon 9C) depending on the type of image. The types of images were different from the second image and included flashing images, item images, mini character images, and super hot text images, with the expected probability of winning increasing in the order of flashing image → item image → mini character image → super hot text image (high probability of winning).

After that, the flashing image IG3 disappears from the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a, and as shown in Figure 77(E), the second movable device 15 begins to move from the advanced position (the center position of the display screen 7a) toward the retracted position, and the third movable device 17 also begins to move from its advanced position toward the retracted position. At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided for the second movable device 15 moving toward the retracted position (i.e., the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable device 15) is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the center effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display). In contrast, no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a attached to the third movable device 17, which is moving towards the retracted position, so the second image (i.e., the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17) is still obstructed by the third movable device 17 and difficult to see. Note that in Figure 77 (E), the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the left performance pattern 8L during the variable performance (variable display).

After that, the second movable device 15 returns to the retracted position and becomes stationary, and the third movable device 17 returns to the retracted position and becomes stationary. As shown in Figure 77 (F), first, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with the bright green number "1" symbol 8La and the character symbol 8Lb attached, and then the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with the bright green number "1" symbol 8La and the character symbol 8Lb attached, and the middle effect symbol 8C enters a variable effect (variable display), and the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R align to form the same symbol and temporarily stop, forming a reach. Alternatively, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be displayed as a temporary stop symbol at the same time, causing the middle effect symbol 8C to enter a variable effect (variable display), and the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R align to form the same symbol and temporarily stop, forming a reach.

When a reach is reached, the game progresses to a battle presentation, as shown in Figure 77 (G). In the battle presentation, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB battle in the center of the display screen 7a, a presentation in which the expected probability of winning is preset high. In the battle presentation, the left presentation symbol 8L, the center presentation symbol 8C, and the right presentation symbol 8R are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A are hidden from the display screen 7a (disappear from the display screen 7a), and the background image switches from the city image HG1 to the battle-specific background image HG4. Furthermore, even when the battle performance has progressed, the number of reserved balls described above is displayed as a numerical value, with the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 displayed as blue numbers on the left side and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 displayed as red numbers on the right side, spaced apart from each other, on the top right side of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle performance, as shown in FIG. 77(H), the background image returns (switches) from the battle-specific background image HG4 to the city image HG1 again, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left performance pattern 8L is displayed temporarily stopped with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La attached to the character pattern 8Lb,
The center effect symbol 8C is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright blue number "2" symbol 8Ca and a character symbol 8Cb attached, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright green number "1" symbol 8La and a character symbol 8Lb attached, and then they are displayed as stopped at the same timing, and the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R do not line up with the same symbol (here, the number "1"), and a miss is confirmed. As a result, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In addition, when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB in the battle performance, the left performance symbol 8L, the center performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are temporarily displayed as the same symbol (here, the number "1"), and then are displayed as stopped at the same timing, and the left performance symbol 8L, the center performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are aligned as the same symbol (here, the number "1"), and a win is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and then a winning game begins in which the player is awarded a profit.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in Figure 77 (I), the variable display of the effect pattern begins, and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a display mode that changes rapidly. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state results in which only one hold icon 9A remains stocked without being consumed.

If the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R do not all line up and stop, a loss is confirmed; however, if the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all line up and stop, a win is confirmed, and a winning game begins in which the player is awarded a profit.

In this way, in display performance A by the performance device, when the second movable device 15 begins to move, based on the position of the second movable device 15, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable device 15, is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable device 15, so that the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable device 15, can be viewed through the second movable device 15. In contrast, when the third movable device 17 begins to move, based on the position of the third movable device 17, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable device 17, so that the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17, can be made difficult to see through the third movable device 17.

In addition, the image display device 7 displays an image on the display screen 7a by illuminating its own built-in backlight, and the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable device 15 displays an image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a by illuminating its own built-in backlight.Furthermore, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable device 15, is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a by illuminating the built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable device 15.Therefore, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable device 15, can be viewed through the second movable device 15.

In contrast, the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable device 17 is designed so that an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a by illuminating its own built-in backlight, but the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a whether the built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable device 17 is illuminated or not.As a result, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17, can be made difficult to see through the third movable device 17.

[Display effect B by effect device]
Next, the display effect B by the effect device will be described with reference to FIG. 78. As shown in FIG. 78(A), a city image HG1 is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect pattern variation effect (variable display) has begun. At this time, the image displayed by the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed of a colorless transparent member is not displayed. Also, no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10, which is disposed on the lower right side of the front of the image display device 7 and covers the lower right area of the display screen 7a (part of the display screen 7a). The decorative member 10 is disposed on the lower right side of the front of the image display device 7 and is fixed in a manner that covers the lower right area of the display screen 7a (part of the display screen 7a).

As mentioned above, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is positioned in front of the image display device 7. However, because the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is approximately one to two times smaller than the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but only a portion of it. Furthermore, because the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is made of a colorless, transparent material, even when a predetermined image is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by irradiating it with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the edge of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18.

The decorative member 10 is made of a colored, opaque member and is positioned on the front, lower right side of the image display device 7, and also in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. In other words, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 → illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 → decorative member 10 are arranged on the game board 2 in the order moving forward. Therefore, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is obstructed by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see, and the image displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 may also be obstructed by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see.

78(B), an image of the ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by irradiating light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from an end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. Although the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is disposed on the front side of the image display device 7, it is formed of a colorless and transparent member, so that even when the ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 can be viewed through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. In other words, even when the ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, which is an image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 arranged in front of the display screen 7a, among the images displayed on the display screen 7a, and which is formed from a colorless transparent material, the first image is not completely blocked by the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, and this first image can be viewed through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18.

At this time, the first image that can be seen through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 on which the ally character CRA is displayed is the city image HG1 which is the background image, the left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (variable display), the middle effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display), the right effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (variable display), the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the number of reserved balls mentioned above as a number (the number of first special chart reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special chart reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the top right side of the display screen 7a).

In contrast, decorative member 10 is formed from a colored, opaque member and is positioned on the front, lower right side of image display device 7, covering the lower right region of display screen 7a (part of display screen 7a). Therefore, decorative member 10 obscures the image displayed in the area of display screen 7a of image display device 7 that corresponds to the area behind decorative member 10. In other words, decorative member 10 obscures the second image, which is the image displayed on the display screen 7a of image display device 7 in the area of display screen 7a that corresponds to decorative member 10, which is positioned on the front, lower right side of image display device 7 and covers the lower right region of display screen 7a (part of display screen 7a). This obscured second image is not displayed at all on the display screen of sub-LCD device (LCD panel) 13 provided on decorative member 10, making it difficult to see the second image through decorative member 10. In this case, the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the right-side effect pattern 8R during the changing effect (changing display). As of Figure 78 (B), no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10.

Furthermore, because the decorative member 10 is positioned in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 may be blocked by the decorative member 10. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is configured to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating it with LED light from its edge. The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is configured to display multiple types of images in multiple colors by varying the irradiation direction and color of the LED light. For this reason, the image displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 may be blocked by the decorative member 10.

78(C), while the image of the ally character CRA is still displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by illuminating it with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, a large image of the upper body of the ally character CRA in winged human form is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 as a third image. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is obstructed by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to view through the decorative member 10, while the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 displays a large image of the upper body of the ally character CRA in winged human form as a third image. Furthermore, when the image displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is obstructed by the decorative member 10, it is difficult to view. 78(C), the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the right-hand effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (variable display). In this way, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 does not display the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, but displays a third image, which is the upper half of the winged-man-like ally character CRA, which is completely different from the second image.

The third image was a mini-character image of the winged ally character CRA, and depending on the type of image, it suggested the likelihood of winning for the corresponding variation (the likelihood of winning for the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R during the variation performance (variation display) by the variation icon 9C). The types of images were different from the second image and included flashing images, item images, mini-character images, and super hot text images, with the likelihood of winning increasing in the order of flashing image → item image → mini-character image → super hot text image (high probability of winning).

Then, as shown in FIG. 78(D), while the image of the ally character CRA remains displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by illuminating it with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the edge of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the flashing light FL travels in a counterclockwise elliptical orbit, entering the display screen 7a from the outside of the bottom edge and slightly to the right of the center, passing toward the right edge of the display screen 7a, and then flying out from the outside of the right edge of the display screen 7a. Then, it again travels in from the outside of the top edge and slightly to the right of the center of the top edge, entering the display screen 7a, stopping near the center of the display screen 7a and exploding (the flashing light FL is a moving image (video)). The flashing light FL is positioned in front of the city image HG1, which is the background image, and is displayed behind the various effect symbols during the changing effect (changing display). When the flash FL is displayed on the display screen 7a, the first image that can be seen through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 on which the ally character CRA is displayed comprises the city image HG1 as the background image, the flash FL, the left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (variable display), the middle effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display), the right effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (variable display), the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and the number of reserved balls mentioned above as a number (the number of first special chart reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special chart reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the top right side of the display screen 7a).

In contrast, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is a background image of a city image HG1, a flashing light FL, and a right-hand effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (variable display). Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is obstructed by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10, while the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 still displays a large image of the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image. Furthermore, because the decorative member 10 is located in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 may be obstructed by the decorative member 10. Thus, even at this point, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 does not display the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, but instead displays a third image, which is completely different from the second image and shows the upper half of the winged ally character CRA.

78(E), while the image of the ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by irradiating it with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the left performance symbol 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright green number "1" symbol 8La and a character symbol 8Lb attached, and then the right performance symbol 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright blue number "2" symbol 8Ra and a character symbol 8Rb attached, and then the center performance symbol 8C is displayed as a temporary stop with a bright green number "3" symbol 8Ca and a character symbol 8Cb attached. Note that the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R may be displayed as temporary stop symbols simultaneously, and then the center performance symbol 8C may be displayed as a temporary stop symbol.

When the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, the first image that can be seen through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 on which the ally character CRA is displayed is the city image HG1 which is the background image, the left effect symbol 8L which is temporarily stopped, the middle effect symbol 8C which is temporarily stopped, the right effect symbol 8R which is temporarily stopped, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, and the number of reserved balls mentioned above as a number (the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the top right side of the display screen 7a).

In contrast, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1, which is the background image. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is obstructed by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10, while the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 displays a large image of the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image. Furthermore, because the decorative member 10 is located in front of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the image displayed in the area of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 may be obstructed by the decorative member 10. Thus, even at this point, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 does not display the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, but instead displays a third image, which is completely different from the second image and shows the upper half of the winged ally character CRA.

Then, as shown in Figure 78 (F), the illumination of light from the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is stopped, causing the image of the ally character CRA to disappear from the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (to disappear from the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18), and the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image displayed large on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10, is hidden (the third image disappears from the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10). Then, at the same timing, the left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, but do not line up to form the same pattern, confirming a miss. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

At this time, because the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is formed from a colorless and transparent material, the first image that can be seen through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is the background image city image HG1, the stopped left effect symbol 8L, the stopped middle effect symbol 8C, the stopped right effect symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the reserved icon 9A, and the number of reserved balls mentioned above as a number (the number of first special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed as blue numbers on the left, and the number of second special symbols reserved based on game balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed as red numbers on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a). In contrast, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the background image city image HG1.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in Figure 78 (G), the variable display of the effect pattern begins, and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a display mode that changes rapidly. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and a state results in which only one hold icon 9A remains stocked without being consumed.

If the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R do not all line up and stop, a loss is confirmed; however, if the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all line up and stop, a win is confirmed, and a winning game begins in which the player is awarded a profit.

In this way, in display effect B by the effect device, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 → illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 → decorative member 10 are arranged on the game board 2 from front to back in this order. Therefore, when an ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, can be seen through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 because the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is made of a colorless, transparent member. In contrast, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 because the decorative member 10 is made of a colored, opaque member.

In addition, the image display device 7 displays an image on the display screen 7a by illuminating its own built-in backlight, and the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 displays an image by irradiating light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from its end face (by emitting light from the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors)). Because the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is made of a colorless and transparent material, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, can be seen through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 even when an image is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18.

In contrast, the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 is designed to display an image on its display screen by illuminating its own built-in backlight, but the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, regardless of whether the built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 is illuminated. Therefore, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is difficult to see through the decorative member 10 because the decorative member 10 is made of a colored, opaque material.

[Display effect C by effect device]
Next, the display effect C by the effect device will be described with reference to FIG. 79. As shown in FIG. 79(A), a city image HG1 is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect pattern variable effect (variable display) has begun. At this time, the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R of the first movable part 14, formed of a colorless transparent member provided on the game board 2, are both stationary in the retracted position, the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end face of the left-side movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 has stopped emitting light, and the left-side movable part 14L itself is turned off. At the same time, the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end face of the right-side movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 has stopped emitting light, and the right-side movable part 14R itself is turned off. Additionally, no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10, which is disposed on the lower right side of the front of the image display device 7 and covers the lower right area of the display screen 7a (part of the display screen 7a). The decorative member 10 is disposed on the lower right side of the front of the image display device 7 and is fixed in a manner that covers the lower right area of the display screen 7a (part of the display screen 7a).

As mentioned above, the left and right movable parts 14L and 14R of the first movable part 14 each have a light-guiding section formed along their outer periphery, and when light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is irradiated from the end faces of the left and right movable parts 14L and 14R of the first movable part 14, the light-guiding section emits light, causing the outer shape (outline) of the part to appear illuminated.

Furthermore, although the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 are capable of advancing forward of the image display device 7, they are formed from a colorless, transparent material, so that the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R can be viewed through the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R of the first movable part 14. The decorative member 10 is formed from a colored, opaque material and is positioned on the front, lower right side of the image display device 7, and is also positioned in front of the right-side movable part 14R of the first movable part 14. In other words, they are arranged on the game board 2 in the following order, moving forward: display screen 7a of the image display device 7 → right-side movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 → decorative member 10. As a result, the image displayed on the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is obstructed by the decorative member 10 rather than the right-side movable element 14R of the first movable element 14, which is made of a colorless transparent material, making it difficult to see.

79(B), the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R each start to move (in the direction approaching each other) toward an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this point in time, the light from the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end face of the left-side movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 has stopped, and the left-side movable part 14L itself is turned off, and the light from the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end face of the right-side movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 has stopped, and the right-side movable part 14R itself is turned off. Because the left-side movable role piece 14L and the right-side movable role piece 14R are formed from a colorless transparent member, even when the left-side movable role piece 14L and the right-side movable role piece 14R have started to move and appeared on the display screen 7a, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left-side movable role piece 14L and the right-side movable role piece 14R can be viewed through the left-side movable role piece 14L and the right-side movable role piece 14R. In other words, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the left-side movable role piece 14L and the right-side movable role piece 14R arranged in front of the display screen 7a, can be viewed through the left-side movable role piece 14L and the right-side movable role piece 14R formed from a colorless transparent member. At this time, the first image that can be seen through the left-side movable role element 14L and the right-side movable role element 14R is the city image HG1, which is the background image, the left-side effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (variable display), the center effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display), and the right-side effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (variable display). Note that if the size of the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9A is one or two times larger than the normal size to suggest the likelihood of winning, the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9A may be included in the first image. In this embodiment, since the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are normal size, they do not suggest the likelihood of winning and are not included in the first image.

In contrast, decorative member 10 is formed from a colored, opaque member and is positioned on the front, lower right side of image display device 7, covering the lower right region of display screen 7a (part of display screen 7a). Therefore, decorative member 10 obscures the image displayed in the area of display screen 7a of image display device 7 that corresponds to the area behind decorative member 10. In other words, decorative member 10 obscures the second image, which is the image displayed on the display screen 7a of image display device 7 in the area of display screen 7a that corresponds to decorative member 10, which is positioned on the front, lower right side of image display device 7 and covers the lower right region of display screen 7a (part of display screen 7a). This obscured second image is not displayed at all on the display screen of sub-LCD device (LCD panel) 13 provided on decorative member 10, making it difficult to see the second image through decorative member 10. In this case, the second image is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the right-side effect pattern 8R during the changing effect (changing display). As of Figure 79 (B), no image is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10.

Then, as shown in Figure 79 (C), at the front (front) central position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a, the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative element (combined part) with the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R. As a result, the outer shape (outline) of the left movable part 14L itself is illuminated in a predetermined color by light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) irradiated from the end face of the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14, and the outer shape (outline) of the right movable part 14R itself is illuminated in a predetermined color by light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) irradiated from the end face of the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14. The "predetermined color" indicates the probability of winning in the corresponding variation, and the probability of winning increases in the following order: blue → green → red → purple → yellow (gold) → rainbow (high probability of winning). In this embodiment, the "predetermined color" is blue. When a combined role is formed by the left-side movable role element 14L and the right-side movable role element 14R, the entire role is lit in a predetermined color (i.e., the left-side movable role element 14L and the right-side movable role element 14R are the same color). Alternatively, when a combined role is formed by the left-side movable role element 14L and the right-side movable role element 14R, the left-side movable role element 14L and the right-side movable role element 14R may be lit in different colors. This can suggest to the player that a change in the probability of winning has occurred by creating a sense of incongruity using the colors of the left-side movable role element 14L and the right-side movable role element 14R.

Even when a combined role is formed by the left movable role element 14L and the right movable role element 14R and the entire role is lit up in a predetermined color (blue), the left movable role element 14L and the right movable role element 14R are formed from a colorless and transparent member, so that the images displayed in the areas of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable role element 14L and the rear of the right movable role element 14R can be viewed through the left movable role element 14L and the right movable role element 14R. In other words, even when a combined role is formed by the left movable role element 14L and the right movable role element 14R and the entire role is lit up in a predetermined color (blue), the first image, which is the image displayed in the areas of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the left movable role element 14L and the right movable role element 14R arranged in front of the display screen 7a, can be viewed through the left movable role element 14L and the right movable role element 14R, which are formed from a colorless and transparent member. At this time, the first image that can be viewed through the left-side movable device 14L and the right-side movable device 14R is the city image HG1, which is the background image, the left-side performance pattern 8L during the changing performance (changing display), the middle performance pattern 8C during the changing performance (changing display), and the right-side performance pattern 8R during the changing performance (changing display).

Furthermore, when a combined reel is formed by the left-side movable reel 14L and the right-side movable reel 14R, the upper half of the ally character CRA in winged form is displayed large as the third image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative element 10. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative element 10 is obstructed by the decorative element 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative element 10, whereas the upper half of the ally character CRA in winged form, which is the third image, is displayed large on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative element 10. Note that the second image, in Figure 79 (C), is the city image HG1, which is the background image, and the right-side effect pattern 8R during the changing effect (changing display). In this way, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 does not display the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, but instead displays a third image, which is completely different from the second image and shows the upper half of the winged ally character CRA.

The third image was a mini-character image of the winged ally character CRA, and depending on the type of image, it suggested the likelihood of winning for the corresponding variation (the likelihood of winning for the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R during the variation performance (variation display) by the variation icon 9C). The types of images were different from the second image and included flashing images, item images, mini-character images, and super hot text images, with the likelihood of winning increasing in the order of flashing image → item image → mini-character image → super hot text image (high probability of winning).

Then, as shown in Figure 79 (D), the flash FL travels in a counterclockwise elliptical orbit, entering the display screen 7a from the outside of the bottom edge and slightly to the right of the center of the bottom edge, passing toward the right edge of the display screen 7a and flying out to the outside of the right edge of the display screen 7a, before again flying in from the outside of the top edge and slightly to the right of the center of the top edge of the display screen 7a and stopping near the center of the display screen 7a and exploding (the flash FL is a moving image (video)). The flash FL is positioned in front of the city image HG1, which is the background image, and is displayed behind the various performance symbols during the changing performance (changing display). When the flashing light FL is displayed on the display screen 7a, a combined device is formed by the left movable device 14L and the right movable device 14R, and the entire device lights up in a specified color (blue), and the first image that can be seen through the left movable device 14L and the right movable device 14R is the background image city image HG1, the flashing light FL, the left effect pattern 8L during the changing effect (changing display), the center effect pattern 8C during the changing effect (changing display), and the right effect pattern 8R during the changing effect (changing display).

In contrast, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is a background image of a city image HG1, a flashing light FL, and a right-hand effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (variable display). Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is obstructed by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10, while the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 displays a large third image, the upper half of the winged ally character CRA. Thus, even at this point, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 does not display the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, and instead displays a third image, the upper half of the winged ally character CRA, which is completely different from the second image.

Then, as shown in Figure 79 (E), first the left effect pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb attached, then the right effect pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra and the character pattern 8Rb attached, and then the middle effect pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop with the bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb attached. Note that the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R may be displayed as temporary stops simultaneously, and then the middle effect pattern 8C may be displayed as a temporary stop.

When the left performance symbol 8L, middle performance symbol 8C, and right performance symbol 8R are displayed in a temporarily stopped state on the display screen 7a, even when a combined role is formed by the left movable role element 14L and the right movable role element 14R and the entirety is lit in a specified color (blue), the first image that can be seen through the left movable role element 14L and the right movable role element 14R is the background image, city image HG1, the left performance symbol 8L displayed in a temporarily stopped state, the middle performance symbol 8C displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the right performance symbol 8R displayed in a temporarily stopped state.

In contrast, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1, which is the background image. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is obstructed by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10, while the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 displays a large third image, the upper half of the ally character CRA in winged human form. Thus, even at this point, the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 does not display the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, but instead displays a third image, the upper half of the ally character CRA in winged human form, which is completely different from the second image.

After that, a combined reel is formed by the left-side movable reel 14L and the right-side movable reel 14R, and the entire reel lights up in a specified color (blue). From this state, the left-side movable reel 14L and the right-side movable reel 14R begin to move away from each other, with the left-side movable reel 14L starting to move from an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward their respective retracted positions. At this time, the first image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left-side movable reel 14L and right-side movable reel 14R moving toward their respective retracted positions is a city image HG1 (background image), a left performance symbol 8L (temporarily stopped), and a center performance symbol 8C (temporarily stopped) for the left-side movable reel 14L moving toward its retracted position; and a city image HG1 (background image), a center performance symbol 8C (temporarily stopped), and a right performance symbol 8R (temporarily stopped) for the right-side movable reel 14R moving toward its retracted position.

In contrast, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is the city image HG1, which is the background image. Even at this point, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 is obstructed by the decorative member 10 and is difficult to see through the decorative member 10, while the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10 displays a large image of the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(F), when the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R return to their respective retracted positions and become stationary, the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R each light up in a predetermined color (blue), and the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end face of the left-side movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 stops emitting light, and the left-side movable part 14L itself turns off, and the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light) from the end face of the right-side movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 stops emitting light. The light from the display (full-color LED) stops emitting light, the right-side movable role object 14R itself goes out, and the upper body of the winged ally character CRA, which is the third image displayed large on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10, goes out of view (the third image disappears from the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided on the decorative member 10), and then, at the same timing, the left performance pattern 8L, the center performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, but do not line up to form the same pattern, and a miss is confirmed. Accordingly, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R return to their respective retracted positions and become stationary, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R is displayed in a colorless and transparent material, and the first image that can be seen through the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R is a city image HG1, which is a background image (not shown). The second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative element 10, is the city image HG1, which is a background image.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, as shown in Figure 79 (G), the variable display (variable display) of the effect pattern begins, and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R all change (simultaneously) from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state, resulting in a display mode that changes rapidly. When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd, a state results in which no hold icons 9A are consumed and there are no stocked hold icons 9A.

If the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R do not all line up and stop, a loss is confirmed; however, if the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all line up and stop, a win is confirmed, and a winning game begins in which the player is awarded a profit.

In this way, in display performance C by the performance device, when the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are lit in a predetermined color (blue), the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R, can be seen through the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R, because the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are made of a colorless, transparent material. In contrast, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10, because the decorative member 10 is made of a colored, opaque material.

In addition, the image display device 7 displays an image on the display screen 7a by illuminating its own built-in backlight, and the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 is irradiated with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) from the end face (of the first movable part 14) of the first movable part 14 (the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is irradiated), so that the outer shape (outline) of the left movable part 14L itself is lit up and displayed in a predetermined color, and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 is irradiated with light from an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) (the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is irradiated). By doing so, the outer shape (outline) of the right-side movable part 14R itself is lit up in a predetermined color, and the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R, can be seen through the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R, even when the outer shape (outline) of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R is lit up in a predetermined color, because the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are formed from colorless transparent materials.

In contrast, the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 is designed to display an image on its display screen by illuminating its own built-in backlight, but the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10, is not displayed at all on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10, regardless of whether the built-in backlight of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 is illuminated. Therefore, the second image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member, is difficult to see through the decorative member 10 because the decorative member 10 is made of a colored, opaque material.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the display effects produced by the effect device.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in display presentation A by the presentation device of Figure 77, display presentation B by the presentation device of Figure 78, and display presentation C by the presentation device of Figure 79, an image display device 7 (display means) is provided that can display various images (multiple types of images) such as background images such as city image HG1, left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, right presentation pattern 8R, hold icon 9A, and variable icon 9C on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to display left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R (a set of presentation patterns) that can notify the result of the winning or losing game, such as ``win'' or ``lose'', on the display screen 7a.

In display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77, a second movable role element 15 (first performance device) is positioned in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover part of the display screen 7a, and a third movable role element 17 (second performance device) is positioned at a different position from the second movable role element 15 (first performance device) so as to cover part of the display screen 7a. It is possible to execute a performance in which the image displayed on the display screen 7a is visible through the second movable role element 15 (first performance device), and the image displayed on the display screen 7a is difficult to see through the third movable role element 17 (second performance device) (Figures 77 (C) to (E) in display performance A by the performance device). With this configuration, the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed through the second movable role device 15 (first performance device), but can be made difficult to view through the third movable role device 17 (second performance device). Therefore, without having to go to the trouble of creating both visible and difficult-to-view images, it is possible to easily create visible and difficult-to-view images using the second movable role device 15 (first performance device) and the third movable role device 17 (second performance device) while displaying the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, providing players with a novel performance. This can therefore increase interest.

In display performance B by the performance device of Fig. 78, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device) is placed in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover a portion of the display screen 7a, and a decorative member 10 (second performance device) is placed in a position different from the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device) so as to cover a portion of the display screen 7a. It is possible to execute a performance in which the image displayed on the display screen 7a is visible through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device), and the image displayed on the display screen 7a is made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second performance device) (Figs. 78(B) to (E) in display performance B by the performance device). With this configuration, an image can be viewed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), but can be made difficult to view through the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Therefore, without the need to create both a visible image and an inconspicuous image, it is possible to easily create a visible image and an inconspicuous image using the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) and the decorative member 10 (second effect device) while displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, thereby providing the player with a novel effect. This can therefore increase the player's interest.

In display performance C using the performance device of Figure 79, the left-side movable role element 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role element 14R (first performance device) are positioned in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover a portion of the display screen 7a, and decorative elements 10 (second performance device) are positioned in different positions on the (first performance device) and the right-side movable role element 14R (first performance device) so as to cover a portion of the display screen 7a. It is possible to execute a performance in which the image displayed on the display screen 7a is visible through the left-side movable role element 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role element 14R (first performance device), and the image displayed on the display screen 7a is made difficult to see through the decorative elements 10 (second performance device) (Figures 79 (B) to (E) in display performance B using the performance device). With this configuration, the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be viewed through the left-side movable role element 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role element 14R (first performance device), but can be made difficult to view through the decorative element 10 (second performance device). Therefore, without the need to create both visible and difficult-to-view images, the image can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left-side movable role element 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role element 14R (first performance device) and the decorative element 10 (second performance device) can be used to easily create visible and difficult-to-view images, providing players with a novel effect. This increases the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the presentation in display presentation A by the presentation device of Figure 77 makes the first image (for example, in Figure 77 (C), the city image HG1, the middle presentation pattern 8C during the variable presentation (variable display), and the two flashing images IG2, IG2) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable device 15 (first presentation device) visible through the second movable device 15 (first presentation device), and the second image (for example, in Figure 77 (C), the city image HG1 which is the background image, and the left presentation pattern 8L during the variable presentation (variable display)) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17 (second presentation device) difficult to see through the third movable device 17 (second presentation device). According to this configuration, of the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image can be made visible through the second movable device 15 (first performance device), while the second image can be made difficult to see through the third movable device 17 (second performance device).Therefore, even if an image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it can be presented to the player as an image with a different impression through the second movable device 15 (first performance device) or the third movable device 17 (second performance device).

The display performance B by the performance device of Figure 78 makes the first image (for example, in Figure 78 (C), the city image HG1, the left performance pattern 8L during the changing performance (changing display), the middle performance pattern 8C during the changing performance (changing display), the right performance pattern 8R during the changing performance (changing display), the changing display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the changing icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, etc.) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device) visible through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device), and the second image (for example, in Figure 78 (C), the city image HG1, the right performance pattern 8R during the changing performance (changing display)) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second performance device) difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second performance device). According to this configuration, of the images displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image can be made visible through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first presentation device), while the second image can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second presentation device).Therefore, even if an image is displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it can be presented to the player as an image with a different impression through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first presentation device) or the decorative member 10 (second presentation device).

The display effect C by the effect device of Figure 79 is a first image (for example, in Figure 79 (C), a city image HG1, a left effect pattern 8L during the variable effect (variable display), a center effect pattern 8C during the variable effect (variable display), a right effect pattern 8R during the variable effect (variable display), a variable display position 9Cd, a hold display position 9Ad, etc.) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of each of the left movable role element 14L (first effect device) and the right movable role element 14R (first effect device) The second image (for example, in Figure 79 (C), the city image HG1, the right performance pattern 8R during the variable performance (variable display)) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second performance device) can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second performance device). With this configuration, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image can be seen through the left movable role element 14L (first performance device) and the right movable role element 14R (first performance device), while the second image can be made difficult to see through the decorative element 10 (second performance device). Therefore, even if the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it can be presented to the player as an image that gives a different impression through the left movable role element 14L (first performance device) and the right movable role element 14R (first performance device) and the decorative element 10 (second performance device).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77, the second movable role 15 (first performance device) has a built-in backlight (first light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable role 15 (first performance device). The performance in the display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77 is such that the first image can be viewed through the second movable role 15 (first performance device) when the built-in backlight (first light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable role 15 (first performance device) is lit. Specifically, when the first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable role device 15 (first performance device) that is blocked by the second movable role device 15 (first performance device) is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable role device 15 (first performance device), the first image is made visible by illuminating the built-in backlight (first light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable role device 15 (first performance device). According to this configuration, when the built-in backlight (first light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable role 15 (first performance device) is illuminated, the first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable role 15 (first performance device) can be displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable role 15 (first performance device), so that the player can view the first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable role 15 (first performance device) through the second movable role 15 (first performance device).

In display performance B by the performance device of Fig. 78, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device) has an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) (first light-emitting means) that irradiates light from an end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. The performance in display performance B by the performance device of Fig. 78 is such that the first image can be viewed through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device) when the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) (first light-emitting means) irradiated from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is emitting light. Specifically, even when an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) is emitted from the end face of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 formed from a colorless transparent material and an image of an ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 by irradiating it with light, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area corresponding to the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 located in front of the display screen 7a (in other words, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18), is not obstructed by the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, and this first image can be viewed through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. According to this configuration, when an LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) (first light-emitting means) that emits light from the end face of an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device) formed from a colorless transparent material is illuminated, the ally character CRA is displayed on the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, but the first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device) can be viewed through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device) formed from a colorless transparent material.

In display performance C using the performance device of Figure 79, the left-side movable role piece 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role piece 14R (first performance device) have LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) (first light-emitting means) that emit light from the respective end faces of the left-side movable role piece 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role piece 14R (first performance device). The performance in display performance C using the performance device of Figure 79 is such that the first image can be viewed through the left-side movable role piece 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role piece 14R (first performance device) when the LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) (first light-emitting means) that are emitted from the respective end faces of the left-side movable role piece 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role piece 14R (first performance device) are emitting light. Specifically, even when LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are emitted from the end faces of the left-side movable role piece 14L (first performance device) formed from a colorless transparent material and the right-side movable role piece 14R (first performance device) formed from a colorless transparent material, causing their outer shapes (outlines) to glow due to the light irradiation, the first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left-side movable role piece 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role piece 14R (first performance device) that is blocked by the left-side movable role piece 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role piece 14R (first performance device) is not blocked by the left-side movable role piece 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role piece 14R (first performance device), and this first image can be viewed through the left-side movable role piece 14L (first performance device) and the right-side movable role piece 14R (first performance device). According to this configuration, when the LED (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) (first light-emitting means) is illuminated from the end surface of each of the left movable role piece 14L (first performance device) formed of a colorless transparent material and the right movable role piece 14R (first performance device) formed of a colorless transparent material, the outer shape (outline) of the left movable role piece 14L (first performance device) itself and the outer shape (outline) of the right movable role piece 14R (first performance device) itself are illuminated, but the left movable role piece 14L (first performance device) The first image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the left movable prop 14L (first performance device) and the right movable prop 14R (first performance device) can be viewed through the left movable prop 14L (first performance device) formed from a colorless transparent member and the right movable prop 14R (first performance device) formed from a colorless transparent member.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77, the third movable role 17 (second performance device) has a built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable role 17 (second performance device). The performance in the display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77 is such that the second image can be made difficult to see through the third movable role 17 (second performance device) regardless of whether the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable role 17 (second performance device) is emitting light. Specifically, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable role device 17 (second performance device) is blocked by the third movable role device 17 (second performance device). Furthermore, even if the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable role device 17 (second performance device) is illuminated, the third image is displayed instead of the second image, making this third image visible. In this way, regardless of whether the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable role device 17 (second performance device) is illuminated, the second image can be made difficult to see through the third movable role device 17 (second performance device). According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable role device 17 (second performance device) can be made difficult to see at all times through the third movable role device 17 (second performance device).

In display performance B by the performance device of Figure 78 and display performance C by the performance device of Figure 79, the decorative member 10 (second performance device) has a built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second performance device). The performance in display performance B by the performance device of Figure 78 and the performance in display performance C by the performance device of Figure 79 are designed to make the second image difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second performance device) regardless of whether the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second performance device) is emitting light. Specifically, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second performance device) is obscured by the decorative member 10 (second performance device). Furthermore, even when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) of the sub-liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel) 13 of the decorative member 10 (second performance device) is illuminated, the third image is displayed instead of the second image, and this third image remains visible. In this manner, the second image is rendered difficult to view through the decorative member 10 (second performance device) regardless of whether the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) of the sub-liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel) 13 of the decorative member 10 (second performance device) is illuminated. With this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second performance device) can be constantly rendered difficult to view through the decorative member 10 (second performance device).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display performance A by the performance device of Fig. 77, the third movable accessory 17 (second performance device) is capable of displaying a third image different from the second image. The performance in the display performance A by the performance device of Fig. 77 is such that the third image can be viewed when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) in the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable accessory 17 (second performance device) is emitting light. According to this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the third movable role device 17 (second performance device) is always difficult to see through the third movable role device 17 (second performance device), but the third image, not the second image, is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable role device 17 (second performance device), and this third image can be seen, so that a new image called the third image (in other words, an image not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7) can be provided to the player. Furthermore, the display of the third image can suggest the expected probability of winning for the variation (i.e., the variation (variation display) of the left performance pattern 8L, center performance pattern 8C, and right performance pattern 8R (a set of performance patterns) by the variation icon 9C), thereby increasing the variety of performances.

In display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79, the decorative element 10 (second effect device) is capable of displaying a third image different from the second image. In display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 and display effect C by the effect device of FIG. 79, the third image is visible when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative element 10 (second effect device) is illuminated. With this configuration, the second image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative element 10 (second effect device) is always difficult to see through the decorative element 10 (second effect device). However, the third image, instead of the second image, is displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative element 10 (second effect device), and this third image is visible. Therefore, a new image, the third image (in other words, an image not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), can be provided to the player. Furthermore, the display of the third image can suggest the likelihood of winning for the change (i.e., the change display (change icon 9C) of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (a set of effect symbols)), thereby increasing the variety of effects.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77, the second movable role 15 (first performance device) is a movable body that moves between a retracted position and an advanced position, and the third movable role 17 (second performance device) is a movable body that moves between a retracted position and an advanced position. The second movable role 15 (first performance device) is equipped with a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a having a display screen, and the third movable role 17 (second performance device) is equipped with a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a having a display screen. The movable body can indicate to the player that the probability of winning is higher than when it is not activated, so players are highly interested in the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the second movable device 15 (first performance device), which is a movable body, is made visible through the second movable device 15 (first performance device), which is a movable body (i.e., by displaying the first image on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided in the second movable device 15), and the anticipation of a win can be heightened by the performance caused by the operation of the second movable device 15 (first performance device), which is a movable body.

Furthermore, in display effect C using the effect device of Figure 79, the left-side movable role element 14L (first effect element) and the right-side movable role element 14R (first effect element) are movable bodies that each move between a retracted position and an advanced position, while the decorative member 10 (second effect element) is positioned on the lower right side of the front of the image display device 7 and is fixed in a manner that covers the lower right area of the display screen 7a (part of the display screen 7a), and differs from the left-side movable role element 14L (first effect element) and the right-side movable role element 14R (first effect element) in that the decorative member 10 is not attached to the movable body. The movable body can indicate to the player that the likelihood of winning is higher than when it is not activated, so players are highly interested in the operation of the movable body. Therefore, the first image, which is the image displayed in the areas of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the movable left-side movable part 14L (first performance device) and the rear of the movable right-side movable part 14R (first performance device), respectively, can be seen through the movable left-side movable part 14L (first performance device) and right-side movable part 14R (first performance device), because the movable left-side movable part 14L (first performance device) and right-side movable part 14R (first performance device) are each made of a colorless and transparent material, and the anticipation of a win can be heightened by the performance created by the operation of the movable left-side movable part 14L (first performance device) and right-side movable part 14R (first performance device).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of display effects using the effect device are shown.
[Modification 1]
Display effect A by the effect device of Fig. 77, display effect B by the effect device of Fig. 78, and display effect C by the effect device of Fig. 79 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state known as a left-handed hit (normal game state). However, they may also be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 210. In other words, they may be performed in a game state known as a right-handed hit (a specific game state different from the normal game state). They may also be performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28.

[Modification 2]
The decorative member 10 in display performance B by the performance device of Fig. 78 and display performance C by the performance device of Fig. 79 may be a still image (still picture) or a moving image (video) as the third image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10. The third image may also be a combination of a still image (still picture) and a moving image (video). This increases the variety of effects that can be produced by the third image.

[Modification 3]
The decorative member 10 in the display performance B by the performance device of FIG. 78 and the display performance C by the performance device of FIG. 79 includes a sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13. However, instead of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13, a third image display device may be provided, which is a performance device configured with a printed member on which a third image is printed and a built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) arranged behind the printed member. This allows the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) to be illuminated to display the third image. Note that multiple printed members on which the third image is printed may be provided, so that each third image corresponds to the light emission color of the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means). In this case, the third images printed on the multiple printed members are different from each other. In this way, if the light colors of the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) are, for example, red, green, blue, and white, when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) emits red light, the third image printed on the first printed member is displayed with red light; when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) emits green light, the third image printed on the second printed member is displayed with green light; when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) emits blue light, the third image printed on the third printed member is displayed with blue light; and when the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) emits white light, the third image printed on the fourth printed member is displayed with white light. Also, a performance lamp (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) may be arranged along the periphery of the decorative member 10 equipped with the third image display device, and the performance lamp may be configured to illuminate its own outline (contour). In this case, the performance lamp (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) along the periphery of the decorative member 10 equipped with the third image display device emits light in conjunction with the illumination of the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) of the third image display device.

[Modification 4]
It is also possible to arrange a performance lamp (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) along the periphery of the third movable role object 17 (second performance device) in display performance A by the performance device of Fig. 77, the decorative member 10 (second performance device) in display performance B by the performance device of Fig. 78, and the decorative member 10 (second performance device) in display performance C by the performance device of Fig. 79, and to configure the performance lamp to emit light so as to illuminate its own outer shape (outline). In this case, the performance lamp (full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) arranged along the periphery of the third movable role object 17 (second performance device) in display performance A by the performance device of Fig. 77 emits light in conjunction with the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided in the third movable role object 17 (second performance device). In addition, the performance lamps (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) arranged along the outer periphery of the decorative member 10 (second performance device) in display performance B by the performance device of Figure 78 and the decorative member 10 (second performance device) in display performance C by the performance device of Figure 79 light up in conjunction with the built-in backlight (second light-emitting means) of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 13 provided in the decorative member 10 (second performance device).

[Modification 5]
In the display effect B by the display device of FIG. 78 and the display effect C by the display device of FIG. 79, the decorative element 10 (second display element) is positioned at the lower right front of the image display device 7 and fixed in a manner that covers the lower right area of the display screen 7a (part of the display screen 7a). However, the decorative element 10 (second display element) may be configured as a retracted position, where it is fixed at the lower right front of the image display device 7, and move horizontally leftward from this retracted position to the center of the image display device 7 (advance position), thereby serving as a movable element that can move between the retracted and advanced positions. The movable element can indicate to the player that the likelihood of winning is higher than when it is not activated, and therefore players are highly interested in the operation of the movable element. Therefore, the decorative element 10 (second display element) can display the third image while the movable element is activated to create an effect that heightens the expectation of winning.

[Modification 6]
In the display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77, when the third movable part 17 reaches the advanced position from the retracted position and comes to a standstill, the advanced position of the third movable part 17 is such that when the second movable part 15 is stopped at its advanced position (the center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), the third movable part 17 and the second movable part 15 do not overlap (do not interfere) with each other in the front-to-back direction, and the right end of the third movable part 17 and the left end of the second movable part 15 are separated by a predetermined distance (for example, 10 mm). However, if the third movable part 17 is configured to be able to move within the space between the second movable part 15 and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the third movable part 17 may move behind the second movable part 15 and in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, the first image, which is the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second movable part 15, is blocked by the second movable part 15 and further by the third movable part 17 moving behind the second movable part 15. Therefore, in front of (closer to) this blocked first image, the third movable part 17 moving behind the second movable part 15 and the image displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided on this third movable part 17 (flash image IG3 in Figure 77 (D)) are placed and displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided on the second movable part 15.

[Modification 7]
In the display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77, the second movable role 15 and the third movable role 17 are both stationary in the retracted position, and images are not displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided for the second movable role 15 and the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided for the third movable role 17. However, when the second movable role 15 is stationary in the retracted position, if there is an area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second movable role 15, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the second movable role 15 may be displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 15a provided for the second movable role 15, or other performance images (for example, an image suggesting the expected probability of winning for the change (change performance (change display) by the change icon 9C), an image representing the world view of the game board 2, an effect image, etc.) may be displayed. On the other hand, when the third movable device 17 is stationary in the retracted position, even if there is an area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17, the image displayed in the area of the display screen 7a corresponding to the rear of the third movable device 17 may not be displayed on the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal device (liquid crystal panel) 17a provided on the third movable device 17, but other performance images (for example, an image indicating the expected probability of winning for the change (change performance (change display) by the change icon 9C), an image representing the world view of the game board 2, an effect image, etc.) may be displayed instead.

[Modification 8]
In the display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77, the display performance B by the performance device of Figure 78, and the display performance C by the performance device of Figure 79, the left performance pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center performance pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right performance pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are card-type performance patterns, and the cards have number patterns (numbers "1" to "9") with character patterns corresponding to the number patterns. However, the left performance pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center performance pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right performance pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image may be composed of number patterns (numbers "1" to "9") instead of card-type performance patterns. In this case, the size of the performance patterns composed of number patterns will be the same (including approximately the same) as the size of the card-type performance patterns.

[Modification 9]
The display effect B by the effect device of FIG. 78 was achieved by attaching an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) made of a transparent, flat, colorless, transparent member to the game board 2. However, instead, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 made of a transparent, flat, colorless, transparent member may be attached to the central opening of the front frame 53. When the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the game board 2, as described above, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is approximately one to two times smaller than the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but only covers a portion of the display screen 7a. In contrast, when the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is larger than the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 covers the entire area of the display screen 7a.

Therefore, when the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, the size of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is formed to be approximately one to two times smaller than the size of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that it does not cover the entire area of the display screen 7a, but rather covers only a portion of the display screen 7a. In this way, the first image (for example, in Figure 78 (C), the city image HG1, the left performance pattern 8L during the changing performance (changing display), the middle performance pattern 8C during the changing performance (changing display), the right performance pattern 8R during the changing performance (changing display), the changing display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the changing icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, etc.) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device) can be made visible through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first performance device), and the second image (for example, in Figure 78 (C), the city image HG1, the right performance pattern 8R during the changing performance (changing display)) displayed in the area of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the rear of the decorative member 10 (second performance device) can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second performance device). With this configuration, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first image can be made visible through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device), while the second image can be made difficult to see through the decorative member 10 (second effect device). Therefore, even if the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it can be presented to the player as an image that gives a different impression through the illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 (first effect device) and the decorative member 10 (second effect device).

[Modification 10]
Display performance A by the performance device of Figure 77, display performance B by the performance device of Figure 78, and display performance C by the performance device of Figure 79 may not include some of the performances described above, or other performances may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine that has a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images on a display screen, and displays a set of effect symbols capable of informing a lottery result on the display screen,
a first effect device is disposed in front of the display screen so as to cover a portion of the display screen;
a second effect device is disposed at a position different from that of the first effect device so as to cover a portion of the display screen;
An effect can be executed in which the image displayed on the display screen is visible through the first effect device and the image displayed on the display screen is difficult to view through the second effect device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
The effect is such that a first image displayed in an area of the display screen corresponding to the rear of the first effect device is visible through the first effect device, and a second image displayed in an area of the display screen corresponding to the rear of the second effect device is difficult to view through the second effect device.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E1-3
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
the first effect device has a first light-emitting means,
The effect is to make the first image visible through the first effect device when the first light-emitting means is emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E1-4
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2 or E1-3,
the second effect device has second light-emitting means,
The effect is to make the second image difficult to see through the second effect device regardless of whether the second light-emitting means is emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E1-5
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-4,
the second effect device is capable of displaying a third image different from the second image;
The effect is such that the third image is visible when the second light-emitting means is emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Aspect E1-6
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5,
At least one of the first performance device and the second performance device is provided on a movable body that moves between a retracted position and an advanced position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

While the gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is configured as a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed machine, the gaming machine 1 may have other configurations. For example, the gaming machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, etc. Furthermore, while the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit operated by the player, but this is not limited to this; the operation unit operated by the player may also be a lever, trigger, etc. Also, in the display effects of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image representing the effect button 63 may be used to execute the display effects, but instead, an image representing the select button 68 may be used to execute the display effects, or an image representing a lever or trigger may be used to execute the display effects.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but this is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the image display device 7. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined to create a single display effect. In other words, two or more of the multiple effect examples and/or variations described above may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may be equipped with a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). At least a portion of the display effects performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub-display device.

This aspect has been described above based on embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of this aspect and are not intended to limit this aspect. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit or the scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are also included in this aspect.

1... Gaming machine 3... Play area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Hold image (hold icon)
9C...Relevant pending image (relevant pending icon)
14...First movable accessory 15...Second movable accessory 20, 30...First start port 21...Second start port 66...Frame lamp 81...Game control microcomputer 91...Performance control microcomputer 101...Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is a display effect that displays a first image,
the second display effect is a display effect in which an operation means image representing the operation means is superimposed on the first image,
the third display effect is a display effect in which the first image is changed from a first color to a second color by operating the operating means,
the object represented by the first image displayed in the first display performance changes in shape,
The operation means image displayed in the second display performance is displayed in an area different from an area in which a decorative pattern is displayed,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by: